Home

EB8000 Serial User Guide

Contents

1. Bs 2 s 4 sla HONnnNNOANnM Cth a s T a h i k Ret BERR Caps Alt gt 4 Lid WEI NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Small Keyboard Use small keyboard to input numerical information System Information Network Display Network information including HMI IP address and related information Network Version Ip Address 192 168 1 201 Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Route Address 192 168 1 254 40 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Version Display information of the HMI system version System infornactior Network Version MTSxxx firmware build 20081013 Type MT6104T System Setting Set or modify system parameters Password has to be confirmed for security Enter you password pass word __Ok Cancel a Network A project can be downloaded to HMI via Ethernet The IP address of target HMI must be correctly set If Auto Get IP Address is selected IP address will be automatically assigned from local DHCP network If IP address get from below is selected IP address and other network information have to be inputted by the user 41 Li WE INTEK b Time Date System time date will be displayed at the corner of the bottom right after being set up 42 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual c Security The default of the password is 111111 EB8000 provides strict security protection f
2. 106 dehy em E 100 speed o f Periodical JOG Periodically increment function A set word object can use the interval set in Time interval and the value set in Inc value to automatically increase the value of the word device and the result won t exceed the value in Upper limit Attribute pet otyle Periodic JOG fup 20 PUPP a TEES Ine value 1 Upper limit 0 i i i z Time interval 1Osecondis w g Automatic JOG Periodically decrement function A set word object can use the interval set in Time interval and the value set in Dec value to automatically decrease the value of the word device and the result won t go less than the value in Bottom limit 164 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute met otyle Automatic JOG down to low limat Dec value E Bottom limit E Time interval i O second fs K h Periodical bounce Periodically bouncing function A Set word object will add the value set in Inc value to the value of the word device with the regulated interval set in Time interval until the result value reaches the value in Upper limit and then subtract the value set in Inc value from the value of the word device with the regulated i
3. The following illustrations are the results of simulation When the value of LW 9134 is changed the content of the Text Object will also be changed automatically 374 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual English LW9134 language mode O fe FH WS SIMPLE LW9134 language mode i pi KOREAN LW9134 language mode 4 li 375 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 16 Address Tag Library 16 1 Creating Address Tag Library Users are generally recommended to define commonly used addresses in the Address Tag Library when start to build a project It not only avoids inputting addresses repeatedly but also expresses the function of an address more clearly Click Address Tag Library Manager in toolbar to call up the Address Tag Library dialogue as below 4l gt Address Tag Library Manager Address Taz Library Address type Addres Reads rite Users can import MTSOO tag to represent the address Save Tag File Load Tag File Export CSV Import CS4 Setting Description S New Adda new Address Tag Settings Modiythe selected Tag SSS 376 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Load Tag file Load existing tgl file to Address Tag Library Export CSV Export current Address Tag Library to the appointed space in CSV format Import CSV Import the saved CSV file of Address Tag Library to current project The picture below
4. e Bar width ratio o display the ratio between bar and object width Below illustration displays two ratio 50 and 100 Hs 50 of 100 224 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Bar To set the bar s Frame Background color Bar style and Bar color See color style the picture below Background Bar st yle a Target When the register value meets the following condition the color of filled Indicator area will change to the Target color Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of dynamic address Users can also set address in Outline tab while adding a dynamic address Target Value Tolerance lt Register value lt Target Value Tolerance See the picture below in here Target Value 5 Tolerance 1 if the register value is equal to or larger than 5 1 4 and equal to or less than 5 1 6 the filled area s color of the bar will change to the Target color Target value 5 Tolerance 1 Alarm When register s value is larger than High limit the color of filled area Indicator will change to High color when register s value is smaller than Low 225 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ee limit the color of filled area will change to Low color Target Alarm When select Enable the Low limit and High limit of Alarm indicator Dynamic and the Target Value of
5. Interior pattem S Patter Style Duplicate these attributes to every state Picture F Us stun Preview acai laad State O0 v O Eackarownd MEE 9 2 1 Settings of Shape Library Shape Library Users can tick Use shape to enable this setting and select the shape from the library Inner Tick Inner to enable this setting and select a color for inner part of the shape Click drop down button to open the Color dialogue to choose a color there as shown below Users can also customize their own color and click Add to Custom Colors for system to remember this color 110 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Custom colors IDE sug 160 E err Sak 240 ustom Colors gt gt Coloris alid Lur 120 see Frame Tick Frame to enable this setting and select a color for the frame of the shape The way of setting is same as above Interior Pattern Click to select the style of the interior pattern of the shape The color of this pattern can also be set Pattern Style Click Pattern Style button to open the dialogue Pattern Style 2 ee Boo i beeen atm aa mn mnn aaa ana Pana anaran Po SE ESS EA BSS Pal L E m Ea FA EA Duplicate these attributes to every state Duplicate all attributes of the current state to other states 111 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 9 2 2 Settings of Picture Library Picture Library Use
6. 26 4 4 The Order of Examining Criteria EasyPrinter examines criteria in ascending order every time a file is uploaded Once the file is qualified for a criterion it stops the examination and starts over for next file Therefore users should place the criteria with more specification upward in the Convert Batch File and place the less specitic criteria downward Take the 5 criteria mentioned in the previous sections for example the correct order is Correct order for the previous criteria W UEL H dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs PathName Voltage dtl EasyConverter c PathName EasyView 524 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual dtl EasyConverter c PathName 192 168 1 26 dtl EasyConverter c PathName evt EasyConverter c PathName 525 1 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 27 EasySimulator EasySimulator enables users to perform Online Offline simulation without installing EayBuilder8000 software To achieve that users have to prepare the following files in one folder 27 1 Prepare Files 1 driver gt win32 2 320x234 bmp ili driver 3 480x234 bmp ieee E 480x234 bmp 4 640x480 bmp E 640x480 bmp 5 800x480 bmp 800x480 bmp 6 800x600 bmp m 800x600 bmp 7 1024x768 bmp g 1024x768 bmp 8 com exe m com exe Le EasySimulator exe 9 EasySimulator exe qui gui exe 10 gui exe xob_pos det 11 xob_pos def Users can fi
7. Activate the Trigger address the system will have designated window printed out You may configure three different ways to activate the Trigger address 1 State change from OFF to ON OFF gt ON 2 State change from ON to OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either from ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON The designated window can be one of following three different types Source Window For print Current base window O Designate window no PLL name Setting Printer USB disk 1 w Current base window Print the current base window when the operation is activated Window no from register Print the window designated by a PLC device when the operation is 320 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual activated if LVWO 14 the window no 14 will be printed out Designate window no Select a base window to be printed out when the operation is activated 1 The system performs a background printing process when the printed window is not the current base window 2 For a window designed to be printed at background users should put neither direct window nor indirect window in it 321 L ws WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 28 Schedule Overview Schedule object is used to turn on off a bit or write a value to a word device at designated time The time schedule setting is very flexible it can be on daily basis or weekly basis For more advance application you can use a table a block
8. DELAY time Description Suspends the execution of the current macro for at least the specified interval time The unit of time is millisecond time can be a constant or a variable macro_command main int time 500 DELAY 100 delay 100 ms DELAY time delay 500 ms end macro_command ADDSUM ADDSUWM source start result data_count Description Adds up the elements of an array source from source start to source start data_count 1 to generate a checksum Puts in the checksum into result result must be a variable data_count is the amount of the accumulated elements and can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 short checksum data 0 0x1 data 1 0x2 416 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual data 2 0x3 data 3 0x4 data 4 0x5 ADDSUM data 0 checksum 5 checksum is Oxf end macro_command XORSUM XORSUM source start result data_count Description Uses an exclusion method to calculate the checksum from source start to source start data_count 1 Puts in the checksum into result result must be a variable data_count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short checksum XORSUM data 0 checksum 5 checksum is 0x1 end macro_command CRC source start result data_count Description Calculates 16 bit CR
9. Execute macro m Cancel Setting Description Read Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address Systme tag Index register of the bit device that control the display of toggle switch state Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Invert signal Display shape with inverse state for example the present state is OFF but it displays the shape of ON state Write Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address 175 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual address Attribute Systme tag Index register of the bit device that system set value to The write address can be the same as or different from the read address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Write when button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is not selected the operation is activated at touch down This is used to select the operation mode The available operation modes for selection include Set ON Set OFF Toggle and Momentary Refer to the illustrations in the Set Bit Object section of this chapter for related information Users can execute macro command by trigging toggle switch This function is the same as that of set bit object Please refer to the chapter of set bit object 176 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder80
10. OFF This will trigger data sampling when the status of assigned address changes from ON to OFF ON lt OFF Trigger data sampling when the status of assigned address is changed Read address Select a device type to be the source of data sampling Data Record Max data records Max number of data records that can be saved by one data sampling definition in one day lf sampling time interval is set as 0 1 second then the max number of data records is 864000 1 If the data source in the trend display is in real time mode the earlier record will be deleted and new record will be added and displayed in the trend display object 2 If the data source in the trend display is in historical mode the data will still be sampled Auto stop When the number of data sampling equals to Max data records and the Auto stop option is selected HMI will stop sampling data automatically Example Condition Set Max data records as Set Max data records as 10 10 without checking auto and check auto Stop Stop Trend display real The data will keep the latest Stop displaying after reaching Data sampling Keep recording and delete Stop recording after reaching pene lpcateta 0a S Data Format The formats of different data in one data sampling A data sampling may include more than one type of records Data sampling in EB8000 is able to retrieve different types of records at the same time Users can
11. 22 8 Password and Operation Level Description LB 9050 Set ON to logout LB 9060 Set ON when a password error occurs When set ON the MT8000 will copy LB 9061 data stored in LW 9500 to LW 9523 W and use them as valid password LW 9219 Show the existing user No R 478 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Level 0 6 of currently entered LW 9222 password LW 9500 User 1 s password R W LW 9501 LW 9502 User 2 s password W LW 9503 LW 9504 User 3 d ser 3 S passwor RIW LW 9505 LW 9506 User 4 d ser 4 s passwor RIW LW 9507 LW 9508 User 5 d ser 5 s passwor RIW LW 9509 LW 9510 User 6 d ser 6 s passwor RIW LW 9511 LW 9512 User 7 s password LW 9513 LW 9514 User 3 d ser 8 s passwor RIW LW 9515 LW 9516 User 9 d ser 9 s passwor RIW LW 9517 LW 9518 User 10 d ser 10 s passwor RW LW 9519 LW 9520 User 11 s password R LW 9521 R W R W LW 9522 User 12 s password LW 9523 o R W R R W Rw Rw R W W R W R W W R 479 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 9 Time of HMI Remote Description HMI Control LW 9010 Local time second BCD R W R W R W LW 9016 Local time week BCD R R R LW 9023 Local time week BIN LW 9030 System time in units of 0 1 second LW 9031 timing from the machine starts up 22 10 Hardware of HMI Remote Description HMI Set
12. 3 Set DM12 86 DM10 4 86 DM100 4 Set DM13 10 RW10 5 Set DM10 1 The system will execute the data transfer operation d Back light control write back 318 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Set Trigger address to ON the system will turn on off the backlight and reset the Trigger address Any touch on the screen will turn the backlight on e Back light control This operation is the same as Back light control write back except the system would not reset the Trigger address e Sound control Sound Library Beep Activate the Trigger address the system will play the sound select a sound from sound library for the PLC Control You may configure three different ways to activate the Trigger address 1 State change from OFF to ON OFF gt ON 2 State change from ON to OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either from ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON f Execute macro program Trigger address PLL name Setting Trigger mode OFF copy E Activate the Trigger address the system will execute the Macro You may configure three different ways to activate the Trigger address 319 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 State change from OFF to ON OFF gt ON 2 State change from ON to OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either from ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON 4 Always active when ON h Screen hardcopy
13. 5 20091002 or later supports Firmware Font files Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time a Reset recipe L Reset event log C Reset data log a HMI after download Automatically using current settings to download after compiling Download Stop Setting Description o HMI Name Input the HMI name for downloading project Search npu the HMI name to search the designated HMI HAT nane test ir Search al DE 200002 or laber super te Search all mi o 252 153 1 214 Defaut HeT i02 455 1 33 fbs 132 255 1 15 0an arry pe 20091002 oF bia supports 34 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Password Input the password Firmware Check Firmware to update all of the kernel programs of HMI Note It is necessary when downloading file to HMI the first time Font Files Download the font used in project to HMI Reset recipe Checking these the selected files will be erased Reset event log before downloading Reset data log Reboot HMI after download Checking this HMI will reboot after finishing downloading Automatically using current If this is checked system will download project to settings to download after HMI according to last settings compiling Click Download to start downloading the project 35 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 4 Hardware Settings 4 1 I O Ports of HMI 4 1 1 USB Port
14. Meter Display Object will be created See the picture below The picture below shows the General tab in the Meter Display Object s Properties dialogue box 228 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Meter Display Object General Outline Limits Shape Read address PLC name Local HMI s Setting Address Liw we oC 16 bit Unsigned Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of the word devices that controls the display of meter Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 229 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Meter Display Object General Cutline Limits Shape De eree saitdegee 0S degre Backaround Backerownd Profile Full circle Transparent Tick marks Enable Color M v Coordinate Mainseale 4 Length Pointer mse Width 4 iw Pin point Rais nner z Circle O Rectangle Cancel In the above dialogue box users can set the meter display object s outline Refer to the picture below for the names of each part of the meter Tick mark M Corrdinate Pointer Pin point Range mark 230 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description Degree Set the object s start degree and end degree the angle range is 0 360 degrees The following pictures sho
15. PL name i Local HMI wt Setting Preset tome PT PL name Local HMI s Setting Elapsed time ET Enable PLE name Setting Reset bit F PL name i Local HMI wr Setting J Cancel mose oeseri O On delay Point 1 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases The Q remains OFF Point 2 When the ET equals the PT the Q be turned ON and the TI be turned OFF 350 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Accumulated On delay Point 3 When the IN turns OFF the Q be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 Point 4 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases Point 5 Turn the IN to OFF before the ET reaches the PT the Tl be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 the Q remains OFF Point 1 When the IN turns ON the Tl remains OFF and the Q be turned ON Point 2 When the IN turns OFF the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains ON Point 3 When the ET equals the PT the Q and TI are turned OFF Point 4 When the IN turns ON the Q be turned ON and the ET reset to O Point 5 When the IN turns OFF the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains ON Point 6 Turn the IN to ON before the ET reaches the PT the Tl be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 the Q remains ON Point 1 When the IN turns ON the Tl and Q are turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases Po
16. PLO nare Addwess PLO nare Addvess Setting Descriptor SOS S S lt lt S Text Content The text content of event log shown in Alarm Bar Alarm Display and Event Display Please refer to Chapter 9 Object General ht Unsiened ht Urcigned ht Uasiened hit sine Properties for more information The data of LW address of the triggered event can be included in the content 98 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Write value for Event Display object Format d initial sign LW s address d end sign For example if the content is set as High Temperature 20d when an event is triggered the value of LW20 will be displayed If the value of LW20 is 13 when an event is triggered the content displayed in Event Display object will be High Temperature 13 Except for LW data in certain device type set when an event is triggered can also be shown in the content This device type should be the same as that of the read address of event log Format d initial sign PLC s address d end sign For example if Device type in Read address is MW when content is set as High Temperature 15d and the value in MW15 is 42 while the event is triggered the displayed content in Event Display will be High Temperature 42 Font Color Users can set Font and Color for each event The font and
17. Setup EasyBuilder8000_4 10 Sid Ready to Install Setup is now ready to begin installing EasyBuilders000_ 4 10 on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back iF you wank bo review or change any settings Destination location C EBS0004 410 Start Menu Folder EBSOO0Y410 Additional tasks Additional icons Create a desktop icon 8 Installation processing setup FasyBouildersU00 4 10 Installing Please wait while Setup installs EasyBuilders000_4 10 on your computer Extracting Files 1 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 9 Click Finish to complete the installation Setup EasyBuilder8000_4 10 am Completing the EasyBuilder8000_4 10 Setup Wizard Setup has Finished installing EasyBuilder6000_ 4 10 on your computer The application maw be launched by selecting the installed icons Click Finish to exit Setup 10 Start EB8000 project from menu Start Programs EB8000V410 FasyBuilders000 Ean Converter EasyDiagnoser FasyPrinter Fasyoinulator 5 Project Manager RecipeEditor ReleaseMote fm EBSOOOT410 t 2 Uninstall EssyBuilderS000 The description of each item in EB8000 menu Item Description S EB8000 editing software Conversion tool for Data Sampling and Event Log TF EasyDiagnoser Communication monitoring tool via online simulation EasyP rater Remote printer server 13 Ly WE NTEK Ea
18. Support devices with USB interface such as mouse keyboard USB stick printer etc 4 1 2 Ethernet Port Connect devices with Ethernet communication interface such as PLC laptop etc support exchanging data via Network 4 1 3 CF Card or SD Card Download Upload project via CF Card or SD Card including Recipe transfer Event Log Data Log etc 4 1 4 Serial I O Port COM ports RS 232 RS485 2W 4W can be connected to PLC or other peripheral devices Here we view RS 422 the same as RS 485 4 wire Please refer to the PLC connection guide to make sure that PLC and HMI are correctly connected Meanwhile please make sure all DIP switches at the back of HMI are pulled down means off the default value In addition Weintek provides MT8 COM1 Multi Connector cable and MT8 COM3 Multi Connector cable to expand one COM port to multiple independent COM ports so that the convenience and efficiency of the operation can be improved 36 Lub WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 4 2 HMI System Settings Before operating HMI users have to complete the HMI system settings After this users can develop their own operation interface through EB8000 editing software The following illustrates each system setting respectively 4 2 1 System Reset Each HMI is equipped with a set of reset button and DIP switch When users use DIP switch to change modes corresponding functions will be triggered If system password is lost or for
19. 13 454 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual for 0 to b 0 step 1 ali 20 1 10 next i SetData a 0 Device 1 4x 0 13 end macro_command 455 ges WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 19 How to Set HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 1 How to Set HMI as MODBUS Device After setting as MODBUS Server the data of MT8000 can be read or written via MODBUS protocol MODBUS Server MODELS Server ee Ei Ethernet h 4 o Ethernet 2 MODBUS Server MODBUS Server i RS2I2 RS4SS pa O OpS23S R5485 bpi T p s 2 hn Refer to the illustration above it shows MT8000 is set as MODBUS Server The HMI PC or other devices can use MODBUS protocol to read or write the data from MT8000 via Ethernet or RS232 485 interface Please follow the steps as below OOOO SL OOOO SLM OOOO RLM 19 1 1 Creating a MODBUS Server First of all create a new device MODBUS Server in the Device tab of System Parameter Settings The PLC I F can be set to RS232 RS485 2W RS485 4W Ethernet or USB 456 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual System Parameter Settings Extended Memory Printes Backup Server Device Model General System Setting Security Device list Device Properties Name MoDBUS Serer S 23 XW d OHMI PLC Location Local vi Settings
20. 19854561 range 1 4294987295 User 12 C Enable Project pasword MTP file Enable pettine Before editing project a pop up window will ask password for access the project 548 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LU RasyBuilderf000 File Tool Help O Bee KasyBuilderS000 Password Limited to 3 times Findcors O me od Object list v 549 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 31 Memory Map Communication MemoryMap communication protocol is similar to IBM 3764R it is used when memory data with low variation High variation may cause MemoryMap overloading MemoryMap is used for communication between two devices When setting the MemoryMap with two devices one has to be set as Master and another is Slave In normal condition Master and Slave do not communication except when one of them has change memory data which has assign for each other After data is identical that the communication will stop communicating So this is used for keeping the consistent data between two devices Master and Slave via corresponding registers The corresponding memory is the same property as MT8000 s register MW MB from Master and Slave The 1000 words MW MB are reserved for MemoryMap in MT8000 for communication The feature of memory MB is correspondence with MW according following list MBO MBf and MWO MB10 MB1f and MW1 they are all indicate the same register Device n
21. Color IT T Data Set the data samples samples to scroll frame and color of background samples Data samples 50 E pamples to scroll 10 Enable scroll swicth Frofile color Transparent Frame ME Background 258 259 Mime _____ eae ier 000 User s Manual WE NTEK Eas L wene is EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual _ User s Manual Enable Grid Disable Grid Channel Set the color and width of each trend curve Channel Channel 0 a Fen property Color Width 1 SS S Bas ee See 260 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual On line operation How to show a trend curve a Write the number of data to No of data address i e control word address 1 b Have the content of data block ready for display NOTE data block start from control word address 2 c Write 1 to Control word address the previous trend curve remains and the new content in data block will be plot on the screen d The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve displayed Word Address Last displayed graph ar Display Control No of Data 40 20 w Data 3 Data 1 NOTE During the period between c and d do not change the content of Control No of Data and Data it might cause error for trend curve plot How to clear a trend curve a Write 2 to Control
22. General in Chapter 5 System Parameters to set this number The type of address Bit or Word mode type Read By reading the address set here system obtains a value and will use it to address check if an event reaches the condition to be triggered Please refer to Chapter 9 Object General Properties for more information Notification When an event is triggered the specific message is sent out from Notification address Select Set ON to send ON message to this address or select Set OFF to send OFF message to this address Please refer to Chapter 9 Object General Properties 95 Ly WE NTEK Condition EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The trigger condition of an event When Address type of an event is Bit then ON or OFF in Trigger can be selected The illustration below shows if Trigger ON is selected and the status of Read address changes from OFF to ON an event will be triggered and generate an event log record or an alarm Condition When the Address type of an event is Word several selections are available as follows Under the condition system will read values from Read address and compare them with the trigger conditions to decide if an event is to be triggered If the trigger condition is set as or lt gt In tolerance and Out tolerance need be set while In tolerance is used as trigger condition and Out tolerance is used as system
23. New ASCII Input Object 196 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew ASCII Input Object General Data Entry Security Shape Font b i O Mask Use UNICODE Reverse high low byte Read address PLC name ia O Setting Address piu Notification O Set ON Set OFF Before writing After writing PL name Earca HMI wt Setting Cancel Setting Description Mask When the data is displayed will be used to replace all texts Use Click Use UNICODE to display data in UNICODE format Otherwise the UNICODE system displays the character in ASCII format This feature can be used with function key UNICODE Not every Unicode has corresponding font stored in the system The font of UNICODE is only available for those Unicode character that registered function key Reverse In normal condition the ASCII code is displayed in low byte high byte high low byte order The reverse selection makes the system display ASCII characters in high byte low byte order 197 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address Notification Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of the word device that system display its value and write new data to it Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object No of words To set the length of ASCII data in the unit of word
24. Select higher settings for taster performance Receive Buffer Low 1 Tranemit Butter Low 1 COM Port Humber Select COM 9 and click OK the virtual serial port will be changed to COM 9 535 L ws WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Device Manager File Action view Help ma 2 e Batteries R Computer S Disk drives a Display adapters Floppy disk controllers H Floppy disk drives 4 IDE ATAJATAPI controllers gt Keyboards 1 Mice and other pointing devices a Ports COM amp LPT aF Communications Pork T0M1 YF Communications Pork TOME Y Printer Port iLE oF Weintek Virtual Serial Port COMS Processors SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers ee oes fap E ae oR Ae a E A It can be found that the virtual COM port be changed to COM 9 on Project Manager Virtual COM Port PC lt gt PLC COM 29 1 2 How to Use Ethernet Mode After installing virtual serial port driver users should follow four steps to use Ethernet mode of pass through Step 1 Set HMI IP connecting PLC For example HMI IP is 192 168 1 206 Step 2 Assign HMI s serial port properties and this port is used to connect PLC For example COM2 RS232 is used to connect PLC 536 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 3 Click Apply and these settings will be updated E Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM oa C Install Uninstall i Apply E l rrr
25. Use broadcast co Baud rate 115200 ka Data is Interval of block pack word nterval of block pack wa Parity Even W Max read commmand size vord Stop bits Step 3 Change Location to Remote and select COM port to connect remote HMI 1 CO HMI PLC PLC PF COM COM Use Device list Device type MT6056T MTSU56T Disable Mame Location O Local HMI Local 1 Remote PLC 1 FATEE FB Series COM 1 master slave mode FATEE FB Series Interface Com 1 11520 After completing all settings described above users can find a new device named Remote PLC 1 on the device table This device has the symbol to mean that HMI uses a COM port not Ethernet to control a remote PLC via other HMI Users can check HMI s local registers to view the communication status 530 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual This local registers indicate the connection states between COM 1 and PLC LB9200 indicates the state between COM 1 and PLC SNO station no 0 and LB9201 indicates the state between COM 1 and PLC LB 9200 LB 9455 When ON it means that connection is normal When OFF it means that disconnect with PLC and set on to retry connecting activity once This local registers indicate the connection states between COM 2 and PLC LB9500 indicates the state between COM 2 and PLC SNO station no 0 and LB9501 indicates the state between COM 2 and
26. gt Objects select Backup and the following dialogue box will appear 513 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Backup Object Ed General Security Shape Label Dewit DOJICE ORW OEW A Historical event log Historical data log Backup postion OUSE 1 OUEZ Remote printerbackup server Note Use L W9032 9029 to change the backup folder name Note Use Remote printerbackup server to store data to a remote PL Enable the server in System Parameter Printen Backup Server settings Fange Stat Today O Yesterday win Attribute Mode Touch tigger kal 8 In Source select Event log 9 In Backup position select Remote printer server 10 In Range select Today and AIl 11 In Attribute select Touch trigger 12 Place the Backup object in the common window window no 4 and you will be able to make backups anytime when needed 13 Compile and download your project to the MT8000 HMI Press the Backup object set in step 12 to make a backup of the Event Log history data The Backup object can be triggered via a bit signal Users can arrange a Scheduler object which turns a bit ON at the end of week to trigger a Backup object to automatically back up all history data 26 3 EasyPrinter Operation Guide 514 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 26 3 1 Appearance aa WT Rests Printer beret ayam i Si fer fe yee Deen tip is ps ew e o
27. or Y For example macro command main missing C6 illegal expression without matching if Missing expression in if statement C7 illegal expression no then without matching if Missing then in if statement C8 illegal expression no end if Missing end if C9 illegal end if without matching if Unfinished If statement before End If C10 illegal else The format of if statement is if logic expression then else if logic expression then end if Any format other than this format will cause a compile error 446 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual C17 illegal expression no for without matching next for statement error missing for before next C18 illegal variable type not integer or char Should be integer of char variable C19 variable type error Missing assign statement C20 must be keyword to or down Missing keyword to or down C21 illegal expression no next The format of for statement is for variable initial value to end value step next variable Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C22 wend statement contains no while While statement error missing while before Wwnd C23 illegal expression without matching wend The format of While statement
28. s normal condition Example 1 Condition Condition Intolerance O o utterance The illustration above indicates that if the value of Read address is greater or equal to 29 30 1 or less or equal to 31 30 1 the event will be triggered 29 lt Read address value lt 31 After the event is triggered only when the value of Read address is greater than 32 30 2 or less than 28 30 2 will the system return to 96 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual normal condition Read address value lt 28 or Read address value gt 32 Example 2 Condition Condition intolerance 1 Outta Take another example above it indicates that the event is triggered when the value of Read address is less than 29 30 1 or greater than 31 30 1 Read address value lt 29 or Read address value gt 31 When the event is triggered system returns to normal condition only when the value of Read address is greater or equal to 28 30 2 or less or equal to 32 30 2 28 lt Read address value lt 32 Message tab Please see the illustration below 97 Da WE INTEK Alarm Event Log General Message Text Content EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Font Color Write value for Event Display object eS E pound Enable ouad Library Beep Play Print TAT Sie nage Sank Mult watch PLO nare Addvess PLO nare ddiess
29. will be used to replace all digitals and the color warning function will be cancelled Number of Left of decimal Pt digits The number of digits before the decimal point Right of decimal Pt The number of digits after the decimal point Scaling Do conversion option The data displayed on the screen is the result of processing the raw data from the word address designated by the Read address When the function is selected it is required to set Engineering low Engineering high and Input low and Input high in the Limitation Supposed that A represents the raw data and B represents the result data the converting formula is as follows B Engineering low A Input low x ratio where the ratio Engineering high Engineering low Input high Input low See the example in the picture below the raw data is 15 after being converted by the above formula as 10 15 0 x 50 10 20 0 40 and the result 40 will be displayed on the numeric input object 192 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual scaline option Do conversion Engineering low Engineering high Limits Direct O Damamic limits Input low Input high Limits To set the source of the range for the input data and to set the warning color effect Direct The low limit and high limit of the input data can be set in Input low and Input high respectively If t
30. yb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 3 1 Off line Simulation To execute click Off line Simulation Rggeasn i marea et ae f EH After clicking users will see their project shown as below 3 3 2 On line Simulation To execute click On line Simulation after correctly connecting the device zarami A On line rimulation j 31 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 4 Download the Project to HMI In the menu select Tool then select download to download the project file to HMI Before downloading be sure to check if all the settings are correct 2 agm A LanlDownload Download reset event log reset data log initializing downloading project downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator At Aa rta EBSO00Y410 100614 eng firmware col downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator 4 se EBSO00V410 100614 enog firrw aregu downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator 4s e048 EBSO00Y410 100614 eng firrare cri downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator A itest xob downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator 5 4s S48 EBBOO0V 410_100614_eng fontitest o downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator At yas ss EBSO00V410 100614 engifont test 1 scan font finished reboot HMI finished finished Password Firmware Font files Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time Reset recip
31. 3 Te poe pis a ar aoe ph z i ihape Ib pb sib New Lib Click the button to add a new Shape Library New Library ed Library name Test i Unattach Lib Click the button to delete the Shape Library in Library from current project FasyBuilder 6000 Do you really want to unattach this bray Delete All States Delete all states of the selected Shape Delete Cur State Delete current state of the selected Shape Rename Rename the selected Shape Place Export the Shape to be placed to current window 358 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual F 1 J d O IDO _ OG 3 t E E Ei F t 1 ht my Rrugms e r T Oami wf Bir maane abe ne i z eral cE i KE p shape Library Ei Libesy we M S aa a peana Sabet Li eaten ET armas Pais Newt sd sommes Geant i sfai 1 Shacel a _ i San Delete AD antes Delete AD Tiii mines gt F e eee e fune s Delete Car State Rine The following shows how to create a new Shape Library and add a Shape with two states to it Step 1 Click New Lib and input the name of the new Shape Library New Library Library name TEST A new Shape Library TEST will be added to the Shape Library dialogue At this moment no Shape is in the library Library State jo Ml PpnREApaagEA button buttonz TEST System Frame System Button System Lamp D ae i cb States O States
32. Connechon Details E Seles ABOUT Options OK Cancel VAC Viewer Free Edition 4 1 Copyright 2 2002 2004 Rea ME Ltd See http Jw realvic com for information on YMC For VNC viewer enter HMI IP address and password B FHC Fiewer Connection Details E A B Ed Server 192 168 1 20 Encryption Not supported ABOUT Options OK Cancel FA FHC Authentication Ho Encryption H E Ed Password 47 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual CAL TAC vawr bir ewa Micrel atene Epines EED gj keep ati Se ied E THC dleococece CP we nTEK MT8000 T Tyne amp X Tyne Trick IF Communicatinn Becomes Easv Note 1 One HMI allows only one user to log in VNC server at one time 2 If users leave VNC server unused for one hour HMI system will log out automatically i HMI name Set the HMI name to download upload a project a System settings Network Time Date Securit HMI name setting ta HMI name Default HMI 48 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 4 3 HMI Download Settings A project or data can be downloaded to HMI via SD card or USB disk Insert SD card or USB disk and designate the directory path All contents under this directory will be downloaded to HMI When HMI detects new peripheral devices the following screen appears CF card Status Download Upload Sea Restart Project and exit Cange iz Restan after downloa
33. FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 GetData read data 2 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 end macro_command device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters as follows see FATEK KB Series Device Model General Security Font Device list Location Device Type Local MT zoor Remote HMI A Remote IP 192 168 0 205 Port MT Remote HMI B Remote IP 210 08 117 224 Fo MT zo01 Remote HMI C Remote IP 210 68 117 224 Po MT 2o01 MITSUBISHI FEOn Local Local MITSUBISHI Fi FATEE Local Local FA TEE FB Series BISHI F 3u Remote IP 210 68 117 224 Po MITSUBISHI Fi MITSU FATEE FE Series Remote iP 2l0 66 117 224 Fo EATER FB series device_type is he device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the 471 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual PLC data For example if device_type is LW_BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method _ BIN can be ignored If device_type is LW_BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD address_offset is the address offset in the PLC For example GetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address is 5 lf address_offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N For example GetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2
34. Read only Read rite Reads Write Reads Write Readiirite Before using the Address Tag Library users need to add the content of the library first Click New and the Address Tag dialogue appears as below Addres Tag Tag name PLE name Address type Device type Address Address format Cancel Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description O The name of the Address Tag The name of the PLC which is selected from the device list Address type The type of Address there are bit and word types available Device type The type of the device the types available are related to PLC name and Address type The content of the address Click OK when the settings are done and a new tag will be found in the Customized library as below Address Taz Library Customized O System No Address tag namne FLC name Address type Address Read Write 1 Alarm MITSUBISHI FxOn Fx2 Bit x 0 ReadiWrite 2 temperature MITSUBISHI FxOn Fx2 Word TY 100 Read rite a Test tag MITSUBISHI Fe0n Fe2 Word Tiv 200 Read Write 16 2 Using Address Tag Library After creating the Address Tag Library select the related PLC in General tab while adding a new object and click Setting Check User defined tag the tags can now be used as shown below General Security Shape Label Description Mode Value Offset O Read ad
35. SSC lt CS s sS Shape To set the size of the shape rectangle size Trajectory To set the position of each point on the moving path 219 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 15 Bar Graph Overview Bar graph object displays PLC register data as a bar graph in proportion to its value Configuration Click the Bar Graph icon on the toolbar the Bar Graph dialogue box will be shown up fill in each items of settings click OK button a new Bar Graph Object will be created See the picture below G2 2 ale E LE eg ne The following picture shows the General tab of the bar graph object 220 L ws WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Har Graph Object General Outline Shane Description O O Read address PLE name Local HMI Setting Cancel Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of the word devices that controls the bar graph display Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object The following picture shows the Outline tab of the bar graph object 221 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Har Graph Object General Outline Shane bme oml OO O itn Up zw a Bar width ratio Athibute Bar coloristyle Frame Bar Target mdicator
36. Set ON O Set OFF PLL name Local HMI yt Setting Cancel Setting Description Mapping table This table displays all available states items their labels and values To change the number of available states please refer to Option list tab gt Attribute gt No of state State The system lists all available states Each state represents an item that will be displayed in the list This field is read only 347 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Value Here user can assign value for each item basing on the following two criteria a For reading If any change of the content from Control address is detected the object compares the content with these values and selects the first matched item If no item is matched the status goes to error state and signals the notification bit register if requested For writing The system writes this value to Control address when user selects an item Label Users can assign label for each item The option list object displays the labels of all items in the list for users to review and select Error state a As the illustration shown above state 8 is the error state when specifying 8 in No of state Similarly if you set No of state to 11 then state 11 would be the error state and so on On error state the listbox style option list removes the highlight to represent no item is selected and the drop down list displays t
37. Specifies a fixed time and day Address The start end time is retrieved from the device address at on line operation Setting on Enable individual day Start time and end time can be set in different day of week There is only one start time and one end time during the week You have to set both start time and end time with this mode 334 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Start action Termination action 09 00 17 00 l l Monday Tuesday NOTE 1 You must enter settings for the Start Time and End Time 2 You cannot set the Start Time and End Time to the exact same day and time Disable A schedule that is 1 day Start and End times are within 24 hours can be entered Multiple Start and End days can be selected You can perform actions at the same time on multiple days To specify an End Time you must select Enable termination action Start action Termination action 09 00 17 00 Monday Tuesday NOTE You cannot set the Start Time and End Time to the exact same day and time The time scheduler is for one day only so if the End Time is earlier than the Start Time the operation of End Time will be performed on the next day 335 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual For example Tuesday Start day Monday Start 22 00 00 End 01 00 00 22 00 00 01 00 00 Set the start time and day When Setting on individual day is disable
38. Target indicator all come from designated Address register See the picture below Hew Har Graph Object General Outline Shape A thibute typ Noma ition Up oS Sm Bar width ratio Se Bar colorstyle Frame Backeround Bar pay TT C Target indicator v Enable Color as larm indicators Low limit 20 Highlimt 20 1 OOO Low color Po a High color p Targetalanmzerolspan dynamit address Enable PLE name Lacal HMI Ww Setting The following table shows the read address of low limit high limit and target The Address means the device address for example if the device address is LW20 and data format is 16 bit The Alarm Low limit is LW 20 The Alarm High limit is LW21 The Target indicator is LW22 The Zero is LW23 The Span is LW24 226 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data Alarm Alarm Target Zero Span Format Low limit High limit indicator 16 bit Address Address Address Address Address tome a aa a a 32 bit Address Address Address Address Address tomate ee ee E 22 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 16 Meter Display Overview The meter display object can display the value of word device with meter Configuration Click the Meter Display icon on the toolbar and the Meter Display Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new
39. Target value 0 4 9 larm indicators Low lirit U Low color m Targetalannzero span dynamit address Enable PL name Local HMI Ww Setting Setting Description CS lt W 222 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute Type There are Normal and Offset for selection When select Offset there must be a original value for reference Please refer the illustration below Athibute Type Direction Up Zero U span 10 Origin 5 Bar width ratio 3 100 E Direction To select the bar graph direction and there are Up Down Right and Left for selection Zero Span The filled bar percentage can be calculated with the following formula The filled bar percentage Register value Zero Span Zero 100 When select Offset if Register value Zero gt 0 the bar will fill up from origin setting if Register value Zero lt O the bar will fill up but down side from origin setting For example Origin 5 Span 10 Zero 0 and use different value in read address it will display as illustration below When read address value is 4 high limit 10 a 8 origin 5 iG yy low limit 5 r 223 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual When read address value is 8 high limit 10 10 s origin 5 N 4 low limit 5
40. aE e ae LL Port no 8000 After all settings are completed a new device named Remote HMI is added to the Device list Mame Location Device type Interface Local Local HMI Local M Tesonx MiA Ma N Local MITSUBISHI F Local MITSUBISHI F COM1 096 E4 0 Rem SIEMENS 87200 RemotedQP 192 168 1 10 F SIEMENS si COM1M6 Red 2 Rem Remote HMI RemotetIP 192 166 1 11 F MT Ethernet TC MA 5 2 Model Parameters in Model tab determine the HMI model Timer and Printer settings 61 1 W WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual oystem Parameter Sethnys Ed Font Extended Memory PrinterBackup Server Device Model General pystem petting PECUIITY HMI model MT8121T 00 x 600 w HMI station no Port no 8000 used as MODEUS server s port no Timer Clock source sr PLC name Local HMI se Setting Address Liy Ww os 16 bit Unsigned Printer Tame SP M D E F COM COM 3 Band rate 19200 w Data bits Parity None v Stop bits Fiel of width pieli sereen hard copy wale 100 100 pixels or 1610 type or 220 pixels for 2407 4004 te li lt atorage space management History data space Max HOB file size 40M 1 5 0M Hint If change storage space please reset HMI s data logs and event logs Setting Description Select current HMI model as shown below MTOUS0T MTSUS0T 220 x 224 wt HMTb056 TRMTSO
41. button to continue the settings of the other state Get Picture Picture file State C Documents and Settings 00 brmp State UO Width 103 Height 104 Size 32918bvtes Transparent T T Before choosing transparent color check Transparent box first and then left click on location to be of the graph At this time EB8000 will automatically display RGB value of the transparent color Take above as an example the actual shape shown as below 367 Lips wenvrex EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 4 Likewise select the source of a picture for state 1 and select the correct transparent color for it After the settings are completed click the Finish button Get Fictore Picture file State 1 C Documents and Settings 1 brnp State 1 Width 105 Height 103 Size SP E602 bytes Transparent Below shows the complete picture created A new picture F Yellow can be found in the Picture Library dialogue From the information we know the picture is in the format of bitmap and with two states 368 Lr WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Library TEST w Graph name 0 F Yellow i Total states 2 Image size 30054 0 BMP 369 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 15 Label Library and Using Multi Language Label Library is used in the Multi Language environment Users can design the content of Label Library to meet their demands Select the suitable la
42. c Saver window no To assign a window for screen saver a Startup window no Designate the window shown when start up HMI b Common window Above base window Below base window Above base window The objects in the common window window 4 will be shown in each base window This selection determines the layers these objects are placed above or below the objects in the base window c Keyboard caret color Set the color of caret that appears when inputting in Numeric Input and Word Input objects d Object layout 67 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Keyboard Project protection i series only Nature Nature lf Control mode is selected when operating HMI Animation and Moving Shape objects will be displayed above other kinds of objects neglecting the sequence that the objects are created If Nature mode is selected the display will follow the sequence that the objects are created first created be displayed first e RW_A enabled Enable or disable recipe data RW_A Enable this the objects can then control the content of RW_A The size of RW_A is 64K Extra no of events The default number of the event in the system is 1000 If users would like to add more records the setting value can be modified up to 10000 Users can select to use different types of keyboards for Numeric Input and Word Input Up to 32 keyboards can be added If users want to design the
43. escort tancraat c Change state by time The states of the object have nothing to do with the word value The system displays different shape of states according to time frequency Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of the word device that controls the word lamp object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Address FLE name Local HMI w Device ype i L ad Address 0 System tag 4ddress Format DODDD range 0 10500 Index register 16 bit Unsigned ka Attribute No of states The number states one object possesses State 0 is also counted as one 154 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual state Suppose the number of the states is 8 the valid states will be 0 1 7 In this case if the word value is 8 or higher the system will display the shape of last state Restrictions In label dialog Language 1 is able to change attribute settings and for Language 2 8 only font size can be changed and other settings follows language 1 Bee Aon Lamp Object Hew Word Lamp Objet E B FiF i Qhenerd Semir Shape Lalal General Sscunty Shara Label BLER Cie bal Ei Use label thry Lebel te babal D ar E Ua eba bary Lals mg Laka 0 sa itia kiinan fon Labe Thim Choos hiiri fiscal Lobel Library e Lange si Langa Fi o AmE oo S
44. g a completion bit OFF HMI set 4 h ae i ON ea 5 8 Error notification bit eO bit 8 HMI set OFF lt lt communication time lag O HMI turn OFF the bit user turn OFF the bit c Action mode Time setting address 2 Enable and disable the Termination time action and Setting on individual day 15 02 01 00 Reserved 0 fixed ofo Bit 00 Termination time setting 0 disable 1 enable Bit 01 Setting on individual day 0 disable 1 enable NOTE 1 If setting on individual day is OFF the system still reads all 11 word devices but ignores the end time data 2 If setting on individual day is ON be sure to enter all start and end time information If 2 or more of the start end day bits are turned ON simultaneously 339 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual an error occurs d Start End Day Start Day Time setting address 3 End Day Time setting address 7 Designates the day used as a trigger for the start termination action 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Bit Bit 00 Sunday 0 none 1 select Bit 01 Monday 0 none 1 select Bit 02 Tuesday 0 none 1 select Bit 03 Wednesday 0 none 1 select Bit 04 Thursday 0 none 1 select Bit 05 Friday 0 none 1 select Bit 06 Saturday 0 none 1 select e Start End Time Start Time Time setting address 4 to 6 End Time Time setting address 8 to 10 Set the time values used for the start termination
45. server from Menu gt Edit gt System Parameters gt Printer Backup Server User can select the desired format to back up the file a MT8000 Event Log File evt MT8000 Data Log File dtl b Comma Separated Values csv Within Select the range of time period for example Select Yesterday in Start and select 2 day s It means to save the files yesterday and the day before yesterday Select All to save all the files available in the system Range atant Today Yesterday 298 Ly WE NTEK Attribute EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual There are two ways to activate Backup function a Touch trigger Touch the object to activate backup operation b External trigger Register a bit device to trigger the backup operation ON OFF Bit device change from ON to OFF to activate backup operation OFF ON Bit device change from OFF to ON to activate backup operation ON OFF Bit device change state to activate backup operation Trigger address When use External trigger assign an appropriate bit device as shown below A thibute Trigger address PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting 299 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 25 Media Player For the first time using Media Player object its necessary to download the project to the HMI via Ethernet EasyBuilder8000 will install Media Player drivers during the download Ove
46. var9 LW 10009 var10 LW 10010 vari 1 LW 10011 121 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual var12 LW 10012 var13 LW 10013 var14 LW 10014 var15 LW 10015 For example varO reads value from LW 10000 when value in LW 10000 is 32 var0 234 32 234 the station number is 32 similarly var13 reads value from LW 10013 when value in LW10013 is 5 var13 234 5 234 9 6 Broadcast Station No MT6000 8000 provides two ways for users to enable using broadcast command First is to set it directly in system parameter settings Device tab PLC type MITSUBISHI FX0n FX2 bl V 1 00 MITSUBISHI FAON so PLC I F RS 485 4W PLC default station no 0 COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings Broadcast station no f 7 Use broadcast command Second way is to use system tag to enable or disable broadcast station number or to change it Corresponding system tags are listed as below LB 9065 disable enable COM 1 broadcast station no LB 9066 disable enable COM 2 broadcast station no LB 9067 disable enable COM 3 broadcast station no LW 9565 COM 1 broadcast station no LW 9566 COM 2 broadcast station no LW 9567 COM 3 broadcast station no 122 1 LW WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 10 Security Security of objects in EB8000 includes two parts 1 User password and corresponding operable classes 2 Security settings of every single object 10 1 Settings
47. 0 States O States O None Mone Mone None Step 2 Add a state to the selected Shape First use the drawing tools to draw a graph in the window and select the graph to be added to the Shape Library 359 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual L EasyBuilder 8000 MIP 10 WINDOW OID EB Pik Bait View Opica Daw Objects Like Tools Window Help Oa 2m 3 Fast Selecbow E d Cargon Window 5 PLO Response 6 HHI Commecton T Paro Restneton E g 10 WINDOW O10 Chick the Save to Shape Library button in toolbar and the following dialogue appears Save to Shape Library Shape library TEST Description Untitled Tape no fr Frame C Inner Width TT Height 73 Frame vndefined Inner undefined Setting Description Shape library Select the Shape Library for the graph to be added to In this The name of the Shape The number in Shape Library current graph will be added in Select the state of the Shape which this graph represents In this case the state is set 0 EB8000 provides 256 states for each 360 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual lf Inner is selected the graph will become an inner part of the Shape This part shows the current status of the shape at this moment shape no 0 in state 0 in library Test is with undefined frame and inner Width T7 Height 73 Frame undefined Inner
48. 1 HMI IP Password Project Manager Reset Download EEEEE Upload 111111 When operating MT8000 MT6000 HMI by Ethernet or USB cable users need to designate the correct IP address and password in HMI Press Settings Reset and Download functions share a set of password while Upload function uses another set The password provides protection against unauthorized access to the HMI Be sure to record any password change otherwise while resetting password to default the project and data in HMI will be completely erased Reboot HMI There are certain situations that the HMI should reboot for example when updating the files in it Users don t need to cut power while rebooting After rebooting everything returns to the conditions of startup 16 WL WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Project Manager HMI IP Password Type MT6000 8000 i Series Settings Reboot HMI Connection Ethernet O USE cable i series only LS HMI IP 192 168 1 35 Data Event Log File Information EasyBuilder8000 EasyConverter EasyPrinter Recipe Extended Memory Editor EasyAddress Viewer Build Download Data for CF USB Disk Editor Transfer Download Upload On line Simulation Off line Simulation D wo i z G S E oO g 3 Cw p Pass through stop HMI scan font finished reset HMI finished Set the correct IP address when operating HMI
49. 13 11 Indirect Window Overview Indirect Window object is to define a popup window location position size and a word device When the content of the word device is written a valid window number the window will be popup in the predefined location The popup window will be closed when the value of the word device is reset 0 The system will only take action when the content of word device is changed 0 valid window number nonzero O A B valid window number Configuration Click the Indirect Window icon on the toolbar and the New Indirect Window Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items click OK button a new Indirect Window Object will be created See the pictures below Se m Indirect Window 201 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Indirect Window Object eneral Dewinton O O Ol Read address PLC name Local HMI Setting A thibute Style No title bar v Cancel Seting Description S Read Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address Systme tag Index register of the word device that control the window popup Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Attribute Style To set the display style of the popup window There are two styles No title bar and With title bar a No title bar The popup window does not have title bar and its position is fix as
50. 18 3 4 3 select case Statements 394 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The select case construction can be used to perform selective group of actions depending on the value of the given variable The actions under the matched case are performed until a break command is read The syntax is as follows Default case free Format Select Case variable Case value Statements break end Select Example Select Case A Case 1 b 1 break end Select Default case Format Select Case variable Case value Statements break Case else Statements break end Select Example Select Case A Case 1 b 1 break Case else b 0 395 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual break end Select Multiple cases in the same block Select Case variable Case value 1 Statements Case value2 Statements break end Select Example Select Case A Case 1 Case 2 b 2 Case 3 b 3 break end Select Syntax description Select Case Must be used to begin the statement variable Required The value of this variable will be compared to the value of each case Case else Optional It represents the default case If none of the cases above are matched the actions under default case will be performed A default case can be absent Optional The actions under the matched case will be performed until the break command is reached If a break command is absent it simply keeps on execut
51. 5 Integer 55 Keypad 6 Integer 56 Eeypad 7 HEX Add Project protection 1 series only Enable Project key 111111 range 0 4294901750 Tf this key is different from HMI key the project won t be executed normally Use LY 9046 9047 to change HMI key LB9046 indicates check result hey error when status is on Setting Description Fast selection button s Manual Setting all the attributes for fast selection button that is designated as window number 3 a Attribute Enable or disable fast selection window Select Enable and click Enable Settings to set the attributes including color and text 66 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual b Position Select the position on the screen of HMI where this button appears If Left is chosen the button will show up on screen bottom left if Right is chosen the button will show up on screen bottom right Screen a Back light saver saver If the screen is left untouched and reaches the time limit set here back light will be off The setting unit is minute Back light will be on again once the screen is touched If none is set the back light will always be on while using b Screen saver If the screen is left untouched and reaches the time limit set here The current screen will automatically switch to a window assigned in Saver window no The setting unit is minute If none is set this function is disabled
52. 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If GetData uses the default station number defined in the device list as follows it is not necessary to define station number in address_offset PLC type FATEK FB Series W 1 10 FATEK_FB s0 PLC I F RS 232 PLC default station no COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings _ Use broadcast command The number of registers actually read from depends on both the type of the read_ data variable and the value of the number of data_count type of data_count actual number of 16 bit register read_ data read char 8 bit char 8 bit 7 1 pool Bit 2 i short 16 bit E short 16 bit 422 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual When a GetData is executed using a 32 bit data type int or float the function will automatically convert the data For example 2 A 2 4 macro_command main float f GetData f MODBUS 6x 2 1 f will contain a floating point value end macro_command macro_command main bool a bool b 30 short c short d 50 int e int f 10 double g 10 get the state of LB2 to the variable GetData a Local HMI LB 2 1 get 30 states of LBO LB29 to the variables b 0 b 29 GetData b 0 Local HMI LB O 30 get one word from LW2 to the variable c GetData c Local HMI LW 2 1 get 50 words from LWO LW49 to the variables d 0 d 49 GetData d 0 Local HMI
53. 519 1 W WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Select this option to inform EasyPrinter to convert the hardcopy result into a bitmap file and save it in the specified directory Users can find the bitmap files at Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt yymmdd_hhmm bmp For example when a hardcopy request is given at 17 35 00 12 Jan 2009 the bitmap file will be named 090112_1735 bmp And if there is another bitmap file generated in the same minute it will be named 090112 1735 01 bmp and so on Backup MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Chatput Backup files in Hardcopy aa DAM TSO00 When target file has existed C Overwrite it The content will be destroyed Append BAE to the file name Convert Batch File DAM TSO00 converticsy def Output EasyPrinter stores the backup files to the specified path For Event Log historical data files Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt eventlog gt EL _yyyymmdd evt For Data Sampling historical data file Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt 520 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual datalog gt Folder name of the Data Sampling object yyyymmdd dtl For Recipe Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt recipe gt recipe rcp or recipe _a rcp e Convert Batch File Select Enable and assign a Convert Batch File for automatically converting uploaded history files to CSV or MS Excel format Please
54. 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 return_value read response 444 me WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end macro_command 18 9 Compiler Error Message 1 Error Message Format error c error description is the error message number Example error C37 undeclared identifier When there are compile errors the error description can be referenced by the compiler error message number 2 Error Description C1 syntax error identifier There are many possibilities to cause compiler error For example macro_command main char i 123xyz this is an unsupported variable name end macro_command C2 identifier used without having been initialized Macro must define the size of an array during declaration For example macro_command main char int gli i must be a numeric constant end macro_command C3 redefinition error identifier The name of variable and function within its scope must be unique 445 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual For example macro_command main intg 10 gt g error end macro_command C4 function name error identifier Reserved keywords and constant can not be the name of a function For example sub int if error C5 parentheses have not come in pairs Statement missing
55. 9215 16 bit INDEX 16 LW 9230 32 bit INDEX 31 LW 9260 32 bit INDEXO INDEX31 are descriptions of Index Register LW 9200 LW9260 are the addresses of these index registers INDEX 0 INDEX 15 are 16 bit registers with the range up to 65536 words INDEX 16 INDEX 31 are 32 bit registers with the range up to 4G words While using Index Register the address of the device type will be decided by the value of constant in set address value in chosen index register Index register works in all device lists built in system parameter settings no matter addresses in bit or word format 11 2 Examples of Index Register The following examples show how to use index registers The Read address is set to LW100 and Index register is not checked In this way the read address won t change while running the project 133 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address PLC name Local HMI se F Setting Press Setting PLC name Local HMI w Device type i Ly ad Address Format DODD range 0 10500 Index register But in another case as below Index register is checked and the chosen index register is INDEX3 In this way the read address will change to LW 100 INDEX3 INDEX 3 represents value in address LW9203 In other words if value in LW9023 is 5 the read address in this case will be LW 100 5 LW105 Read address PLO name Local HMI Ww
56. Byte Bytes 1 2 3 S 2 3 4 5 L 4 4 5 STX Statio RC Data Data Data Data 4 RS PR P PS osa Byte Byte Byte L 3 L 2 L 1 L Data N ETX Checksum If the HMI contains the following data 00 aor 102 0s T104 1s aoe 107 108 T100 ara ara O E 02H 30H 37H 52H 43H 31H 30H 31H 31H 31H 30H 31H 31H 30H 30H 30H or en Te 31H O3H 34H 36H The values in each requested device are returned in Hex The checksum is calculated on bytes 2 L 2 569 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual In the event of an error the reply is 32 4 6 WC Write Coils Request This command writes up to 99 consecutive coils to the LB memory area of HMI The length of the command is L N 14 Where N the number of requested devices The command will be at least 15 bytes long but can be up to 113 bytes long Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Byte Byte an 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 L 4 ST Station WC Addr No of Data Data Data 3 ltems Data N 1 Byte Byte Byte L 3 L 2 L 1 L Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to read 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 6 9 This is the starting address to write to Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 11 This is the number of addresses to write Must be 2 bytes long Bytes 12 L 3 The data to write Up to 99 items each with one Hex digit Byte L 2 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes L 1 L Checksum 5
57. E eee 65 SA SV O O I e A E A EE E E ee ive ce E EE 68 gt ie U a E EE E ONE E OE ENEE E EE NI 70 DA A OI A EEE E O E E T A E T E A AE A T E ET 72 OPM 4 2 p16 216 211 0 A eee eee enn eee ec eer eee er enna N EE meee 74 OPINE BICK UD 5 SY Cl o E EEE E cues tegen ee 76 Cnapter o Window Operations ssimseinrirearanon rane O EAEE 78 CLW NOON TYD e crei ac nse std wre dap ceescncd ob stesdcnate carats eamescu odcsceenstinesoas detseesencscnsascde ste 78 oLa Base WINO ON eana cece cn scsereseces EENE E weenessn sears A E 78 OLL CONIMA O W e AR E EE E E ener ee 79 6 1 3 Fast Selection WINdoOW ss sssesssessssssssssssenssssseesseesseesseesseensesnssenssesstesstesseesstesseesseesstesssenses 80 6 1 4 System Message WING OW sse ssssesssssssesssssssesseesseessersseessesnsesnsssnssenstesstesseesseesseenseenssrnsss 81 6 2 Create Set and Delete a WINdOW ss sssesssesssesssesssesssesssessseesseessessstensssnssenstesstesstesseesseesseensss 83 oe Croate a WINGO N eee e E E N E E eee ee ee 83 022 ae OW TIRS eR E A E EE E EEEE 87 6 2 3 Open Close and Delete a WINdKOW cc ccsesssesesesesessescsesesesssscsesescsesessesessseseseseseseees 88 Oa A E E o a E A E A A A O E A AT 89 14 Event Log IAIN AC SIM NOI epevcr ocriesesta sic sesnswanetinenty cecvsesencacacaeseueicaintva E E EE REE o Eais 89 PEL EKC El EUN a E E A E EEEE EEE 92 72 Create a Now EVNE LOQ sieges cesses cscassesssussncencieectess arenae ro e a aeii aT e E or Esae 9
58. EAE 133 11 2 Examples of Index Register arsson eer eSEE EE enais 133 Chapter 12 Keypad Design and USage sssssssesssessesssoesseosssssssssssssseesseesseesseesssenssenssensseossrsseesseesssens 138 12 1 Steps to Design a Pop up Keypad uu esessssssessssesssesssseseseesssssessesssesesseesseesessseseesesessees 138 12 2 Steps to Use Keypad without Title Bar cscsssesssssssseesssssessesssesssesesessssestsseesseseees 141 12 3 Steps to Use Fixed Keypad se sssesssessesssossseesssesssssssenssssseesseesseenssinssenssensseossenseesseesseesseensss 144 12 4 Creating UNICODE Keyboard se esoesssesssessesssesssesssessseesseessesssessseonseesuresstesseesstesseesssesssenss 146 Crapo DO ODE eei eee nae E T E ee eee ee 148 DEB th A WM e E E E E sce geese teense ete 148 EWO B 9 e ete teen mone ere nee en ner eee ne Tne ere ener Sete ee cee eee 151 PSSE e N One E E E E A E E ere 156 MS aA OO ea T E E E 160 P FON O I O e E E E SE N EE EE 167 DE TOJE SW eee A E E EE E E EE en 174 TMu ae SWRC nr se A E EEA E A 177 Io S aO eea E E E E E ae ee 181 13 9 Numeric Input and Numeric Display csssssesssessssssssssssssessesssssssesssessssestssessssseees 186 13 10 ASCII Input and ASCII Display cca cuscseusiederevesecsevevescg ciescyesedonsasesstinisiecesusstswigetstevesccseesesecdaelec 196 DAL Mare VV UNO N aa E E EEEE EEA 201 DL PrE NAO O W annin E E E E acess 206 LEMON UV AI a A E ee sees E E ae E 210 BD AANA O a A E E E eee eee E 215 ADS ya
59. EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Systme tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated bit device before or after update the word device Hew Homeric Input Object General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shane Font _ E andi PLZ name i Local HMI s Setting Input order Setting Description S Touch The object enters input state when a user touches it Bit control The object enters input state when turning ON the designated bit register and ends input state when turning OFF Notice that if there is another input object already in input state turning ON the designated bit register won t make this input object enters input state until the previous one ends inputting data Allow input bit Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type address Address Systme tag Index register of the bit register that controls the object enters and ends input state Users can also set address in Data Entry tab Input order By setting Input Order and Input Order Group users can continuously input data between multiple input objects The system will automatically transfer input state to the next input object after users complete inputting data i e press ENT e Enable 188 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Select Enable and set In
60. Event trigger date Event tigger time Event trigger time Event message Event message If Display chars 1s U it meane that the system will display all of characters Date pM ADDF Time HH MM SS v Cancel Setting Description Include Select category of events that belongs to the alarm display or alarm categories bar object category of an event is set in event log 282 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual For example if the category of an alarm bar is set to 2 4 it will display all the alarm messages with category equal to 2 3 or 4 Please refer to Category statement in Event Log chapter Scroll Speed Set the scroll speed of alarm bar Set frame and background color of alarm bar a Sort Set the order to display alarm message Time ascending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the bottom Time descending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the top b Order amp Characters Users can decide the display item and how the item display order c Date Event trigger date Display the date tag with alarm message There are four formats of date tag 1 MM DD YY 2 DD MM YY 3 DD MM YY 4 YY MM DD d Time Event trigger time Display the time tag with alarm message There are three formats of time tag 1 HH MM SS 2 HH MM 3 DD HH MM Set font and color of alarm message in the Font tab See the picture below 285 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder80
61. Example macro_commandmain O O O oOOOoOoOo o O 412 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual short source result HIBYTE 0x1234 result result is 0x12 source 0x123 HIBYTE source result result is 0x01 end macro_command Name LOWORD LOWORD source result Description Retrieves the low word of a 32 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result LOWORD 0x12345678 result result is 0x5678 source 0x12345 LOWORD source result result is Ox2345 end macro_command HIWORD HIWORD source result Description Retrieves the high word of a 32 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main Int source result HIWORD 0x12345678 result result is 0x1234 source 0x12345 HIWORD source result result is 0x0001 end macro_command 415 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 5 4 Bit Transformation GETBIT source result bit_pos Description Gets the state of designated bit position of a data source into result result s value will be O or 1 source and bit_ pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos GETBIT Y result 3 result is 1 source 4 bit_ pos 2 GETBIT source result bit_pos result is 1 end macro_command SETBITON
62. Function Key and selecting Change common window allow users to change the source of common window For example users can change the common window from window 4 to window 20 79 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual New Function Key Object General Security Shape Label Activate after button is released O Change full screen window Change common window Display popup window Window no 20 Window O20 k 6 1 3 Fast Selection Window Window no 3 is defined as the Fast Selection Window This window can coexist with base window Generally speaking it is used to place the frequently used operation buttons as the picture below winid J L WEINTEK winl l pEi lraira fakk k LiL a Touch I Communication Becomes Easy When using Fast Selection Window window no 3 should be created first and then users need to set each function of Fast Selection button The Fast Sel button in the picture above is the Fast Selection button which is used to Enable Disable Fast Selection window 80 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual control Every setting of the Fast Selection button is in System Parameter Settings Please refer to the dialog below oystem Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model General System pettine SEeCUrity Fast selection button Atte Enae Position Apart from Enable Disable Fast Selection window by Fast Selec
63. Here is an example 3 dtl EasyConverter c PathName 192 168 1 26 Or users can also specify the HMI with its name 4 dtl EasyConverter c PathName Weintek_01 Or in the case of needing special handling for different Data Sampling history files i dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs PathName Voltage The 5 criterion can be only performed on the history files uploaded from the Data Sampling objects with the folder name of Voltage The 3 argument indicates this criterion accepts the qualified Data Sampling files from any HMI Users can also change the 3 argument to 192 168 1 26 192 168 1 HMI name etc for narrowing the target HMIs 523 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 26 4 3 The Format of a Convert Batch File The following table explains all arguments in a criterion 1 File Type This argument specifies the extension name of the uploaded files this criterion targets e g dtl for Data Sampling history files evt for Event Log history files 2 Command Line The exact command EasyPrinter sends to a console window if the uploaded file is qualified 3 a HMI IP address This argument specifies the HMI this criterion b HMI name targets 4 Condition 1 e If the file type is dtl This argument specifies the folder name of the Data Sampling objects this criterion targets e Others No use Condition 2 No use reserved for further use
64. IP address of the two HMls Refer to the related chapter for the details Suppose that the IP address of HMI A and HMI B are set for 192 168 1 1 and 192 168 1 2 respectively Step 2 Running the EB8000 and select the Device Table tab on the System Parameter Settings menu then add the IP addresses and Port numbers of HMI A and HMI B 469 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Font Device Model Device lst No Mame Location Device type Interface ll I Local HMI Local p MT OTOH AM T2070 Disable N Remote HMI E Remote IP 192 166 1 2 Port s000 MTime Ethernet T Remote HMI 2 HMI A MTE ee Device Properties Name Hura HMI OPLE Step 3 Select correct PLC for PLC name In the General tab on the Set Bit Object s Attributes menu if you want to control the LB of HMI A you have to select HMI A for PLC name See the picture below set Bit Objects Properties General Security Shape Label Profile b ta O SOS Write addres PLE name HMI A Setting Write after button is released A ttibute Step 4 Making use of HMI s MTP projects on PC and performing the simulator function either online mode or offline mode and then all HMI s data can be controlled by PC 470 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual It is also available for HMI to control PC s data Just consi
65. MTEI demo xob Ti TesttulhiLang xob E MTGI2_FA2M wob S MTB000Deme besk wob S MTB000Deme xob Sy MTS0a0best xob j mal 0 xob Ej mebl 20 demo _A0 xob Fils Fui l Piles of ipype MT S000 downoad file sob 2 5 Pass Through The pass through function allows the PC application to connect PLC via HMI In this function the HMI acts as a converter Pass through provides two types of modes Ethernet and COM port Click Pass through button on Project Manager to start the settings For more information please refer to related chapter 23 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 5 1 Ethernet Pass through Ethernet coh port Virtual COM Port PC lt gt PLO COMMS PLO Connection Port HMI lt gt PLC 24 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 5 2 COM port Pass through Ethernet com port HMIIP Get Hh Communication Parameters Hh work mode Unknown Source COM Port PC Hh COM 7 Baud rate 9600 Data bits Parity Mone Stop bits Destination COM Port HMI gt PLO C2 co m lt Baud rate gA00 Data bits Parity lone Start Pass through Stop Pass through Stop bits 25 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 3 Create an EasyBuilder8000 Project In this Chapter we will take Mitsubishi PLC as an example to illustrate how to create and compile a new EB8000 project to simulate it on PC and to download the pro
66. Object dialog will be shown as below Correctly set the parameters of the object click OK and place the object wherever users like in the window Hew Togele Switch Object Ed General Security Shane Label Read address PLO name MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 WF Setting Invert signal Write addres PLC name MITSUBISHI FxOn Fx2 w Setting Write when button is released aerate Swithsbie SHORF Macro 28 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual A project with an object is completed as shown below EasyBuilder 8000 MIP2 10 WINDOW_O10 Sele Penne me Oua Dor Obet Liey lob Window Hel Do 2 ETR P sjit us BeA sae j x Language 1 Left Abgnirent Sod COD ais AL a r Windows TX 4d lt 10 WINDOW_010 x 3 Fast Selection 4 Common Window 5 PLC Response 6 HMI Connection T Password Restriction E g 10 WINDOW 010 TS_0 Y 1 15 Be El z 5 a Lag h EEE HELI m F Pos BelfoOroeges MTSI 640 x 48 3 2 Save and Compile the Project In the menu select File then select Save file will be saved as mtp file After file is saved select Tools then select Compile to compile the project and check if the project can run correctly A xob file will be obtained after correctly compiling A xob file is needed while downloading to HMI A successfully compiled file will get the dialog as below 29 Lt WE NTEK E
67. PLC Setting reading and writing address Using shape library and picture library Setting text content ae WN a Adjusting profile size 9 1 Selecting PLC It is required to designate which PLC to operate while using some objects as shown below PLC name represents the controlled PLC In this example there are 2 PLC Local HMI and Allen Brandley DF1 These listed available PLC devices are sourced from Device List in System Parameters Settings PLC name Allen Brandley DFI Local HMI Allen Brandley DFI 9 1 1 Setting the Reading and Writing Address Read address PLO name Allen Bradley DF1 Setting Address T454 Ww oY IDX O 16 bit Unsigned The picture above shows a reading address or writing address contains 107 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual PLC name This is for selecting device type Different PLC are with different selections of device type Read address PLC name Allen Bradley DF1 y Address T454 J E IDY 0 Address Set the reading and writing address System tag Address tag includes system tag and user defined tag Click Setting beside PLC name and tick system tag This allows users to use the preserved addresses by system for particular purpose These address tags are divided into bit or word LB or LW After selecting System tag not only will the Device type displays the content of the chosen tag Address will also d
68. PLC LB 9500 LB 9755 When ON it means that connection is normal When OFF it means that disconnect with PLC and set on to retry connecting activity once This local registers indicate the connection states between COM 3 and PLC LB9800 indicates the state between COM 3 and PLC SNO station no 0 and LB9801 indicates the state between COM 3 and PLC LB 9800 LB 10055 When ON it means that connection is normal When OFF it means that disconnect with PLC and set on to retry connecting activity once 531 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 29 Pass Through Function The pass through function allows the PC application to connect PLC via HMI and the HMI acts as a converter at this moment The pass through function provides two modes Ethernet and COM port To click Pass through on Project Manager will display the application eionlation Jn line simulation ff lne simulation Pass through Ethernet com port Virtual COM Part PG lt gt PLO Please install weintek virtual serial port driver 29 1 Ethernet Mode How to install virtual serial port driver Before using Ethernet mode please check whether virtual serial port driver is installed as described below If Virtual COM port PC lt gt PLC displays Please install weintek virtual serial port driver please click Install 532 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Pass through Ethernet O
69. PLC type MODBUS Server v w 1 00 MOCBUS_SERWER SO PLE I F Station no esi Settings COM se broadcast command Interval of block pack words 5 v Max read command size words 120 Max write command size words If PLC I F is set as RS232 or RS485 please fill in COM Port Settings also FLC type MODBUS Server a Y 1 00 MODBUS SERVER so PLC MF RS 232 v Station no COM COM1 600 231 lf PLC I F is set as Ethernet the IP address is the same as HMI For communication MODBUS Server Port no should be set the same as HMI Port no 457 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual PLC type MODBUS Server k Y 1 00 MODBUS_SERYER ao PLC IF v Station no IP Local Fort 8000 HMI Port Settings Please refer to HMI Port no to set MODBUS Server Port no Go to Model tab of System Parameter Settings the HMI Port no is shown there oystem Parameter Seth ys o Font Extended Memory PrintenBackup Server System pettine SECUritY HMI stion no Port no 8000 m as MODBUS servers port no After finishing the setting MODBUS Server will be listed in Device tab You can send MODBUS command to read or write the data from MODBUS Server after downloading the XOB file to HMI oy stem Parameter Sethn ys Printen Backup Server Extended Memory all System Setting Security General Model Locati
70. SETBITON source result bit_ pos Description Changes the state of designated bit position of a data Source to 1 and pus in changed data into result source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos SETBITON 1 result 3 result is 9 414 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual source 0 bit_ pos 2 SETBITON source result bit_pos result is 4 end macro_command SETBITOFF SETBITOFF source result bit_ pos Description Changes the state of designated bit position of a data Source to 0 and put in changed data into result source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos SETBITOFF Y result 3 result is 1 source 4 bit_pos 2 SETBITFF source result bit_pos result is O end macro_command INVBIT INVBIT source result bit_pos Description Inverts the state of designated bit position of a data Source and put in changed data into result source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos INVBIT 4 result 1 result 6 415 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual source 6 bit_ pos 1 INVBIT source result bit_pos result 4 end macro command 18 5 5 Communication
71. Save and Compile the Project sssesssesssesssosssssssesssessseesseessesssesssesnssensesssresstesseesseesseesseesssessss 29 3 3 Off line and On line SIMULATION ee cesesessscsssssncesssssesssesesscsssssecassscsesssacessacesseenesssecsessseeeess 30 8 ONE S MN ON e E E E E 31 ie ONIE SVN ACN O aE A EE E E E AEE EEEE 31 3 4 Download the Project to HM lL sssesssesssossssossosssesssessseesseessesnsesnseonseesseosseosseesseesseossessseesseenses 32 Chapter 4 Hardware Settings eee oe en ae he necro a a ence ee ene nee meee erent eee ee eee 36 Pale MO ONES O I soci ccs scrscer E E 36 Pi Mele DE E FON a O A E E A A A EA A T 36 AL ETERNE POT eea E E ese eee 36 AL CECT O DC enea EN E E E EEE EE E S 36 dA erna T O PO e e E A R E 36 APA ESE E UENO E E E E A E A E E A ee 37 BZ VE IR OS Cl ea AEE T T E soreness 37 OSS e109 TOO DOT eae ee EREA TEE E E A EE E 38 A AML Downoad SEUNG S einen E 49 Chapter 5 System Parameter Settings setessccscescscenscessszssecsnsarsesastassicesecessssecactsencyeltestesscehonesactestaaneeteestose 52 o AAD lt A A E E EAEE Ce E E E E EE S 53 sL Howto Controla Local PEC usisero aaar eE i E EE aas 54 5 L2 How to C ntrola Remate PLC srsscscsarrinsadn insesi eerie 57 5 1 3 How to Control a Remote HMI sssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssessseosseensrossrosseesseesseossesssesssesnsees 59 3L MOO ee E A EA A EE EE E E S 61 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Bis E a AM E EE N A O T O A E
72. Set space of column No Time Date Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch No Time Date 3067 2157007 1 0 ee ee 3666 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3665 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3664 21 57 16 09 07 1 O 0 3663 21 57 16 09 07 1 O 0 3662 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3661 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3661 ee ae ee 3660 Aaka forename ata pRa Toren tinnan7t n n Rina AT d ANG ive Profile Set color of frame and background If it is set as transparent the frame and color background will be ignored Time and Enable or disable the time and date of data sampling and format Date Time ascending Time ascending means to put the earlier data in the top and the latest data in the bottom Ime Ch 1 24277 16 09 07 2 in AN 9A 32R TAR A A e D TS D D D a BJ Co u Oo Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Time descending Time descending means to put the latest data in the top and the earlier data in the bottom a 4780 22 23 54 16 09 07 3 2 4779 23 53 16 09 07 3 2 ATA FPF 1RN 2 B 4 d History The history files are named with date code The history control is used to Control select the designated history data files for display In case the value of history control is O the latest file is selected If it is 1 the second latest file is selected and so on Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of History cont
73. Setting Address IDs 3 16 bit Unsigned PLC name Malt iali Device Cy pe i Ly adress system tao Address format DODDD range 0 10500 Index INDEX 3 16 bit Index register 16 bit Unsigned w 134 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual For example as below set Index 3 as 0 which means the value in address LW9203 is 0 Under this situation the contents of LW100 Index 3 and LW101 Index 3 are the same as those of the LW100 and LW101 Index 3 Ly wernview At this time the settings of read address of Object A PLO name Local HMI yt Device type Li a address system tao ddress format DODDO range 0 10500 Index Unea Index register The settings of read address of Object B PLC name Local HMI a Device type LW 9203 16bib address index 3 wt Address Format DODDD range 0 10500 135 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The settings of read address of Object C PLO name Local HMI yt Device type Li a Address Format DODDD range 0 10500 _ Index register Now if users change value of Index 3 to 20 the contents of LW100 Index 3 and LW101 Index 3 will become those of LW120 and LW121 i e the values in LW100 20 LW120 and LW101 20 LW121 Object A LW 100 Index 3 LW 101 Index 3 Object B Index 3 Similarly the index register can also work with b
74. Step 4 On the PC application the serial ports number must be same as virtual serial port For example using a Mitsubishi application if the virtual serial port is COM 7 please open PC side I F Serial setting COM port to select COM 7 as follows 537 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Transfer Setup mod ole Serial setting RES che FA USE A W r FRIU US8 BD C USB G0T inmpanni mode PLC diei coupled sting ica Conmeton tet Transmission speed 1152Kbps HETAMH TEL FACPU CH CCIECam METOD CC Lmk Ethernet HETAOG Accesing host station After completing all settings when users execute PC s PLC application the HMI will be switched automatically to pass through mode the communication between HMI and PLC will be suspended just now and it will be resumed if the application closes as follows Weintek Virtual Serial Port PLC 29 2 COM Port Mode source COM Port Destination COM Port va PC Application 538 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Source COM Port The port is used between HMI and PC Destination COM Port The port is used between HMI and PLC When using COM port mode of pass through users should select the source and destination com port first 29 2 1 Settings of COM Port Mode There are two ways to enable COM port mode of pass through function 1 Use Project Manager 2 Use LW 9901 and LW 9902 LW 990
75. This command reads up to 99 consecutive coils from the LB memory area of HMI The command is always 14 bytes long Byte 1 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes 6 9 Bytes 10 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13 14 3 5 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 2 Bytes Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to read 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 6 9 This is the starting address to read from Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 11 This is the number of coils to read up to 99 Must be 2 bytes long Byte 12 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes 13 14 The checksum is the lowest 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 through 12 Example Read 12 coils starting from address LB100 from the HMI at Station 7 This will read coils LB100 LB111 Byte 1 Bytes 4 Bytes 6 9 Bytes 10 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13 14 2 3 5 The checksum bytes 13 and 14 is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 12 30 37 52 43 30 31 30 30 30 32 03 222 The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 22 568 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Reply The reply length is L N 8 Where N the number of requested devices If the command is successful the reply length will be at least 9 bytes but could be as long as 107 bytes It consists of the STX followed by one byte for each requested device then the ETX and Checksum Byte Bytes Byte Byte Byte
76. Time based Data Transfer Time based Object 1 Local HMI LB200 gt Local HAMI LE210 Mode Bit Time interval 2 0 second s transfer length 10 bitis 2 Local HMI O50 gt Local HMI L260 Mode Word Time interval 2 0 secondisi transfer length 1 words Press the New button in the above dialogue box the Data Transfer Time based Object dialogue box appear as shown in the picture below set item and press OK button the object will be created 312 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data Transfer Time based Object Attribute Address type Interval 3 0 seconds w Active only when designated window opened Source address PLE name Local HMI wr Setting Destination address PLE name Local HMI Setting Setting Description Attribute Address type select the bit or word device No of words or No of bits When select Word type the unit of data transfer is word set the number of data to transfer See the picture below Attribute Address type Interval 3 0 second s wyt When select Bit type the unit of data transfer is bit set the number of data to transfer See the picture below Attribute Address type i Interval 3 0 second s Mo of bits 4 313 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Interval Select the wait interval for each data transfer for example select 3 seconds the system will conduct data transfer operatio
77. User s Manual command 4 low byte of 4x_1 BYTE 4 command 5 high byte of 4x_ 2 BYTE 5 command 6 high byte of 4x_ 2 BYTE 6 command 7 low byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 7 command 8 high byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 8 The usage of INPORT is described below INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return_value read response Where the real read count is restored to the variable return_value unit is byte If return_value is O it means reading fails in executing INPORT Depending on the protocol response 1 must be equal to 0x3 if the response is correct After getting correct response calculate the data of 4x_1 and 4x_2 and put in the data into LW100 and LW101 if return_ value gt 0 and response 1 0x3 then read_data O response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 4x_1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 4x 2 setData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if The complete macro is as follows Read Holding Registers macro_command main char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short read_no return_value read_data 2 FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 Ox1 station number command 1 0x3 read holding registers function code is 0x3 442 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual address 0 address 0 starting address 4x_1 is O HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE addres
78. Words 0 10500 Retentive Memory Word Index FEE a 474 DDDDD DDDDD address DDDDD 0 65535 DDDDD address DDDDD DDDDD address Example 567 RW address 567 ee WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ee EE Memory A DDDDD 0 65535 Word DDDDD address Extended Memory DDDDDDDDDD EMO EM9 S Words Limited by device Maximum 2 GB 22 2 System Status and Control Read Remote Address Description amp HMI Write Control LB 900n When the HMI starts up the initial states Rw RW RW R W R W R W n 0 9 of these bits will be set as ON When the state is ON the return LB 9017 function of PLC Control Change R W R W R W Window will be disabled LB 9018 Set ON to make mouse cursor invisible LW 9025 CPU loading 0 100 indicator R R R Window number that is currently LW 9050 displayed as base windows on the HMI LW 9100 File name of the MTP project used by LW 9115 the HMI LW 9116 Size of MTP projects unit byte LW 9117 LW 9118 Size of MTP projects unit K byte LW 9119 LW 9120 Version of complier that is used for MTP LW 9121 projects LW 9122 Time year of MTP project being RORO RO complied wars Time month of MTP project being RO LW 9123 complied LW 9124 Time day of MTP project being complied Gateway IPO LW 9125 The IP address format is IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 Ro R IR R R RO LW 9126 Gateway IP1 LW 9127 Gateway IP2 475 Ly WE NTEK E
79. Ww Japanese Language 4 ComriexPS Oblique Ww Korean Lanonage 5 Euro Sion we French Language 6 Cataneo BT Spanish Language 7 Calligraphic 421 BT v Islan Language 0 Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique Arabic Font Under the Multi Language configuration users can select font type for each language Comment Input the comment of each language 371 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 15 3 How to Create a Label Library The following illustrations show how to create a Label Library First of all open the Label Tab Library dialogue and click New Correctly input the settings as shown below and then click OK Label name Pump Alarm No of states Label name The name of label In this case it is set Pump Alarm No of states The number of states possessed by the Label When the process is complete a new Label Pump Alarm with 2 states will be added to the Label Library See the picture below Label Tag Library rnem B Select Pump Alarm click Settings and the Label Tag Content dialog appears for users to set up the corresponding language content 372 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Label Tag Content Label Content Settings Label name Pump Alar Sater 0 AOO Language Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 a i l E Language 5 Language 0 Language 7 Language 6 15 4 Using Label Library When there are alread
80. and Settings Nicolas 4 m MTP1 xob Pee eee eee eee Decompilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI C Documents and Settings Nicolas A f EBS000V410_100614_eng font MTP140 ttf Arial Al C Documents and Settings Nicolas Atm EBSO00V410 100614 eng font MiTPi i ttt Times New Romar F 0 error s O warningis j Object size 56204 bytes Font size 314444 bytes Picture size 792958 bytes Shape size 842 bytes Sound size 36474 bytes Macro size 14 bytes Total size 1200966 bytes 1 15 succeeded v Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects but font fies 30 3 Disable HMI upload function LB9033 EB8000 supports system reserved address LB9033 Every time when set LB9033 ON OFF the HMI would disable enable the upload function of XOB file HMI needs to be rebooted to active LB9033 546 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Address Tag Library Customized System No Address oe PLC name Address type Address Reads Write 30 LB 9029 save all recipe data to machine set ON Local HMI Bit LB 9029 Ready rite 31 LB 9030 Update COM 1 communication parameters set ON Local HMI Bit LB 9030 Read yrite LB 9031 update COM 2 communication parameters set ON Local HMI LB 9031 Read Write Undate CHi OCOCOUM CATION Maracoete mek aca Hi i disable HMI upload function fwhen ON Ii series onl Loc
81. can be used with Historical Event Display Trend Display and Data Display for displaying the History File on the Historical Display objects as below illustration Iii i YN MAA AY Wr 06 10 09 06 08 09 ee 06 06 09 06 09 09 hay RAN Hh AEN TAF 13 14 18 132747938 13 14 58 13 15 18 13 15 48 13215138 13 16 18 Ija ee aL Type Alarm Event log is used to display Historical Event Display Data sampling is used to display Historical Trend Display or Data Display Date Set the date format Data Sampling object Users have to select which Data sampling object is triggered when 345 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual selecting Data sampling as Type Users should select the same data sampling object with the one selected in Historical Trend Display or Data Display LA Note 1 The system will automatically disable Mapping table when History Index mode is selected 2 When users select Drop Down List in Attribute and enable History Index mode the Option List displays in Error State Mapping tab 346 WS WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Option Last Object Option list Mapping Security Shape Label Label 14 pr 2010 13 Apr 2010 12 pr 2010 11 pr 2010 10 Apr 2010 09 Apr 2010 06 Apr 2010 OF Apr 2010 06 Apr 2010 05 Apr 2010 7 D Oo J Om kin Fe las Bo r pet default Error notification Enable
82. change the number of virtual serial port please click Weintek Virtual Serial Port to open Port Settings Advanced as follows Device Manager a m Ja Fee Action View Help Ks ma m re 2 E Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM3 Properties General Fort Settings Driver Det Details ENGXP z w Batteries E W Computer Bits per second ERII Disk drives a Display adapters Fak cne 3 Floppy disk controllers EL Floppy disk drives E IDE ATAJATAPI controllers dial Keyboards a Stop bits YQ Mice and other pointing devices a Ports COM amp LPT Communications Pork COM1 4 Flow contrat E Communications Port COMs es Pri nker Ch E a lt y Weintek Virtual Serial Port coma E C Advanced D Restore Defaults i Processors mm ee rear ee dm ate Lk lle For example users change virtual serial port from COM 3 to COM 9 534 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual f Ports COM amp LPT ai Communications Port COMI 4 af Communications Pork COMs 3 ai Printer Port LP a Weintek Virtual Serial Port COMS Processors g SCSI and RAID controllers Es D Sound video and game controllers 3 System devices l l Iniverzal Serial Riz ranbrallerz Use FIFO buffers requires 16550 compatible UART Select lower settings to corect connection problems
83. changes the status from out of schedule range to within schedule range if it is the start action will be performed If there are several schedule objects registered the same start time or end time when time up the system will perform the operation from the first to the last in ascending order When Time Set are specified as Address mode the system will read control word periodically When Time Set are specified as Address and start time and end time is over valid range the system may not execute operation properly When Time Set are specified as Address the action will not start up until time data update is Success 342 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 29 Option List Overview An Option List displays a list of items that the user can view and select Once the user selects an item the value corresponding to the item will be written to a word register There are two forms for this object Listbox and Drop down list The listbox lists all items and highlights the selected one However the drop down list normally displays only the selected item Once the user touches it the system will display a listbox which is similar to the one with Listbox style beneath the object Listbox Drop down list 14 Apr 2009 14 Apr 2009 il 13 Apr 2009 i 12 Apr 2009 11 Apr 2009 10 Apr 2009 kd 13 Apr 2009 12 Apr 2009 11 Apr 2009 10 Apr 2009 09 Apr 2009 w Configuration C
84. click Data Format to open the dialog to define the content in one data sampling Take the following as an example user defines three types of data Index 16 bit Unsigned Pressure 1 16 bit Signed and Temperature 32 bit Float respectively 104 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual which makes data length to be 4 words in total In this way EB8000 retrieves a 4 words lengthed data each time from the assigned address to be the content in one data sampling Data Format 16 bit Unsizmed 1 Pressure 1 16 bit Signed 2 Temperature 32 bit Float Caution After executing off line simulation if users need to change data format please delete data log file in C EB8000 datalog and then run off line simulation again The symbol means the storage location of data files Clear address If the status of the assigned address is set ON the obtained data will be cleared and the number of data sampling will go back to zero This won t affect sampled data that is already saved in file Caution this function is used for trend display in real time mode only Hold address If the status of the assigned address is set ON sampling will be paused until the status of assigned address returns to OFF History files Assign the storage location for data sampling However when users execute simulation on PC all data will be saved to the same subdirectory of datalog as EasyBuilder 8000 exe Save
85. com port Virtual COM Port PC lt gt PLC Please install weintek virtual serial port driver PLE Connection Port HMI lt gt PLO HAI IP If install processing pops up a dialog as follow please click Continue Anyway Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware Weintek Virtual Serial Port has not passed Windows Logo testing to venty its compatibility with Windows AP Tellme why this testing i important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing r Continue Anyway After processing is completed the virtual COM port is displayed as follow Virtual COM Port PG lt gt PLC COMMS 533 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 29 1 1 How to Change the Virtual Serial Port Open System Properties gt Device Manager to check if the virtual serial port is installed successfully Ports COM amp LPT ay Communications Pork COM1 4 F Communications Pork TOMz F Printer Port LE F Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM Se Processors S SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers 3 System devices Iniverzal Serial Foi ranbrallerz If users want to
86. device macro_command main 418 L 0 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual char command 32 short address checksum FILL command 0 0 32 command initialization command 0 0x1 station no command 1 Ox5 function code Write Single Coil address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 command 4 Oxff force bit on command 5 0 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 send out a Write Single Coil command OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 end macro_command INTPORT INPORT read_data start device_name read_count return_ value Description Reads data from a COM port or the ethernet These data is stored to read_data start read_datal start read count 1 device_name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the device must be a Free Protocol type device read_ count is the required amount of reading and can be a constant or a variable If the function is used successfully to get sufficient data return_value is 1 otherwise is 0 Below is an example of executing an action of reading holding registers of a MODBUS device 419 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read Holding Registers macro_command main char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short read_no return_value read_data 2 FILL command 0 0 32 command initialization FIL
87. example c also directory name such as f is illegal and should be written as f 17 3 Transferring Recipe Data Use the Data Transfer Trigger based object to transfer Recipe Data to the appointed address or save the data of the designated address in RW and RW_A as well Please refer to the Data Transfer Trigger based object section for more information 17 4 Saving Recipe Data Automatically In order to prolong the life of flash memory of HMI EB8000 will save Recipe Data automatically every minute to avoid losing data when HMI shuts down EB8000 provides user with LB 9029 save all recipe data to machine set ON system register bit function 382 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual to save Recipe Data manually EB8000 will save Recipe Data when user sets ON to LB9029 But when user sets ON to LB 9028 reset all recipe data set ON EB8000 will clear all Recipe Date and return to 0 383 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 18 Macro Reference Macros provide the additional functionality your application may need Macros are automated sequences of commands that are executed at run time Macros allow you to perform tasks such as complex scaling operations string handling and user interactions with your projects This chapter describes syntax usage and programming methods of macro commands 18 1 Macro Construction A Macro is made up of statements The statements
88. files e g Data Sampling and Event Log history files The first argument specifies the extension name for the type of the files to be processed and the second one specifies the exact command to execute in console mode Please note PathName is a key word to tell EasyPrinter to replace it with the real name of the backup file in conversion For example if a Data Sampling history file named 20090112 dtI is uploaded and stored EasyPrinter will send out the following command to a console window EasyConverter c 20090112 dtl And then the CSV file named 20090112 csv is created Therefore the criteria of the default Convert Batch File are 1 Convert all Data Sampling history files dtl into CSV files 2 Convert all Event Log history files evt into CSV files 522 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual NOTE Actually the PathName in the second argument stands for the full path name of the file In the previous case EasyPrinter replaces it with EasyPrinter interprets the Convert Batch File on a line basis i e each line forms a criterion Any two arguments should be separated by a comma Every argument should be put in double quotes Do not put any comma inside an argument For further information about how to use EasyConverter please refer to the manual Appendix EasyConverter 26 4 2 Specialized Criteria Sometimes users may need a special handling for the files uploaded from a specific HMI
89. fol WATCH Fd 100 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 8 Data Sampling Data Sampling defines how the data is sampled including sampling time and sampling location EB8000 saves the sampled data to the user assigned location The directory of saved data Storage location filename yyyymmdd dtl Storage location can be HMI SD card USB1 or USB2 which is designated by users Filename is usually a name defined by user which means something to user This name can t be used repeatedly by other sampled data files yyyymmdd shows when the file is built and is set by the system automatically EB8000 provides the following system registers for data sampling management LB 9025 delete the earliest data sampling file set ON LB 9026 delete all data sampling files set ON LB 9027 refresh data sampling information set ON LW 9063 no of data sampling files LW 9064 size of data sampling files 8 1 Data Sampling Management Before using Trend display or History data display objects to review the content of data sampling the method of how the data is sampled has to be defined Click Data Sampling in toolbar and then Data Sampling Object dialog appears as below 101 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data Sampling Object Read address Sample mode Trigger address Clear address Hold address Auto stop New Add a new data sampling definition Delete a specific d
90. in the buffer Esc Same as the Close window function it is used to close the keyboard window ASCII UNICODE To set the characters that are input in the numeric input object and the ASCII 169 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual input object Digital characters such as 0 1 2 or ASCII characters like a b c etc are available selection Execute Macro commands are executed with this selection Macro commands have to Macro be built before users choose this function Please refer to related chapter on how to edit Macros Macro macro 1 AD 1 Window title A function Key which is defined as Window Title Bar can move the popup bar window position on the screen Firstly users can select the popup window that has the title bar and then click another position to move the window Note this function is only available on indirect direct window when no title bar is selected Select the window title bar firstly Touching the screen for the new position the popup window will be moved Screen hard Hardcopy current display screen to the printer connected with MT8000 Before copy using this function please choose printer model in System Parameter Model printer If printer does not support color print user can select grayscale to have a better printout effect Black and white is for improving text printing quality Screen hard copy Printer HP PCL Series SB w Mode Notificatio
91. int GetDataEx e Local HMI LW 6 1 get 20 words 10 integer values from LWO LW19 to f 0 f 9 since each integer value occupies 2 words GetDataEx f 0 Local HMI LW 0 10 get 2 words from LW2 LW3 to the variable f GetDataEx f Local HMI LW 2 1 end macro_command Description setData send_data start device name device_type address_ offset data_count or SetData send_ data device_name device type address offset 1 Send data to the PLC Data is defined in send_data start send_data start data_count 1 data_count is the amount of sent data In general send_data is an array but if data_count is 1 send data can be an array or an ordinary variable Below are two methods to send one word data macro_command main short send_data_1 2 5 6 send_data_2 5 setData send_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 setData send data 2 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 end macro_command device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters device_type is he device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the 425 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual PLC data For example if device_type is LW_BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method BIN can be ignored lf device_type is LW_BCD it means the register
92. is while logic expression wend Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C24 syntax error break break statement can only be used in for while statement C25 syntax error continue 447 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual continue statement can only be used in for statement or while statement C26 syntax error expression is error C27 syntax error The mismatch of an operation object in expression causes a compile error For example macro_command main int a b for a 0 to 2 b 4 xyz illegal xyz is undefined next a end macro command C28 must be macro_command There must be macro_command C29 must be key word sub The format of function declaration is sub data type function _name For example sub int pow int exp end sub Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C30 number of parameters is incorrect Mismatch of the number of parameters C31 parameter type is incorrect Mismatch of data type of parameter 448 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual C32 variable is incorrect The parameters of a function must be equivalent to the arguments passing to a function to avoid compile error C33 function name undeclared function C34 expected constant expression C35 invalid array declaration C36 array index error C37 undeclared identi
93. is 0x30 result 1 is 0x30 result 2 is 0x30 result 3 is 0x30 preset 0x31 FILL result O preset 2 result O is 0x31 result 1 is 0x31 end macro_command SWAPB SWAPB source result Exchanges the high byte and low byte data of a 16 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result SWAPB 0x5678 result result is Ox7856 source 0x123 SWAPB source result result is Ox2301 411 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end macro_command Name SWAPW SWAPW source result Description Exchanges the high word and low word data of a 32 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result SWAPB 0x12345678 result result is Ox78561234 source 0x12345 SWAPB source result result is Ox23450001 end macro_command LOBYTE LOBYTE source result Description Retrieves the low byte of a 16 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result LOBYTE 0x1234 result result is 0x34 source 0x123 LOBYTE source result result is 0x23 end macro command HIBYTE HIBYTE source result Description Retrieves the high byte of a 16 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable
94. is LW and the encoding method is BCD address_offset is the address offset in the PLC For example SetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address is 5 lf address _ offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N For example SetData read data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If GetData uses the default station number defined in the device list it is not necessary to define station number in address _offset The number of registers actually sends to depends on both the type of the send_ data variable and the value of the number of data_count read_data 2 bool 8 bit a bool 8b f 2 shot 6b short 16 bit int 32 bit int 32 bit float 32 bit float 32 bit 2 When a SetData is executed using a 32 bit data type int or float the function will automatically send int format or float format data to the 1 2 1 2 426 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual device For example macro_command main float f 2 6 SetData f MODBUS 6x 2 1 will send a floating point value to the device end macro_command macro_command main int i bool a true bool b 30 short c false short d 50 inte 5 int f 10 for i 0 to 29 b i true next i for i 0 to 49 dli 1 2 next i fori 0to9 f i i 3 next i set the state of LB2 SetD
95. is located from address 3 there are continuous address and the system will read all the control words in one read command Address Channel 1 Channel Channel 1 s data n Channel s data n How to use watch Cursor Line feature Cursor line vi Enable Color RT PLC name Local HMI Device type LW w Address 1 You may use the Watch function to check the value of any point in trend curve When operator touches the data block object it will display a Cursor line the system will write the index and value of that data in cursor line to the designated address The user 264 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual shall register NI objects with the designated address The operator shall be able to observe the numeric value in across with the cursor line In the following example the data block display contains two data blocks The data format of channel 1 is 16 bit BCD and that of channel 2 is 32 bit unsigned The cursor is positioned in data index 3 which is corresponding to the fourth data in data block The system writes data index and the content of watched data to the watch address as shown in the following picture Channel 1 Channel 2 Watch 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned address Watch indicator i 50 BE Control No of Data 40 30 Data 1 39 bit NOTE 1 Data Index is a 16 bit unsigned integer when the designated register of cursor line is 32 bit device it
96. is unable to search the right file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat it will automatically play the next file after finish 307 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual c Play next file Command 3 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 If there is no next video file it will play the first index 0 file 2 If it is unable to search the right file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat it will automatically play the next file after finish d Pause Play Switch f Command 4 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Stop playing and close file Command 5 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Start playing at designated target location Command 6 Parameter 1 target location sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Parameter 1 target location should less than end time If it is over end time the system play video from last second g Forward Command 7 Parameter 1 target location sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 Increase playing time by Parameter 1 seconds If the system is previously playing video it continues to play after the operation If previously paused it keeps paused 2 If the playing time is over end time the system play video from last second 308 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual h Backward Command 8 Parame
97. of 1MB gt The size of data to be displayed will be 4 x 1MB c 5 history data each with a size of 1 5MB gt The size of data to be displayed will be 2 x 1 5MB 1 x 1MB partial Definition 1 To select confirmed or recovered events to be displayed or 288 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual hidden 2 In Real time mode select events to be deleted Illustration Control address Address yy Ww 16 bit Unsigned Enable event management If the address of History control is set LW100 When the value in LW100 0 is 0 gt All events will be displayed When the value in LW100 0 is 1 gt The confirmed events will be hidden When the value in LW100 0 is 2 gt The recovered events will be hidden When the value in LW100 0 is 3 gt The confirmed and recovered events will be hidden When the value in LW100 1 is 1 gt Users can delete the selected events under real time mode 289 Hew Event Display Object General Event Display Shape Font Include categories thio jo fsee dlam Event Log object Acknowledge style Max event no Frame Acknowledge elect box B Format Sort Time axending Time dexending Order amp Characters Display items PEQVENCE NO Event trigger time Event trigger date Event message Return to normal time Event tigger ame Acknowledge time Acknowledge ee Event trigger date Retum to nomnal tune Se
98. of word devices to set start and terminate time then update the table at any scheduled time Configuration Click the Schedule icon on the toolbar and the Scheduler list dialogue box will appear press the New the schedule object dialogue box will appear as shown below Scheduler 322 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Description Scheduler 1 _ FPower ON startend action Acton mode Bit ON Bit OFF O Word write Acton address PLE name Local HMI s Setting Example 1 The motor is scheduled to be power ON at 8 00 and power off at 17 00 Monday to Friday Here we use LB100 to control the motor Follow the steps to set up the schedule object 323 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual When the designated Start running start time is reached When the designated Stop running stop time is reached Click New to add a new object General tab Power ON start end action Detail message please refer to below Scheduler settings guide Power ON startend action 1 Check Bit ON in Action mode Action mode Bit ON O Bit OFF Word write 2 Set LB100 in Action address Acton addres PLL name Local HMI Setting Time Set tab 324 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 Select Time Set tab check Constant eS General Time set P
99. refer to the next section for the details of Convert Batch File 26 4 Convert Batch File EasyPrinter provides a mechanism for converting the uploaded Data Sampling and Event Log history files stored in binary mode to CSV files automatically Users requesting this function have to prepare a Convert Batch File to provide EasyPrinter with the information of how to convert the history files Backup Ethernet CSV MT8000 EasyPrinter Convert Batch File EasyConverter As shown in the above illustration the conversion is actually carried out by EasyConverter EasyPrinter simply follows the criteria in Convert Batch File and activates EasyConverter with proper arguments to achieve the conversion 521 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual EasyConverter is another Win32 application converting history data into CSV or MS Excel xls files Users can find it in the EasyBuilder 8000 installation directory Users requesting this function must ensure EasyPrinter and EasyConverter are placed in the same directory 26 4 1 The Default Convert Batch File The following is the default Convert Batch File included in the EasyBuilder 8000 software package The default Convert Batch File convert2csv def 1 dtl EasyConverter c PathName 2 evt EasyConverter c PathName There are two lines of text in the file Each line has two arguments separated by a comma and forms a criterion of how to deal with a specific type of
100. string Source into a hexadecimal value saved to a variable 409 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 short result source O 5 source 1 6 source 2 7 source 3 8 ASCII2DEC source 0 result 4 result is 0x5678 end macro command Name ASCII2FLOAT ASCII2FLOAT source start result len Description Transforms a string Source into a float value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 float result source 0 5 source 1 6 source 2 source 3 8 ASCII2DEC source 0 result 4 result is 56 8 end macro_command 410 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual a 18 5 3 Data Manipulation Description FILL source start preset count Sets the first count elements of an array source to a specified value preset source and start must be a variable and preset can be a constant or variable macro_command main char result 4 char preset FILL result O 0x30 4 result O
101. the macro 436 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual WorkSpace Macro name macro_test macro_command maing short data 4 GetData data 0 Local HMI LW 0 4 end macro_command If there is no error press Exit button and find that a new macro macro_ test exists in Macro list Macro list change remote 1 win change remote 2 win change remote 3 win OncChangeBrent OnChangeDubai OnChangeWTI OnInit OnShowBrent OnShowDubai OnShowWTI Macro under development 437 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 6 2 Execute a Macro There are several ways to execute a macro a With a PLC Control object 1 2 Open the PLC Control object and set the attribute to Execute macro program Select the macro by name Choose a bit and select a trigger condition to trigger the macro The macro will continue to be re triggered as long as the condition is met In order to guarantee that the macro will run only once consider latching the trigger bit and then resetting the trigger condition within the macro Use a Set Bit or Toggle Switch object to activate the bit b With a Set Bit or Toggle Switch object 1 On the General tab of the Set Bit or Toggle Switch dialog select the Execute Macro option Select the macro to execute The macro will execute one time when the button is activated c With a Function Key object 1 On the General tab of the Set Bit or Tog
102. time scale as HH MM or HH MM SS Font To select font style Size To select font size Recommend use font size 8 iF iii et ft a O rTM ae FIRMIE A AA ff yt tet tf HH hilt HH itt HHA hh HH hi HH baht HH hil HH hah HH Mt 245 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The picture below shows the attribute of channel tab Trend Display Objects Properties General Trend Channel Shape Profile Data sampling object Channel Display Description Data type 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Unagned 16 bit BCD 16 bit BCD 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Float 32 bit Float Pen property Color PLE name Local HMI w Setting Cancel Setting Description Channel Set each sampling line s format and color and the display data s low limit and high limit The max channel can up to 20 channels Limit uncheck Zero Span Dynamic Zero and Span are used to set the low limit and high limit of sampling data So if the low limit is 50 and high limit is 100 for one limits 244 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual sampling line then Zero and Span must be set as 50 and 100 so all the sampling data can be displayed in the trend display object Limit check When Dynamic Limits is selected the low limit and high limit are Dynamic derived from the designated word device The data length of the limits word device for limits is rela
103. to HMI memory Save the data sampling in MT8000 HMI 105 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Caution The data can only be saved when its size reaches 4kb otherwise users need to use LB 9034 to force storing this data Save to SD card Save the data sampling in SD card Save to USB 1 Save the data sampling in USB disk no 1 Numbering rule of USB disk is the disk inserted to the USB interface in the first place is numbered 1 next is numbered 2 and the last is numbered 3 It is not related to the interface position Save to USB 2 Save the data sampling to USB disk no 2 Folder name Set the file name of the data sampling Preservation limit This setting determines how many days the data to be preserved For example the preservation time is set two days which means USB 1 will keep the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday Data that is not saved in this period will be deleted automatically to prevent the storage space from running out If today were July 1 the USB 1 will keep the data of June 30 and June 29 in the memory but the data of June 28 will be deleted History files Bave to HWI menec Save to CF cand v Sare to USB 1 Save to USB 2 es Fueserration lirit Days of pueservration days 106 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 9 Object General Properties The contents of general properties settings of an object include Selecting the connected
104. to connect the PLC device again These registers can be used to indicate the states of communication with the PLC device on COM 3 LB 9800 is to indicate the states of communication with the PLC on the station no 0 LB 9801 is to indicate the 485 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual states of communication with the PLC on the station no 1 and so on When the state is ON it indicates the communication is normal When the state is OFF it indicates the disconnection to the PLC device at this time set the state at ON and the system will try to connect the PLC device again These registers can be used to indicate the states of communication with the PLC device on the Ethernet port aE a R W R W R W LB 10131 When the state is OFF it indicates the disconnection to the PLC device at this time set the state at ON and the system will try to connect the PLC device again The number of the driver that is used by LW 930n local PLC device The number of unprocessed commands LW 935n that are gave to the local PLC device The content of the latest connection LW 940n error when connecting to the local PLC device 22 13 Client Connected to Server Read Remote Address Description amp HMI Write Control LB 9016 Set ON when client connects to server The number of clients connected to LW 9006 server 22 14 MODBUS Server Station no Read Remote Address Desc
105. value in LW1 represents how many days to be included from the start to days before Example As illustrated below if value of LWO is 1 LW1 is 3 then the range of data will start form 20100609 and include data of 2 days before while 20100609 itself is counted We can see that in this example 287 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual since data of 20100607 does not exist the data displayed will only include 20100609 and 20100608 FEL 20100604 No 4 iKB EYT EYFEL 20100605 No 3 GKE EVIR EL 20100608 No 2 ITKE EVIR EIEL 20100609 AKEE EVIR EIEL 20100610 No 0 12EB EVIR b Index of the last history History control PLC name Local HMI Ww Address yy w o Ss 16 bit Unsigned Range of data to be displayed will take value in LWO as a start point and value in LW1 as an end Example if value in LWO is 1 and LW1 3 the displayed data will start from No 1 and include 3 history data No 1 No 2 No 3 EIEL 20100604 No 4 LEE EVT 4 SEL 20100605 No 3 6KB EVT tise EVEL 20100608 No 2 17KB EVT 43 EIEL 20100609 No 1 AEE EV ds FEL 20100610 No 0 12EBR EVIR The maximum size of data that can be displayed by system is 4MB the exceeding part will be ignored The following shows how data will be stored while the data size is too big Example a 5 history data each with a size of 0 5MB gt The size of data to be displayed will be 5 x 0 5MB b 5 history data each with a size
106. via Ethernet HMIIP 192 168 0 103 2 2 Editor Item Description O O EasyBuilder8000 To launch the EasyBuilder8000 screen editor Easy Converter Conversion tool for Data Sampling and Event Log Easy Printer Remote printer server Recipe Extend Provide file format conversion and data editing Memory Editor function for Recipe Extend Memory Review the register range of device types for each PLC supported EasyAddressViewer 17 es WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The project and data can also be downloaded to Build Download Data the HMI by CF card or USB memory stick This for CF Card USB Disk function is to build this kind of download data as shown below Build Download Data for CF Card USB Disk Project Manager select the folder to save download data SOUE Project PLEASE INPUT XOB FILE NAME Recipe R W PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME Recipe A RW 4 PLEASE INPUT RECIPE_ amp FILE NAME Data log PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE NAME Setting Description Insert CF card or USB stick to PC and press Browse to assign the file path or directory name and then press Build The whole contents of the source files will be downloaded to USB stick or CF card Project Press Browse to assign the desired Recipe RW specific files for download data Recipe A RW_A Data log Select the folder to save download data Note The path of download data should avoid desi
107. will be stored in the bit 0 15 2 The watch function can only inspect current value in the data block If there are multiple trend curves of the same channel on the screen the data of previous trend curves is not exist only the latest value is available for watch 3 If the trend curve is cleared when position the cursor line the O will be displayed as shown below 265 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Channel 1 Channel 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned 50 Watch indicator 2 Control oa Control i No of Data No of Data Data 1 40 Data 1 i Data 2 5o Data 2 20 Data 3 30 Data 3 10 Data 4 o m Data 4 Data 5 O Data 5 Data 6 EJ Data 6 Data T EJ Data T 1 3 Watch address Index o 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned 4 If there are only three data in Channel 1 when position the cursor in Data 4 the 0 will be displayed as shown below Channel 1 Channel 2 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned Watch indicator E Control Limitation 1 The maximum number of channels is 12 2 The system can draw up to 32 trend curves 3 The system can draw up to 1024 points for each channel 266 1 2 3 Watch address EN 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 20 XY Plot Overview XY Plot object displays two dimension data Each data contains X and Y values and each curve is composed of a stream of XY data The maximum number of trend curv
108. will play the channel set in Input channel automatically Fideo In Objects Properties ES General Profile Description Input channel B Encode format FAL w Control address Use contol function Use Definition Capture the image of the input video Capture Illustration Function A Capture address the Control Address that triggers system to capture the image of video B Storage medium To choose where to save the video image Available storage SD card USB1 or USB2 VIP 1 video image will be saved in file VIP 1 in the 354 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual chosen storage and VIP 2 video image in file VIP2 C Record time To set a period of time for image capturing The longest period can be set starts from 10 seconds before triggering Capture address to 10 seconds after triggering In this case there will be 21 images captured including the one captured at the triggering moment The time interval for capturing is once in each second The captured jpg file will be named in the following format Before or after Capture address is triggered YYYYMMDDhhmmss jpg The moment that Capture address is triggered YYYYMMDDhhmmss jpg Capture address e Use capture function PLC name Local HMI a Address e Storage medium OSD USB 1 CSB 2 Record time Before seconds Take the illustration above as sample set Record time Before and After to 5 seconds
109. with COM 3 is disconnected LB 9152 When the state is OFF the disconnection to the PLC device will not be resumed When the state is ON the system will automatically resume connection if the PLC device with the Ethernet port is LB 9153 disconnected n 0 31 LB 9184 When the state is OFF the disconnection to the PLC device will not be resumed LB 9200 These registers can be used to indicate Bo R W R W R W LB 9455 the states of communication with the 482 Ly WE NTEK LB 9500 LB 9755 LB 9800 LB 10055 PLC device on COM 1 LB 9200 is to indicate the states of communication with the PLC on the station no 0 LB 9201 is to indicate the states of communication with the PLC on the station no 1 and so on When the state is ON it indicates the communication is normal When the state is OFF it indicates the disconnection to the PLC device at this time set the state at ON and the system will try to connect the PLC device again These registers can be used to indicate the states of communication with the PLC device on COM 2 LB 9500 is to indicate the states of communication with the PLC on the station no 0 LB 9501 is to indicate the states of communication with the PLC on the station no 1 and so on When the state is ON it indicates the communication is normal When the State is OFF it indicates the disconnection to the PLC device at this time set the state at ON and the system will try
110. 00 Index register 16 bit Unsigned ka Write after button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated after button is touched and released otherwise if not selected operation will be activated once the button is touched Notification When this function is selected in the manual operation mode the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after before the operation is completed Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated bit device before or after writing to word device Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area PL name Device Ype LE Address Format DODDD range 0 11999 Index register 162 Lyd WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute Set style Set the operation mode The available modes for selection are listed as follows a Write constant value Set constant function When the operation is activated the Set value will be written into the word device The constant s format 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD depends on the format of Write address Attribute Set Style Write constant value met value oO b Increment value JOG Increase value function When the operation is activated the Inc v
111. 00 User s Manual 13 7 Multi State Switch Overview Multi State Switch object is a combination of word lamp object and set word object The object can be used not only to display the state of a word device but also to define a touch area when activated the value of the word device can be set Configuration Click the Multi State Switch icon on the toolbar and the New Multi State Switch Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items and click OK button a new Multi State Switch object will be created See the pictures below 0 a Multi State Switch aan Nes WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Multi State Switch Object General Security Shape Label Desorption Mote ya O o Read address PLO name koca HME 0 HMI Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned Write address PLE name neal HMI Setting Address Liy w bo o 16 bit Unsigned Write when button is released Attribute Cyclical User defined mapping Cancel Setting Description Mode There are Value and LSB display mode Refer to the Word Lamp Offset Object section of this chapter for related information Read Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address Systme tag Index register of the word device that controls the display of multi state switch Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Write Click S
112. 00 User s Manual New Alarm Bar Object Alarm Shape Font A thribiute Font Comic Sant MS J Color Size Me Italie 284 YW WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 22 Event Display Overview Event display object displays active and finished events The events are registered in Event log object The active events are the events which are in trigger condition or have been triggered and unacknowledged The event display object displays those active events in the order of trigger time See the picture below Event display object can also display the time of the events been triggered acknowledged and recovered 01 20 09 15 35 22 Event 1 LB10 ONA 01 20 09 15 35 22 Event 0 LB0 0N 01 20 09 15 35 20 15 35 23 Mui tet 0172009 183819 Event 0 LBO ON 01 20 09 15 35 18 Event 1 LB10 ON M4 OAM 46 25 4546 z f E Cvant E Configuration Click the Event Display icon on the toolbar the Event Display dialogue box appears set each items in the General tab press OK button and a new Event Display Object will be created See the pictures below 285 L WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Event Display Object General Event Display Shape Font Desniptons O Mode Real time Write address PL name Local HMI v Setting Control address Enable event managem
113. 00 having a unique Station ID Valid Station ID shall be from 1 to 255 32 3 3Broadcast Messages A command with a Station ID of 0 shall be considered to be a Broadcast Message Broadcast Messages shall be processed by MT8000 regardless of the MT8000 s Station 560 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Address MT8000 shall not issue a reply message when a Broadcast Message is received regardless of the setting of Parameter 4 32 4 Command Usage 32 4 1 RD Batch Read Request This command reads up to 99 consecutive 16 bit items from the LW memory area of HMI The command is always 14 bytes long Byte 1 Bytes 4 Bytes 6 9 Bytes 10 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13 14 2 3 5 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 2 Bytes Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to read 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 6 9 This is the starting address to read from Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 11 This is the number of addresses to read up to 99 Must be 2 bytes long Byte 12 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes 13 14 The checksum is the lowest 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 through 12 Example Read 3 words starting from address LW100 from the HMI at station 10 OAH This will read addresses LW100 LW102 Byte 1 Bytes 2 Bytes 4 Bytes 6 9 Bytes 10 11 Byte 12 Bytes 13 14 3 5 The checksum bytes 13 and 14 is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the su
114. 000 User s Manual C Export to Excel Click Export excel button to export data in Event log to excel Alarm Event Loz Category Al 2 w Mode Condition Read address Motification address Buzzer WORD lt 000 LW 0 Disable Disable Event1 BIT ON LBD Disable Disable Enable back light when alarm occurs History files Save to HMI memory Save to CF card Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 Preservation limit Days of preservation davis Print Sequence no Event trigger time CO HH MM SS HH MM DD HH MM Event trigger date O MMDD EY DDMA Y O DD MM YY Oo Meo copy J Pate port Smear 7 2 Create a New Event Log Click New Event Log dialog appears with two tabs General tab 94 we We NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Alarm Event Log Ed General Messace cees O J Pity ol Address type Word ha Read address Notification Enable O Set ON Set OFF PL name koca HME ge HMI Setting Condition Intolerance Ont tolerance Setting Description Category The category of an event Priority level The priority of an event Users can define Low Middle High or Emergency according to the importance of the event When the number of event log equals to the max number available in the system the less important events lower priority will be deleted and new events will be added in the default is 1000 please refer to
115. 0081127 dtl Success C Documents and Settings user 20081128 dtl Success Combine to C Documents and Settings user pressure xls Step5 Open the new combined file to examine the data in Microsoft Excel 505 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 25 4 Command Line For EasyConverter users can run in a command mode EasyConverter c s t num setting source destination Setting Description Indicate the setting file lgs source Indicate the source file dtl or evt Indicate the destination file csv or xls Whether involving a setting file or not If set the flag it indicates that users utilize a setting file Output file type If set the flag output a CSV file or the output file will be an Excel file Time format For example t2 indicates Separated by a DOT tinum sign For example EasyConverter exe c s t3 E Work 20080625 lgs E Work 20080625 dtI E Work 506 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 26 EasyPrinter EasyPrinter is a Win32 application and only can run on MS Windows 2000 XP and Vista It enables MT8000 Series to output screen hardcopies on a remote PC via Ethernet Please see the following illustration Screen Hardcopy Print Out Ethernet MT8000 MT Remote N y Printer Server Save to File Here are some advantages of using EasyPrinter EasyPrinter provides two modes of hardcopy output Print Out an
116. 1 set the values of LWO LW49 SetDataEx d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 set the values of LW6 LW7 note that the type of e is int SetDataEx e Local HMI LW 6 1 set the values of LWO LW19 10 integers are equal to 20 words since each integer value occupies 2 words SetDataEx f 0 Local HMI LW O 10 end macro_command GetError err macro_command main short err char byData 10 GetDataEx byData 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 1 10 read 10 bytes 429 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual if err is equal to O it is successful to execute GetDataEx GetErr err save an error code to err end macro_command PURGE PURGE com_port Description com_port refers to the COM port number which ranges from 1 to 3 It can be either a variable or a constant This function is used to clear the input and output buffers associated with the COM port macro_command main int com_port 3 PURGE com_port PURGE 1 end macro_command Name SetRTS SetRTS com_port source Description Set RTS state for RS232 com_port refers to the COM port number which ranges from 1 to 3 It can be either a variable or a constant source also can be either a variable or a constant This command raise RTS signal while the value of source is greater than 0 and lower it while the value of source equals to 0 macro_command main char com_port char value SetRTS com
117. 1 0 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 O If the interface is USB no further settings need to be done Please check if all the settings in Device Properties are correct PLC should be set with a read address alone with a station no for HMI to locate and communicate with it If this address does not include a station no EB8000 will use this PLC default station no as the station no of PLC In addition station no can be set in the read address of PLC directly Take address 1 20 as an example Read address PLC name MITSUBISHI F FEZ Device type TY Address 1 l ddres format ddd range 0 255 1 means PLC station no and has to be named from 0 to 255 20 means PLC address the sign is used to separate station no and address This is for setting the station no of broadcast command Command for the users of this set station no will be seen as broadcast command For example if the broadcast station number is set as 255 HMI with an address such as 255 200 will send this command to all the PLC connected to it but will ignore the replies of PLC after receiving this command This only works on Modbus 56 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Broadcast station no Interval of If the interval between read addresses of different commands is less block pack than this value these commands can be combined to one But words combining function is disabled if this value is 0 For ex
118. 1 pass through source COM port 1 3 COM1 COMS3 LW 9902 pass through destination COM port 1 3 COM1 COM3 Start pass through on project manager Click Pass through button on the Project Manager to set the communication parameters Pass through Ethernet com port Hbl IP 192 168 1 37 Get Hil Communication Parameters Hl work mode Unknown Source COM Port PC HM Cowi 1 Baud rate 96800 Data bits Parity Even Stop bits Destination COM Port HM PLE COM 2 ee Baud rate 9600 Data bits Parity Stop bits 539 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual HMI IP Assign HMI s IP address Get HMI Communication Parameters To get the settings of source and destination COM port that parameters come from reserved addresses the details of addresses as follows Source COM port and Destination COM port LW 9901 Source COM port 1 COM1 2 COM2 3 COM3 LW 9902 Destination COM 1 COM1 2 COM2 3 COM3 port COM 1 mode settings 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W 2 RS485 4W LW 9551 baud rate O 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 LW 9552 data bits LW 9553 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd LW 9554 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits COM 2 mode settings LW 9556 baud rate O 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 LW 9557 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW 9558 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd LW 9559 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits COM 3 mode set
119. 10 12 15 16 19 20 L 7 e L 1 L 4 5 6 9 11 L 2 STX Statio WD Addr No of Data Data Data 3 Data ETX Chec n Items 1 2 Data N 1 N k su m Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to write 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 4 7 This is the starting address to write to Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 8 9 This is the number of addresses to write Must be 2 bytes long 563 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Bytes 10 L 3 The data to write Up to 99 items each with four Hex digits Byte L 2 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes L 1 L Checksum Example Write 3 words starting from address D201 to the HMI at station 17 11H This will write to addresses LW201 LW202 and LW203 LW201 101 0x65 LW202 575 0x23F LW203 1049 0x419 Byte Bytes Bytes Bytes 6 9 Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Byte Bytes 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 24 25 26 The checksum bytes 25 and 26 is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 24 31 31 57 44 30 32 30 31 30 33 30 30 36 35 30 32 33 46 30 34 31 39 03 49A The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 9A Reply If the command is successful the reply is In the event of an error the reply is 564 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 32 4 3 RR Random Read Request This command reads up to 99 i
120. 29 Frefix IF_ Ex P_192 166 1 25 Properties Minimize to sstem tray Detailed message 508 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 In Server assign Port number of the server socket to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 2 In Naming Convention for HMI Folder select Use IP address and assign IP_ as the Prefix 3 In Properties select Minimize to system tray Click Hardcopy tab at the left side in the dialogue box as follows MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Output ess hp LaserJet 3390 PCL 5 Backup nave to files in D T8000 4 In Output select Print out to and choose a printer as the output device for screen hardcopies Note You can only choose from the printers available in your system so it is normal if you do not see hp LaserJet 3380 PCL 5 on your list as the example 5 Click OK to apply the settings 6 In Menu File select Enable Output to allow EasyPrinter to output any incoming print request i e screen hardcopy 26 1 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder8000 In Menu gt Edit gt System Parameters click Printer Server tab and select Use MT Remote Printer Server the following dialogue box will appear 509 1 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual oystem Parameter Settings Ed Device Model Creneral a yeten Setti g mecurity Font Extended Mem
121. 4 Cianten e Data SaN WINN eee A E E E E E 101 8 1 Data Sampling ManagGeMe nt ceessessssssesssessssssssessesesessesesesessessssssssesessseseeessseseesseessseseeses 101 8 2 Create a New Data Sampling ccsssssessssssecsssssssessssssssesessssssesssesessesssesssssseseesssssesesssnseeses 102 Chapter 9 Object General Properties esssssessssssssessesesesesssssesscsssessssssssessessseseesssesessssesesssseeeseees 107 lt a ESS e i a Oe ee en eee A een eee nee er eee en O 107 9 1 1 Setting the Reading and Writing ACOreSS ce csessesssessesesessssecesesesesesesseeeeeeees 107 9 2 Using Shape Library and Picture Library uu ecessesesesesesessssesesessesssessssesesesseseesseseseeeeeeses 109 geL SY will aa O Snae Bl E eect ae eee oe 110 O22 Seis OP re LD cece cesce cscs cates soecee corey tetas tere cerns essere 112 mos 180 010 Re 4ie Gio gc geen eee ee eee ere E E ene ee 115 gA Adung PONE SZE eee eee ee dee E 120 9 5 Walla DIOS of station TID CM sezststasesctccscscecsnadeesqanaescoseatenc n E SEEE ASEE 121 LOBA ASE AON N O aaa EEA A E E E A eerie 122 CTO N E E SEA EO EE A EO 123 10 1 Settings of Password and Classes uc ccesessssessesssscsssessesecsesesecsecessesessssesesesesseseeeeseeeeseseees 123 E AEE o a sess EE P E EEEE EE 125 Tie EIA ISS OF ECU ee a A E E SS 128 Chapter 11 Index Regista ene eee ee a aea ee ete eee eee 133 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual CE VAN GUC IO ese E N E G EA E E E N E E
122. 4800 9600 LW 9561 19200 38400 57600 115200 COM 3 data bits LW 9562 7 T bits 8 8 bits COM 3 parity 0 none LW 9563 1 even 2 odd 486 R W R W R W 7 Z 4 Z R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual COM 3 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits LB 9036 CF free space insufficiency aam R NA NA 22 17 PLC amp Remote HMI IP Address Setting Remote Address Description HMI aars l Control LW 9600 PLC s IP address setting as IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 port no LW 9629 LW 9800 Remote HMI s IP address setting a IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 port no LW 9839 22 18 Printer Server Setting Remote Address Description HMI i Control LW 9770 Remote printer server setting LW 9773 IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9774 Remote printer server user name R W R W LW 9779 LW 9780 Remote printer server password 487 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual wss O J o 22 19 Address Index Function Read Remote Address Description amp HMI Write Control Remote Address Description HMI i Control Touch status word bit 0 ON user is LW 9041 touching the screen RoRo twe9044 Leave X poston R R R twe9045 Leave Y poston R R R 22 21 Variable Station no Remote Address Description HMI Control LW 10000 VarO Var15 station no variable R W R W R W LW 10015 Usage VarO address 4
123. 5 C50 an invalid PLC name PLC name is not defined in the device list of system parameters C51 macro command do not control a remote device A macro just can control a local machine For example setData bits O PLC 1 LB 300 123 100 PLC 1 is connected with the remote HMI so it is can not work 450 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 10 Sample Macro Code 1 for statement and other expressions arithmetic bitwise shift logic and comparison macro_command main int a 10 b 10 i b 0 400 400 lt lt 2 401 b 1 22 2 30 7 b 2 111 gt gt 2 b 3 403 gt 9 3 gt 9 3 lt 4 3 lt 8 8 b 4 not8 1 and2 1or0 1 xor2 b 5 405 and 3 and not 0 b 6 8 amp 4 48 amp 4 8 4 8 4 b 7 6 4 b 8 0x11 b 9 409 for i 0 to 4 step 1 if a 0 400 then GetData a 0 Device 1 4x 0 9 GetData b 0 Device 1 4x 11 10 end If next i end macro command 2 while if and break statements macro_command main int b 10 i i 5 while i 5 20 3 GetData b 1 Device 1 4x 11 1 if b 1 100 then break end if 451 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual wend end macro_command 3 Global variables and function call char g sub int fun int j int k int y SetData j Local HMI LB 14 1 GetData y Local HMI LB 15 1 g y return y end Sub macro_command ma
124. 56T 20 x 234 MTS0vToOTAMTSOTOT 480 x 2344 MT6l04TAMTS080T MTSi04T 640 x 480 MTS121T 00 x 600 MTSU OHM Te lode TS1001 600 450 When changing HMI model and press OK users will be inquired if they would like to Resize pop up windows or objects 62 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Resize pop up windowsfobjects Eg General windows Resize pop up windows Eeyvboard windows Resize keyboard windows Resize function key objects HMI station Set the HMI station no used by current HMI If no specific request is to be made just use the default number Port no Set the Port no used by current HMI It is used as port no of MODBUS server If no specific request is to be made just use the default number Timer Clock source To set up the signal for timer object The time information of timer is used by Data Sampling Event Log etc which are objects that need the time records a HMI RTC means the time signal comes from internal clock of the HMI b External device means the time signal comes from external device To correctly set source address of time signal is necessary Take the illustration below as an example It indicates the source of time signal is from TV of the Local PLC The source address TV starts from address 0 contains 6 consecutive words and each of them contains the following information TV second the limited range 0 59 TV Minute the limited range 0 59
125. 60 result result is 60 source 0 5 ASIN source result result is 30 end macro_command ACOS ACOS source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic cosine of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result ACOS 0 8660 result result is 30 source 0 5 ACOS source result result is 60 end macro_command 404 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ATAN ATAN source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic tangent of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result ATAN 1 result result is 45 source 1 32 ATAN source result result is 60 end macro_command LOG source result Description Calculates the natural logarithm of a number source can be either a variable or a constant result must be a variable macro_command main float source 100 result LOG source result result is approximately 4 6052 end macro command LOG10 LOG10 source result Description Calculates the base 10 logarithm of a number source can be either a variable or a constant result must be a variable macro_command main float source 100 result 405 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual LOG source result result is 2 end macro command RAND RAND result Description Calculates a rando
126. 70 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Example Write 5 bits starting from address LB214 to the HMI at station 12 This will write to addresses LB214 LB218 Write the following data BE 7 Bytes Bytes Bytes Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Bytes Rs 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 srx oc we o4 os 1 1 o o 1 ex 2 0 57 43 30 32 31 3 30 35 30 31 32 46 4 The checksum bytes 18 and 19 is calculated as the lowest 8 bits of the sum of the Hex codes for bytes 2 17 30 43 57 43 30 32 31 34 30 35 31 31 30 30 31 03 32F The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 2F Reply If the command is successful the reply is In the event of an error the reply is 32 4 7 Error Codes The following table lists the error conditions and the Error Codes returned for those errors 571 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Invalid Checksum Unknown Command 11H Data Length Error data overflowed receive buffer Communication Data Error ETX not found Illegal Address More than 99 data items were requested 572
127. 88 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 23 MT8000 Supports Printers 1 EPSON ESC P2 Impact Printer LQ 300 LQ 300 LQ 300K RS232 LQ 300 II RS232 Inkjet Printer Stylus Photo 750 USB Laser Printer EPL 5800 USB 2 HP PCL Series USB port conform to HP PCL level 3 protocol Laser Printer HP LaserJet P1505n HP PCL 5e e PCL 5 was released on the HP LaserJet III in March 1990 adding Intellifont font scaling developed by Compugraphic now part of Agfa outline fonts and HP GL 2 vector graphics e PCL 5e PCL 5 enhanced was released on the HP LaserJet 4 in October 1992 and added bi directional communication between the printer and the PC and Windows fonts Caution For HP printer we do not support 1 HP LaserJet P1005 which is not PCL 5 HP LaserJet P1006 HP LaserJet 1000 which is support HostBase Printing language HP LaserJet 1010 which is support HostBase Printing language HP Color LaserJet 1500 which is support HostBase Printing language HP Color LaserJet 3500 which is support HostBase Printing language of Or le 489 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Please ensure that the HP printer has support PCL5 before connecting with MT8000 series Inkjet Printer HP DeskJet 920C 930C D2360 D2560 D2568 3 SP M D E F EPSON ESC protocol 9 pin printer RS232 port SIUPO http www siupo com SP M D E F series SP E1610SK paper width 45mm SP E400 4S paper w
128. B 9017 ON the write back operation will not be executed If Clear data after window changed is selected the Trigger address will be reset to 0 after new window is open b Write data to PLC current base window When the system changes the base window the new window number will 317 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual be written into the Trigger address c General PLC Control This function performs data transfer between PLC and HMI when users set appropriate value in Trigger address Control code Operation for data transfer Trigger address PLC register gt HMI RW PLC register gt HMI LW HMI RW gt PLC register HMI LW gt PLC register With this function the system uses four continuous word devices please refer to the following explanation Trigger Control code The valid control code is listed address in the above table When a new control code is written into the register the system will conduct the data transfer function Trigger Number of words to address 1 transfer Trigger Offset to the start If the value is n the start address 2 address of PLC address of PLC register is register Trigger address 4 n Trigger The start address of address 3 LW or RW As an example to transfer PLC registers DM100 101 105 to HMI RW10 11 15 follow the steps below 1 Set Trigger address to DM10 2 Set DM11 6 no of words to transfer
129. BUS RTU Device Local Free Protocol COMI 19200 E 8 1 Device Properties Name Clee ae vie E HMI PLC Free Protocol W 1 00 FREE PROTOCOL so COM COM1 19200 E 8 The interface of the device PLC I F uses RS 232 now If connecting a MODBUS TCP IP device the interface must select Ethernet In addition it is necessary to set correct IP and port number as follows 439 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual PLC type Free Protocol 7 W 1 00 FREE PROTOCOL so r PLC I F Ethemet IP 192 168 1 103 Port 502 Settings Suppose that HMI will read the data of 4x 1 and 4x 2 on the device First utilize OUTPORT to send out a read request to the device The prototype of OUTPORT is OUTPORT commandfstart device_name cmd_count Because MODBUS RTU device is a MODBUS RTU device the read request must follow MODBUS RTU protocol The request uses Reading Holding Registers 0x03 command to read data The following picture displays the content of the command The items of the station number byte 0 and the last two bytes CRC are ignored Request 0x03 2Bytes te Starting Address 2 Bytes Ox0000 to OxFFFF Quantity of Registers 1 to 125 Ox7D Response as x 2 Bytes N Quantity of Registers Error 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Depending on the protocol the content of a read command as follows The total bytes are 8 command 0 stati
130. Bs movaluestogethor A B amp OxF ORs two values together A B8 C fs XORS two values together A B C Compliments value azs Priority of All Operators The overall priority of all operations from highest to lowest is as follows Operations within parenthesis are carried out first Arithmetic operations Shift and Bitwise operations Comparison operations Logic operations Assignment Reserved Keywords The following keywords are reserved for Macro use They cannot be used for variable array or function names T l a gt lt lt lt gt and OF XOPr not lt lt 27 amp a Or exit macro _command for to down step next return bool short int char float void if then else break continue set sub end while wend true false 389 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual SQRT CUBERT LOG LOG10 SIN COS TAN COT SEC CSC ASIN ACOS ATAN BIN2BCD BCD2BIN DEC2ASCII FLOAT2ASCII HEX2ASCII ASCII2DEC ASCII2FLOAT ASCII2HEX FILL RAND DELAY SWAPB SWAPW LOBYTE HIBYTE LOWORD HIWORD GETBIT SETBITON SETBITOFF INVBIT ADDSUM XORSUM CRC INPORT OUTPORT POW GetError GetData GetDataEx SetData SetDataEx SetRTS GetCTS Beep 18 3 Statement 18 3 1 Definition Statement This covers the declaration of variables and arrays The formal construction is as follows type name where define the type of name Example int A define a variable A as an integer typ
131. C of the variables from source start to source start count 1 Puts in the 16 bit CRC into result result must be a variable data_count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short 16bit_CRC CRC data 0 16bit CRC 5 16bit CRC is Oxbb2a 417 Ly WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end macro_command OUTPORT source start device_ name data_count Descriptio Sends out the specified data from source start to source start count 1 n to PLC via a COM port or the ethernet device_name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the device must be a Free Protocol type device data_count is the amount of sent data and can be a constant or a variable To use an OUTPORT function a Free Protocol device must be created first as follows system Parameter Settings pee Device list Location Device type Interface Local MT8121T 800 x 600 Disable Free Protecol COM1 19200 E 8 1 Device Properties MODBUS RTU Device HMI PLC Location V 1 00 FREE_PROTOCOL so l PLC default station no o COM1 19200 E 8 1 The device is named MODBUS RTU Device The port attribute depends on the setting of this device the current setting is 19200 E 8 1 Below is an example of executing an action of writing single coil SET ON to a MODBUS
132. Chapter 28 Multi HMIs Intercommunication Master Slave Mode Multi HMIs intercommunication means that HMI uses COM port to connect a remote HMI and read write data from to a remote PLC as below PLC Above shows the PLC connects HMI 1 and HMI 1 connects HMI 2 via COM port so that the HMI 2 can control the PLC by way of HMI 1 An example describes how to use EB8000 to create projects used on HMI 1 and HMI 2 28 1 How to Create a Project of Master HMI Below show the content of HMI 1 s System Parameter Settings Device list Sy stem Parameter Settings Extended Memory Printe Backup Server General System Setting Security a8 x Location Device type Interface KF Pro vi Local MT6070iH MTS070 Disable Nid Local FLE 1 FATEE FE Series Local FATEE FE series COMIM600 E 7 1 Rs2se Local Master slave Se COM2 1 1 S200 E 8 1 Risse 1 Due to HMI 1 s COM 1 connects PLC the device list must include Local PLC 1 This example s Local PLC 1 is FATEK FB Series and PLC s communication parameter is 9600 E 7 1 528 1 WS WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 Users must add a new device Master Slaver Server for setting COM 2 s communication properties Because HMI 1 s COM 2 is used to receive commands from HMI 2 Above picture shows the COM 2 s parameters are 115200 E 8 1 and uses RS232 These parameters have no
133. Chapter 7 Event Log Event log is used to define the content of an event and the conditions triggering it In EB8000 this triggered event also called alarm and its processing procedure can be saved to designated places such as HMI memory storage or external memory device The saved file is with a name in a format as EL yyyymmdd evt In this name yyyymmdd records the time that this file is built and will be set automatically by the system Take file name EL_20100524 evt as an example this shows that this created file records the event occurred on 24 of May 2010 EB8000 also provides the following system address tags to manage the event log LB 9021 reset current event log set ON LB 9022 delete the earliest event log file set ON LB 9023 delete all event log files set ON LB 9024 refresh event log information set ON LW 9060 no of event log files LW 9061 size of event log files 7 1 Event Log Management With objects like Alarm Bar Alarm Display and Event Display users are able to clearly understand the life cycle of the whole event from happening waiting for processing until the alarm stops Before using these objects the content of an event has to be defined first Click the Alarm Event Log icon and the dialog appears as below Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Alarm Event Log Category All 0 v History fae Save to HMI memory Save to CF card Save to
134. E EAE E ec N ee eee 478 22 8 Password and Operation LOVE ccescsccsesesesessssesesesesessssesesesessssssesesesessssseseeeseseseseseeeeeees 478 DD Tne OT PM e e R E E E E ees eateeeneecaceeees 480 PEA Ee N EES A E E E E E E acees 480 22 11 The States of Communicating with Remote HMI S uc ccsessesesseseseeseeeseseeeseeeeees 481 22 12 The States of Communicating with PLC eessssesesseceseesesssesesseseseesesesseeteeeseeeeees 482 22 13 Client Connected 10S CLV OM ciiisean a areen E Taai t ia 484 221A MODBUS SEM er Stao NO cnsa scree csctancceiepseeceiesasuastanemceuausencaue 484 Py AFEN Glo ga aa 81a ir e7 lt 0 6 ege ens tenet tenn nn eevee arene ere Cre 485 DZ MG PEMINAT EENE A EE NEES 487 22 17 PLC amp Remote HMI IP Address Setting ou esessssssessesssssssssssesessesssesssssssseesssssesseees 487 22 Larn SEI CRS SUING a ENE E E E NA 487 22 19 Address Inaex FUNGUO esec ien e ny nce rE ENE Ei et nS 488 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2220 TOUCH Screen X ana Y POSION cccsceccetesescrscscecsecsteecresteesnessesscccesas cae aeacsesdbncececsessedescieest 488 2221 WAN PANNE Station NO sssri sce seca e E EE ese a 488 Chapter 23 MT8000 Supports Printers casccuiscesescecssavacestacesscuvdvesenedarsavsranseanseceuctdentjaranvearacoteumvectiseiensins 489 cranta 2A REGDE FOOT sennae E E E E E tes 491 LAL AT OCU ON ere a E E E E EEE AEA EE E 491 2A DSUs OT RECIPE tlt cc eases esac accep ESE A weedeat 493 Chapter 23E y ONOR 2 Geen e
135. E axis time range C Pixel Time Distance condis Select Time the Distance is used to set the X axis in unit of time elapsed See the picture below 239 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 20 seconds Oba lt gt ee m Otherwise select Time for X axis time range and go to Trend Grid for enable Time scale function Please refer Time scale on the following Watch line Enable PLE name Lacal HMI Ww Setting Using the Watch line function when user touches the trend display object it will display a watch line and export the sampling data at the position of watch line to the designated word device You may register a numeric display object to display the result Please refer to the following picture 240 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Match line vem a a A a EA D a Oa a e e j M 4 L W 300 Watch line function also can export sampling data of multiple channels The address registered in watch line is the start address and those sampling data will be exported to the word devices starting from start address The data format of each channel may be different the corresponding address of each channel is arranged from the first to the last in sequence For example LW300 Ch 0 16 bit Unsigned LW301 Ch 1 32 bit Unsigned LW303 Ch 2 32 bit Unsigned LW305 Ch 3 16 bit Signed The picture below shows the at
136. EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual to P6 The system carries out X axis projection with following steps a Automatically calculate two projected points in X axis Xo 0 and Xe 0 b Link all these points in the order of Xo 0 PO P1 P6 Xe 0 and returns to Xo 0 at last c Fill out all enclosed areas formed X axis projection Enclosed region Xo 0 Xs 0 ok h CE sateen eee ates eee E E a eee S eee ee Pate ara A A E S alee E T T i Ce a o a e O ee O O e O a O G m d ja a a d a a e a o a a ee a a G a E E E E E E DE E 618 88 E Xo 0 Xs 0 Similarly for Y axis projection 278 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Enclosed region Enclosed region Reference In order to make the XY plot more readable you can configure up to 4 line horizontal reference lines on the graph Fill in high low limit and Y axis coordinate for each reference line Reference line Limit Low imit 0 High limat 100 Reference line 1 Reference line 2 Reference line 3 Reference line 4 You may also use PLC address to define high and low limit 2 9 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Reference line Limit from PLC PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Address L 16 bit Unsigned Reference line 1 Reference line 2 Reference line 3 Reference line 4 280 WS WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 21 Alarm Bar and Alarm Display Overview Alarm bar and Alarm display o
137. EasyBuilders000_4 10 be installed ah Setup will install EasyBuilder6000_ 4 10 into the Following Folder To continue click West IF you would like bo select a different Folder click Browse Browse At least 381 8 MB of free disk space is required 10 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 Users will be enquired to select a start menu folder to save the program s shortcuts Click Browse to designate a folder or use the folder recommended then click Next Setup EasyBuilder8000_4 10 Sid Select Start Menu Folder Where should Setup place the program s shortcuts EA Setup will create the program s shortcuts in the Following Start Menu Folder To continue click West IF you would like bo select a different Folder click Browse atali oov4 10 Ce Cer 6 Users will be enquired if there are any additional tasks to be done For example Create a desktop icon Tick it if needed then click Next to continue Setup EasyBuilder8000_4 10 Sid Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing EasyBuilder 000_ 4 10 then click Next Additional icons 11 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 7 At this moment all the settings are done Please check if they are all correct If any changes need to be made click Back or click Install to start installing
138. EasyPinter to configure FC for printing screen hardcopy and stormg backup data Output sethings Orientation G Horizontal Vertical Printer ze Ge Original size Fit to printer margins Margin mm mm mm Communication sethngs IPaddvess 127 0 0 1 Fort 8005 Tser name 111111 Password L11111 Setting Description Output settings Orientation Set how will words or pictures be printed out horizontal or vertical Printer size Set to print out in original size or to fit the set printer margins Margin set the top bottom right and left margin width Communication IP address settings Assign the IP address of a remote printer via network Port User name Password Assign the access information Port can be set from 1 to 65535 Maximum length of user name or password is 12 characters Please refer Chapter 26 Easy Printer for more information 77 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 6 Window Operations The basic component of a HMI screen is a Window This shows its importance With a window all kinds of information like objects pictures and words can be shown in HMI screen Generally there s more than one window in a project many windows will be constructed in one project Users are able to configure 1997 windows or screens numbered from 3 1999 in EB8000 For how many windows can be used in one project it depends o
139. General tab on the Set Bit Object s Attributes menu then it is able to operate the PLC connected to the remote HMI B on PC through the simulator function Set Bit Objects Properties General Security Shane Label Profile Write address Write after button is released Attribute 472 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 22 System Reserved Words Bits Some Local Words and Local Bits are reserved for system usage Users should not use these reserved words bits except for the designated purposes Address Taz Library O Customized System Read Write Read Write Address type Address LB 2000 l No ee tag name m LB S000 initialized as ON Local HMI LE S001 LE S002 LE 9003 LE S004 LBE S005 LE 9006 LB 9007 LE S008 LE S009 LB 9010 LB 9011 LB 9012 LB 9013 LE 9014 LE S015 R SN1F initialized as OM initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON data download indicator data upload indicator data download upload indicator FS window contral hidelon i show fOr 4 FS button control hidefOn i show OFF 4 FS window button contral hidelOn show OFF 4 cet an when a client connects this HeT Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local H
140. How to Connect a Barcode Device 20 1 How to Connect a Barcode Device The following explains that how to create a project for connecting and controlling a barcode device First please add a new Barcode device into the device list as follows SSRIS a a Font Extended Memory Printex Backup Server SECUTI Device Modsl Geneml System Settings Secwiy 7 J Device list L L3 Name Location Device type IF Protocol NEET Local HMI Local HMI Local MToOTOH MTOTO Disable Nia MiA HEE OOO ers Device Properties Mame Barcode COM port OHMI PLC Location PLE type V 1 20 BARCODE s0 PLC IF R5 232 vl COM COM1 9600 N 8 1 Settings Click the Settings barcode device settings display as below 462 We WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Barcode Device Settings Baud rate Data bits Bante Use a start code canis rT start code Terminator CRLF COSTHETE O Other O None Setting Description COM o Barcode device can be connect to any of COM 1 COM 3 Data bits S Set communication parameters accordingly Read byte limit This function will restrict the number of byte to read The range is 10 512 For example If Read byte limit is set as 10 the barcode device generate data 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 0x30 0x38 0x33 0x38 O
141. Japanese or Korean which is not listed in Fonts for non ASCII strings table EB8000 will select a font from the list to substitute for it automatically Users can also test which non ASCII strings of Windows can be used in EB8000 and add them to Fonts for non ASCII strings table Line spacing Decide the interval between lines in the text 73 va WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Add All Non ascii Fonts Line spacing H Line spacing 0 Add Al Non asci Fonts Line spacing H Line spacing 6 5 7 Extended Memory Parameters in Extended Memory tab determine the path of the extended memory 74 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual System Parameter Settings Device Model Creneral Sersten Sethe eC UCIT Font EF Extended Memory PrinterBackup Server EMO File name lemlem OSD card TISB 1 U B 2 EM1 File name lemlemi OOOO O O OSD card USE 1 IB 2 EM EM3 File name emiemi CSD card TSB 1 USB 4 EM4 File name lemfemi O O OSD card USB 1 USB 2 EMS Filename fem5emi O8Dcad U USB 2 EM6 File name lemfemi OOOO O OSD card USB 1 USE EM Filename em7emi O8Dcad USE Use 2 EMS File name lemfem CSD card TSB 1 USB 2 EM File name emgem OOOO O OSD card USB 1 UZB Extended Memory is numbered from EM1 to EM9 Method to use extended memory is similar to that of other device type i e LW or RW address Users can simply select from Devise type list while
142. L response 0 0 32 command 0 0x1 station no command 1 0x3 function code Read Holding Registers address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read no 2 _ read 2 words 4x_1 and 4x_2 HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 send out a Read Holding Registers command OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 Il read responses for a Read Holding Registers command INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return_ value if return_ value gt 0 then read_data 0O response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 data in 4x_1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 data in 4x_2 SetData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if 420 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual oo end macro_command Description GetData GetData read_data start device name device_type address_ offset data_count or GetData read_ data device name device_type address _ offset 1 Receives data from the PLC Data is stored into read_data start read_data start data_count 1 data_count is the amount of received data In general read_data is an array but if data_count is 1 read_data can be an array or an ordinary variable Below are two methods to read one word data macro_command main short read_data_1 2 read data 2 GetData read_data_1 0
143. LW 0 50 get 2 words from LW6 LW to the variable e note that he type of e is int GetData e Local HMI LW 6 1 423 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual get 20 words 10 integer values from LWO LW719 to f 0 f 9 since each integer value occupies 2 words GetData f 0 Local HMI LW O 10 get 2 words from LW2 LW3 to the variable f GetData f Local HMI LW 2 1 end macro_command Description GetDataEx read_data start device_name device_type address_ offset data_count or GetDataEx read_data device_name device_type address _ offset 1 Receives data from the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of read_data device_name device type address _ offset and data_count are the same as GetData macro_command main bool a bool b 30 short c short d 50 inte int f 10 double g 10 l get the state of LB2 to the variable GetDataEx a Local HMI LB 2 1 get 30 states of LBO LB29 to the variables b 0 b 29 GetDataEx b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 get one word from LW2 to the variable c GetDataEx c Local HMI LW 2 1 424 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual get 50 words from LWO LW49 to the variables d 0 d 49 GetDataEx d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 get 2 words from LW6 LW to the variable e note that he type of e is
144. Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 1 EasyBuilder8000 Installation and Startup Guide wn ceseesssesseseessessseesssesseesseseesees 8 1 1 EasyBuilder8000 Installation scccesdcsincosesssxacensiesnseccesexestscenedestaedetessadncaeniseeenetnieueniomumicnctes 8 1 2 Steps to Install EasyBullderB000 ou ssscssssssessesesescsssssessssssessesssssessssesessesssesesseseeseesseeeess 8 Chapter 2 Project Manager Operations cesscsssssssesssssssssssscsssssessesssssessesssessesssssessssesessssesssessessseseeaes 15 DM MAA TUS SO Mecsas E ese A ctr ve eee eee eee 16 P EONO eee eee eee ee ee ee E oe ee a EA ree 17 2 2 1 Steps to Download Project via USB Or CF Card cessessesssesseesseesseseeeeeseeee 19 DZ TANS SM occ nbs octagon te ce Gees AE E acest cettinas ad Saeed teen E ET 19 Died DOWO Clie esac stecs cast ea AE EN A EEE EE AEN tenses reese ee 19 P sa 6 6 een nen E E ree ne eee See renee en ve 21 OA BS 1010 che aa E era ene eee eer ee nee eee ene ere een eee ere eee 22 2 4 1 On line Simulation OFF liNe SIMULATION eecesssseseesesessesecesseesesestsseseeesseeeeseseees 22 DAS SU UN LOM Megane ecg see ces cece cesses cat ee E A eeee encores ees 23 as ETO eee ne ee Ce ee ee ee er ee ee ee 24 Vso mms CON DO cee een E Onr ene EE E E een es meer 25 Chapter 3 Create an EasyBullder8000 Project un ccesessessssssssesssessesessssesssssssesssesssseessesseseessessesseeseees 26 Del Ce a NOW PTO OC r E AE N E scene ees ESEN ERE 26 3 2
145. Local HMI w Setting Control address FLL name Local HMI w Setting No of data address i i Offset to start address Data storage start address PLC name Local HMI s Setting Limit i Cancel Help Setting Description No of Set the no of channel for this object Each channel represents one data channel block The max no of channel is 12 Cursor Line Using the Cursor line function when user touches the Data Block display object it will display a cursor line on the data block display object and transfer the position of cursor and the data at the cursor position to 255 Lib we EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual address the designated registers Please refer 19 3 On line operation for further information Channel Select each channel and set the attributes Control PLC name Select the PLC where the target data block located Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of Control address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Device type Select the device type where the target data block located Control word address Control word is used to control and clear trend curve display 0 No action default 1 Plot trend curve 2 Clear trend curve 3 Redraw trend curve After executing the operation above the system will reset the control word to zero N
146. MI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI aral HMT Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Rit LE 9g001 LB 9002 LE S003 LE 9004 LB 9005 LB 9006 LB 900 LB 9005 LB 9009 LB 9010 LB 9011 LB 90112 LB 9015 LE 9014 LE 9015 R AN1A Read yrite Read yrite Read Write Read Wy rite Read yyrite Read Write Read Write Read yrite Read Write Read only Read only Read only Read yrite Read Write Read Write Reads yrite Users can import MTSOO tag to represent the address 22 1 The Address Ranges of Local HMI Memory 22 1 1 Bits Device a Address Range Address Format Local Memory Bits Local Memory Bits Bits 0 11999 1999 DDDDD DDDDDdd DDDDD address dd bit offset 00 15 LW_BIT O 1050015 Example 56712 address 567 bit offset 12 Retentive Memory Bit RBI 0 65535f DDDDDh 473 Local Word Bits iv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual l EE RW Bit 0 65535f RW_A Bit 0 65535f Retentive Memory Word Bits Retentive Memory A Word Bits 22 1 2 Words DDDDD address h bit offset 0 f Example 567a RW _ Bit address LW9000 bit offset a DDDDDh DDDDD address h bit offset 0 f 567 Example 567a address 567 bit offset a DDDDDh DDDDD address h bit offset 0 f Example 567a address 567 bit offset a Local Memory Words Retentive Memory
147. MI kail Setting Cancel Setting Description Read Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address Systme tag Index register of the bit device that control the window popup Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Attribute Style Refer to the Indirect Window Object for related information Window no Set the popup window number Example to use direct window 207 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Here is an example to explain how to use the direct window object The picture below shows the settings of the direct window object In the example use LB10 to call up the window 35 Read address PLE name Lacal HMI Setting Toggle Switch Read address LB10 Write address LBIO Mode Toggle A Styl No tetar Window Wo 35 WINDOW 035 v When the state of LB10 is set to ON the window 35 will be popup when the state of LB10 is OFF the window 35 will be closed See the picture below WINDOW 35 Toggle Switch Toggle Switch Read address LB10 Write address LB10 Read address LB10 Write address LB10 Mode Toggle Mode Toggle 208 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual WINDOW 35 Toggle Switch Read address LEIO Write address 1 B10 Mode Toggle Toggle Switeh Read address LB10 Write address LBIO Mode Toggle NOTE Only 16 windows maximum can be displayed s
148. Manual Chapter 13 Objects This chapter is to illustrate the ways of using and setting all kinds of objects For those settings general for all the objects such as index register label shape and so on please refer to Chapter 9 Object s General Properties 13 1 Bit Lamp Overview Bit Lamp object displays the ON and OFF state of a bit address If the bit state is OFF the State 0 shape will be displayed If the bit state is ON the State 1 shape will be displayed OFF State ON State Configuration Click the Bit Lamp icon in the toolbar and the Bit Lamp Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in the content of and press OK a new bit lamp object will be created See the pictures below 148 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Bit Lamp Object Creneval security Shape Label Deesion Read address PL name ace HMI w Setting Invert signal Mode Alternating image on state 0 k Cancel Setting Description Description A reference name that s assigned by user for the object The system does not make use of this reference name since it is for user s document only 149 Read address EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the bit lamp object Users can also se
149. Modify Picture Delete All States Delete Cur State Insert Before Insert After Setting Description Library Picture Libraries which have been added into the current project Select the library source of a Picture from the list Select the state that current graph represents If the selected Picture isn t displayed it means that the Picture does not exist or the state of the Picture isn t defined Select Lib Click Select Lib and the following dialog appears for users to select the file path of the Picture Library to be added By previewing the content of the library right side of the window users can select suitable library 363 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Ler a a TA ilg AMERICA Tiag ASIA Tig EUROPE SH isg OCEANIA Zini Fe per mapi ib Sal melyyer fb T MEDDO Deme ME Sd MTeOo_feme T MTS Cee Sal MTS000_Geme j Sal MTEC Derm T Taib i E Fii pg packar ih Fides of hpi pecbune Eb fb JbB New Lib Unattach Lib Click the button to delete the Picture Library in Library from the current project FasyBuilder 6000 Delete All States Delete all states of the selected Picture Delete Cur State Delete current state of the selected Picture Rename Rename the selected Picture Rename Insert Before Insert After Add a new state after the current state 364 L WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Import Picture Add a
150. O s a E E A E E EEE 541 29 2 3 Using System Reserved Addresses to Enable Pass Through Function 543 Chapter o0 Pro ecr PrO lt 1 611 0 een eee eee ene mene nen renee E E A E E 545 WL KO P WO eer S E 545 30 Z DECOM MaulOM 1S O r ea E E EN 546 30 3 Disable HMI upload function LB9033 oo cescsestesescseesesesessesesestesesesteseseseeeeseseeeees 546 30 4 Project protection Project Key ss ssesseessosssessoessesseesseesseoseenseosesnseossesseessesseesseoseenseossesseos 547 BOD Project PassWord MTP Tile ssa SE E 548 Chapter 31 Memory Map Communication ssesssssessessseesseesssesssssssenssensseoseesssensseossrossensssossressressrosseos 550 Chapter 32 IMT GOOG ASCIPrOtOCOL reisinin riin e E EEEE 559 Ma CIO FMI VVC NS ANE A A N I E A seu ees nerneeees 559 DAP ODON ANI CUS era secsicarensontse ececoseaesseaaesonscesavras donsrsos seasons EA 559 32o INSECTA UNO OU ccc AE AE cnc occas aco ARE EA ENE AAEE ee tanec 560 oo E VN eee nee nee mene E tO een Care ee Cnr ee 560 oo Ae 66 2 5 96 en een een eee ner eh er nena een eet eee 560 BY Me Broad cas EMOS aO Serraria eee ee eh ee er eee E E ee 560 Bye eo ap gale U e a E ten eee ere eee eee 561 32 4 1 RD Batch Read cxcsscicceciececekccutie decesedestecsnesslecectasveutecedoachsabnde Siexzeedlededelocedeteaseestaectebsbossene 561 32 4 2 WD Batch Wite uu ee eecccecceccsccsceccsccscsscsscsecscseceecscescssssecscesceacscescesceacsasscceceaceaees 563 32 4 3 RR Random REA secce
151. ODE Em ASCIVUINICODE mode Enter Backspace O Clear Ex ASCI UNICODE e ASCTTUNICODE mode Enter Backspace O Clear Es ASCII t UNICODE ASCIVUNICODE mode O Enter Backspace Cleat Es ASCII UNICODE a After the settings are completed function keys Ql BI y are created Create an Enter key A simple UNICODE keyboard is built Place a ASCII Input object in window set No of Words as 8 and tick Use UNICODE as below ASCII Input Object s Properties General Data Entry Security Shape Font Profile Desrription Mask Use UNICODE Reverse highlow byte Read address PL name Local HMI v Setting Address Liv we Address PLC name Sled nS G00 tn oan ER RT BE v Device type Li v Address j System tag Address Format DODDD range 0 10500 Index register No of word E 146 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual FK_0 CE FK 4 B FK m 7 FK 3 7 Enter In conclusion Numeric keyboard and ASCII keyboard are all made by combining function keys Users can group up the self made keyboard and add to library for future use If not using the default keyboard self defined keyboard can also be used Add newly made keyboard to System parameter settings General Keyboard 147 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s
152. OFF Word write 3 Set LW100 in Action address 327 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Acton addres PLE name Local HMI w Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned 4 Check Constant and set Write start value to 90 in Word write value settings Word write value settings Constant Addres Write start value 99 Time Set tab 5 Select Time Set tab check Constant General Time Set Prohibit Constant O iddes 6 Unselect Setting on individual day In Start adjust time as 8 00 00 and select Monday to Friday Setting on individual day stat sun Mon Tue Wen Thu Fri Sat 7 In End select Enable termination action and adjust time as 17 00 00 End Enable termination action 17 8 Select General tab set Write start value to 90 and Write end value to 30 328 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 9 Click OK the settings appear in the Scheduler list Schedule settings guide E General tab scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Description Scheduler 1 Power OM startend action Acton mode O Bit ON Bit OFF Word write Acton address Address 16 bit Unsigned Word write value settings Constant O Addes Swatyehe 90 329 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description Action Mode Select the type of operation Select the type of operation performed at designated time at designated tim
153. ON increase the brightness of CCFL LB 9040 backlight one step Set ON decrease the brightness of LB 9041 W W CCFL backlight one step LW 9070 free space insufficiency K bytes System reserved free space size K LW 9071 R W R W bytes MT8000 current available free space K LW 9072 vies R W R 480 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 11 The States of Communicating with Remote HMI s LB 910n Remote Description HMI Control n 0 31 The registers can be used to indicate the states of communication with remote HMIn ON indicates the communication is normal while OFF indicates the communication is disconnected from remote HMIn at this time set the state to ON the MT8000 will try to connect to remote HMIn again 481 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 22 12 The States of Communicating with PLC Read Remote Address Description amp HMI Write Control When the state is ON the system will automatically resume connection if the PLC device with COM 1 is disconnected LB 9150 R W R W R W When the state is OFF the disconnection to the PLC device will not be resumed When the state is ON the system will automatically resume connection if the PLC device with COM 2 is disconnected LB 9151 When the state is OFF the disconnection to the PLC device will not be resumed When the state is ON the system will automatically resume connection if the PLC device
154. OOO Atobnie Font Colar esses E Dake Aliga Laft s hbgn iie Uair Deaplesst thew alinio t Dupacet thet sanhi amp Beery saie Every langage Al Every dm _Evers language All halo aed ET ET Desci Ho me wa hraci Laren ox Cenc 155 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 3 Set Bit Overview The Set Bit object provides two operation modes the manual operation mode defines a touch area users can activate the touch area to set the state of the bit device to be ON or OFF When users select the automatic operation mode the operation will be automatically activated in pre configured conditions the touch area has no action in any circumstance Configuration Click the Set Bit icon in the toolbar and the New Set Bit Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new Set Bit object will be created See the pictures below ru ups T o ai ma iT re mf m F 156 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Set Bit Object General Security Shape Label Dewinfons O S Write addres PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Write after button is released 4 thibute Macro v Execute macro Macro ID1 dD 13 Trigger mode OFF gt 0N t GFF ON E ON OFF OFF lt OH Cancel Setting Description Write address Click Setti
155. RO SYNC_TRIG_MACRO macro_id Description Trigger the execution of a macro asynchronously use macro_id to designate this macro in a running macro The current macro will continue executing the next instructions after triggering the designated macro in other words the two macros will be active simultaneously macro _id can be a constant or a variable macro _ command main char ON 1 OFF 0 setData ON Local HMI LB O 1 ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO 5 call a macro its ID is 5 452 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual SetData OFF Local HMI LB O 1 end macro command 18 6 How to Create and Execute a Macro 18 6 1 How to Create a Macro Macro programming can be divided into some steps as follows Step 1 Click the Macro Manager icon on the tool bar of EasyBuilder 8000 to open Macro Manager as follows Bs a o ee m sE yan a Y Macro Manager 433 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Macro list Animation Auto change remote 1 win change remote 2 win change remote 3 win Cos INVBIT OnAuto OnAutoEnd OnAutoStart OnChangeBrent OnChangeDubai OnChangeWTI1 OniInit OnShowBrent OnShowDubai Scan Alarm H TAAN GAWAT Macro under development On Macro Manager all macros compiled successfully are displayed in Macro list and all macros in developing are display in Macro under development The following is a description of the various butt
156. S S7 200 as an example Device Properties Name SIEMENS 87200 OHMI PLC Location petting i IF 192 168 1 35 Port 8000 PLC type SIEMENS 87 200 Ww Y 1 90 SIEMENS os 200 20 PLC VF RS 48520 0 PLC default station no COM COMI things Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read command sze words Max wirite command sze words Setting Description HMI or PLC This is to confirm whether this device is a HMI or PLC mere epenn O Location Users can select Local or Remote Select Remote in this case eter L Padus oft rool HM wich a t S 58 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual SIEMENS 7 200 PLC Click Settings of Location to set this IP address IF Address Settings Ethernet O COM port use master slave protocol IF address 192 166 1 35 Port na PLC I F This setting defines which interface the remote PLC uses If the remote PLC uses a COM port interface used should be selected from RS 232 RS 485 2W and RS485 4W PLC default This setting defines which default station no is used by remote PLC rll ahah ealeinineeiemiaaiineisiialial COM This setting defines which COM port the remote PLC uses to connect Con ia renere ri Tesetnge smite cones o After all settings are completed a new device named Remote PLC is added to the Device list Device het Location Device type Interface Local Local HMI Lo
157. Style Bold E Bookshelf Symbol 7 Color Select the text color Size Select the text size The text sizes supported by EB8000 are listed below 117 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Align Select how users would like to align the text in multiple lines The text aligned Left 111 222222 333333333 The text aligned Center 111 222222 333333333 The text aligned Right 111 222222 333333333 118 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Blink To decide how will the text blink Choose None to disable this feature or set blinking interval as 1 second or 0 5 seconds None 1 second s 0 5 second s Italic Use Italic font Italic Label Underline Use Underline font Underline Label Movement setting Direction Set the direction of the marquee effect No movement wt No movement Continuous Whether this selection is tick or not influences how the marquee effect is displayed If not checking Continuous the next text appears only when the previous text disappears completely See the picture below 119 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual If checking Continuous the text will be displayed continuously Speed Adjust the speed of the text movement Content Set the content of the text If using Label Library the content will be sourced from Label Library Tracking When Tracking is selected moving the text of one state will a
158. TV Hour the limited range 0 23 TV Day the limited range 1 31 TV Month the limited range 1 12 TV Year the limit range 1970 2037 63 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Timer Clock source Extemal device PLC name w Address Ty os 16 bit Unsigned Address PLC name UMS ber ben el ea Device type Address Address Format DOD range 0 255 _ Index register 16 bit Unsigned w Type Display printers supported For HP PCL Series it has to be connected through USB interface while other printers through COM port For more information please refer to Chapter 25 Printer Types supported by MT8000 Type HP PCL Series USE w l None Paper sze PM oD E F EPSON ESC P Series HP PCL penes Ush Using COM port to connect printer users should set accurate parameters When the type of printer is SP M D E F the pixels of width has to be set accurately i e the set pixel s can not exceed printer s default setting Otherwise this printing won t succeed Type Se COM Baud rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Pixels of width Screen hard copy scale 100 pixels for 1610 type or 220 pixele for 2407 4004 type Storage 1 Storage space available for the project and history data is 12MB By space adjusting the space of these two parts users can reach their 64 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual management memory requ
159. USB 1 Save to USB 2 Preservation limit Print Sequence rio Event trigger time O HH MM SS HH MM DD HH MMI Event trigger date O MADO eY DEMM y O DEMM EY O YIMM Mewn e Insert Delte Settings o w Pate Export Import eagar EB8000 classifies events All events are divided into categories 0 255 Alarm y Bar Alarm Display and Event Display can be used to restrain which category to display Category is for selecting which category of the events to be displayed Category A CSS 90 W WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The 2 of O 2 in this illustration demonstrates there are two defined events in category 0 Alarm Event Log Category 0 2 d MWMode Condition Read address Notification address Buzzer BIT ON LB 0 Disable f Disable Disable Determine the storage device of an event log However when users simulate the project in PC the files will be saved under the same event log subdirectory as EasyBuilder8000 exe Save to HMI memory Save the event log data in MT8000 memory Save to SD card Save the event log data in SD card Save to USB 1 Save the event log data in USB disk 1 Numbering rule of USB disk is the disk inserted to the USB interface in the first place is numbered 1 next is numbered 2 and the last is numbered 3 It is not related to the interface position Save to USB 2 Save the event lo
160. User s Manual Select Window Style Exit Once the base window is built its window number sticks with it and can t be changed But the size color and name of the window can still be modified 6 2 2 Window Settings EB8000 provides three methods to modify window attributes a Right click on the designated window from window tree and select Settings to open the Window Settings dialogue to change the window properties 11 show Too 12 13 Object 14 Function 15 Security 16 Communi a7 rao ra Close b Right click directly in the window without selecting any object and then select Attribute Or click in EB8000 menu without selecting any object can also open the Window Settings dialogue 87 Lyd WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual A thaibute c Select Window from menu in EB8000 and select Open Window a dialogue appears Designate a window to modify then choose Settings to open the Window Settings dialogue 6 2 3 Open Close and Delete a Window To open an existing window not only double click the window No from the window tree users can also right click the assigned window from the window tree and choose Open to open it Similarly to close or to delete an existing window is same as the procedure above Please note that the window to be deleted has to be closed That is to say only a closed window can be deleted 88 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual
161. Ve f seessessesssessssssosssessesssesseessesssesseoseenseossenseossesseesseossenseoss 456 19 1 2 How to Read from Write to MODBUS SefV f ssssssssssssssssessssesssrsssrssssssressees 458 19 2 How to Change the Station Number of a MODBUS Server in Runtime 461 Chapter 20 How to Connect a Barcode DeviCe s esesssessesssesssessesseessessssnsssssenseonsenssrssensersseessresss 462 20 1 How to Connect a Barcode Device wu esesssssssssssssssessesssssessesesessssesssessssssessesssesessessseseeses 462 Chapter 21 Ethernet Communication and Multi HMIs CONnNe ction esessesesesesesteeseeeeee 466 2LLAMI to AM Communicati OV ossining ia a 467 212 PCO HM COMMUNICA O eese oi EE RRA eyes ener 469 21 3 Operate the PLC Connected with other HMIsS cs csescscsesesesesscsesesesestssescseeeeeees 471 Chapter 22 System Reserved Words Bits cc sessessssssssssessssssssesssssssssescsssessesssesessessseescsesesessesessees 473 22 1 The Address Ranges of Local HMI M MOry cccesessssssesessesesscsssessesessesessesesesseeeseseensees 473 PAA EN E E i EET AN IEN A A N IN OA 473 DL Mec NON r A E A E 474 PAOA T EE E E E EE ae OE A E E eee 475 PA Mie S SOLDATID eaa T A EA E AEE EEE ETEA E ee ee 476 Vie AROPE Da aE A E AE E EAA E es 476 22 5 Task Button and Fast Selection WINdOW sssesssesssesssesssesssesssessssessresseessrssseosseessenssressees 477 DDO EV STV EO A ee E S AE EE A E E E 477 PNA e Ea E a gis E E E E
162. _port value raise RTS signal of COM1 while value gt 0 SetRTS 3 0 lower RTS signal of COM3 450 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual a end macro command GetCTS Syntax GetCTS com_port result Description Get CTS state for RS232 com_port refers to the COM port number which ranges from 1 to 3 It can be either a variable or a constant result is used for receiving the CTS signal It must be a variable This command receives CTS signal and stores the received data in the result variable macro_command main char com_port char result GetCTS com_port result get CTS signal of COM1 GetCTS 3 result get CTS signal of COM3 end macro_command Description Plays beep sound This command plays a beep sound with frequency of 800 hertz and duration of 30 milliseconds macro_command main Beep end macro_command 431 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 5 6 Miscellaneous Name SYNC_TRIG_MACRO SYNC_TRIG_MACRO macro_id Description Trigger the execution of a macro synchronously use macro_id to designate this macro in a running macro The current macro will pause until the end of execution of this called macro macro _id can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char ON 1 OFF 0 setData ON Local HMI LB O 1 SYNC_TRIG_ MACRO 5 _ call a macro its ID is 5 SetData OFF Local HMI LB O 1 end macro_command Name ASYNC_TRIG_MAC
163. a 1 iMi T2 iE Bonen Porta 18 gin pi 35 02 Prini pereer ip active and hay for teequesis l This window lists all incoming tasks i e screen Job List hardcopy and backup requests This window shows the information about the Property Window task selected from Job List This window shows the preview image of the 3 Preview Window l screen hardcopy task selected from Job List 4 Download Progress This window shows the download progress of Window incoming requests a This window shows the time and message of 5 Message Window events such as incoming request incorrect password etc 26 3 2 Operation Guide The following tables describe the meaning and explain how to use all EasyPrinter menu items 515 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Enable Output e Select EasyPrinter processes the tasks one by one e Unselect EasyPrinter arranges the incoming tasks in memory EasyPrinter can only reserve up to 128 MB of task data in memory If the memory is full any request coming in afterwards will be rejected and users must either operate Enable Output or delete some tasks to make room for new tasks Edit To edit a screen hardcopy task Edit Print Job Orientation scaling Original Fit To Margin Margins mm Left 15 Right 15 Top 15 Bottom 15 Users can freely change the properties of Orientation Scaling and Margins here To delete the selected tasks
164. able Password 1111 MA D Mc OD ME OF 71 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Project password MTP file Users can set password to protect the MTP file in System parameter Security tab Users have to input the password set here when they want to edit the MTP file MTP password range 1 4294967295 Tick Enable then click Setting and the window is as shown below _ Enable User 10 User 11 C Enable Password 19854541 range 1 4294967295 User 12 ap Project password MTP file 7 Enable Before editing project a pop up window will ask password for access the project L BasyBuilder8000 File Tool Help OD ow ed ii H FasyBuilder8000 Ed Password 4 Limited to 3 times Eas ee 5 6 Font Parameters in Font tab determine the font of non ASCII which is used in EB8000 72 L ws WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual system Parameter Settings x Device Model General pystem pettine DECUIT Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Fonts for non ascu strings 3 of 9 Barcode Delete All Franklin Gothic Medium Taramo CTeOT Eta Gulim Impact Latha Lucida Console Maloun Gothic M angal Mirmmtt Sane Herf Fonts for non strings Fonts for non ASCII strings are listed above When users use non ASCII character set or double byte character set including simplified or traditional Chinese character
165. actions in the following ranges Hour 0 23 Minute 0 59 Second 0 59 If you specify a value outside the range an error will occur NOTE The time data format shall be 16 bit unsigned system doesn t accept BCD format 340 L ws WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual E Prohibit tab scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Profubit PL name eee HMI a i E Setting Enable MT8000 reads the bit status before performing start action If the bit is ON the schedule action is not performed Enable When performing start and termination action the system will simultaneously play the specified sound 341 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Restrictions User can register the maximum of 32 entries in Scheduler list The time scheduler features are one time actions When the start time or end time is reached the system writes the value to device just one time not repeated Operator turns OFF Start time End time Action Bit Set ON Start time 08 00 00 a cco End time 08 20 00 OFF SSS 07 50 00 08 00 00 18 10 00 18 20 00 Once the system execute start action it will read Write start address and Write end address altogether after then even you change the value of Write end address the system would not use the new value When the operator changes RTC data for those schedule object with both start time and end time setting the system will check if the time update
166. adding a new object Size of each extended memory is up to 2G word Device type 75 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data in extended memory is stored in SD card USB1 or USB2 in a form of a file The files in extended memory EMO EM9 are entitled as em0 emi em9 emi Users can use RecipeEditor exe to open the file and edit the data in the extended memory Data in extended memory will not be erased when power is cut which means next time when user start HMI again data in extended memory remains just the same before power off This is similar to Recipe data EW RW_A What is different is that users can select where they want to save the data SD card USB1 or USB2 To read data in extended memory from a removed device the content of data will be viewed as 0 if users would like to write data to a removed device the PLC no response message will appear in HMI EB8000 supports hot swapping function for SD card and USB devices Users can insert or remove the device for extended memory without cutting the power With this function users can update or take data in extended memory 5 8 Printer Backup Server Parameters in Printer Backup Server tab are for setting up MT remote printer 76 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual System Parameter Settings x Device Model eneral a yeten bettin g mecurity Font Extended Memory Printer Backup server Use MT Remote FrntenBackup server Note Use
167. ains all of the ways of operating recipe data 17 1 Updating Recipe Data by Using Ethernet or USB cable Click Download in Project Manager Select RW and RW_A and designate the directory of the source files After downloading is completed start up HMI again and the contents of RW and RW_A will be updated When Reset recipe is selected before start downloading EB8000 will set all the data of RW and RW_A to 0 first 380 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Download Eg Firmware l Install series media player drivers _ Startup screen Connector Ethernet USB cable i series only Reboot HMI after download v Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data log 17 2 Updating Recipe Data by Using SD Card or USB Stick Click Build Download Data for CF USB Disk in Project Manager This function is for building the download data and the settings shows as below 381 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Project Manager elect the folder to save download data SOUE Froject A Recipe K W PLEASE INPUT RECIFE FILE NAME Recipe A E W_A PLEASE INPUT RECIFE_A FILE NAME Data log di Select the folder to save download data Insert SD card or USB disk to PC and click Browse to assign the file path and then click Build to set all contexts of the downloaded data Note The path of download data should avoid designating root directory of PC For
168. al HMI Hit 9033 n Read Write Save event data log to AML USE disk CF card set Local HY 04 Redo Arie LB 9035 HMI free space insufficiency alarm when ON Local HMI LB 9035 Read Write af LB 9036 CF free space insufficiency alarm when ON Local HMI LB 9036 Ready rite 39 LB 9037 USB 1 free space insufficiency alarm fwhen ON Local HMI i LB 9037 Read rite 39 LB 9038 USB 2 free space insufficiency alarm when ON Local HMI LB 9038 Read rite 40 LB 9039 status of fle backup activity backup in process if Local HMI LB 9039 Ready rite 41 LB 9040 backlight up fset ON Local HMI LB 9040 Read rite 42 LB 9041 16bit reserved free space size Mega bytes Local HMI LB 9041 Read Write 45 LB 9042 acknowledge all alarm events set ON Local HMI LB 9042 Read Write 44 LB 9043 unacknowledged events exist when ON Local HMI LB 9043 Read rite 45 LB 9044 disable remote control when ON Local HMI i LB 9044 Read rite 4A 1R 9N45 mernory coian carmunication fails fwhen OR oral HMT i R 9045 Readiwrite Users can import MTS00 tag to represent the address 30 4 Project protection Project Key User s project can be restrained and executed on specific HMI only for i series HMI Project key can be set at EB8000 s system parameter settings Please refer to the picture below Project protection G series only Enable Project key 111111 range 0 4294901750 Jf this key is different from HMI key the project won t be e
169. alarm information via EasyPrinter EasyPrinter can only communicate with HMI via Ethernet so this feature is unavailable in MT6000 Series 26 2 Using EasyPrinter as a Backup Server a History Files MT8000 MT Remote Backup Server IP 192 168 1 26 Users can upload historical data such as Data Sampling and Event Log history files onto the MT remote backup server with Backup objects 26 2 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter In Menu gt Options select Settings and the following dialogue box will appear 511 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General PELVEL Hardcopy Port number of the server socket S005 User name biax length 12 characters admin Password Max length 12 characters 111111 Backup Nammge Convention for HMI Folder when writing files Use IP address C Use HMI name fasion HMI name by L W9032 L W9039 Prefix IF_ Ex P_192 166 1 25 Properties Minimize to system tray Detailed message 1 In Server assign Port number of the server socket to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 2 In Naming Convention for HMI Folder select Use IP address and assign IP_ as the Prefix 3 In Properties select Minimize to system tray Click Backup tab at the left side in the dialogue box as follows MTSxxx Remote Printer Serve
170. alue will be added to the value of the word device and the result won t esceed the value Upper limit A thribiute 10 Inc value 0 Upper limit l c Decrement Value JOG Decrease value function When the operation is activated the Dec value will be subtracted from the value of the word device and the result won t go less than the value Bottom limit Attibute met otyle Decrement valve Joa Dec value 1 Bottom limit 10 d Press and hold increment JOG Press and hold increment function When the touch and hold gets longer than the time set in JOG delay the value of the word device will be added by the value set in Inc value at the speed set in JOG speed and the result won t exceed the value in Upper limit 163 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ttibute Set Style Press and hold increment JOG Ine value E Upper limit 10 x JOG speed 0 5 second s e Press and hold increment JOG Press and hold decrement function When the touch and hold gets longer than the time set in JOG delay the value of the word device will be subtracted by the value set in Dec value at the speed set in JOG speed and the result won t go less than the value in Bottom limit Attribute Set Style Press and hold decrement JOG Dec value E Bottom limit 0
171. ame Format Range MB dddd h dddd 0 9999 h 0 f hex dddd dddd 0 9999 When using MemoryMap communication protocol the master and slave have to use the same communication setting The wiring diagram as follow GND RS485 4W 550 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Precaution means decide by PLC or controller The flowchart of communication as following Flowchart 1 Ye S No Receiving STX 02H Sending ACK 06H waiting time is 3sec default Received Data es Y Sending ACK 06H Sending STX 02H waiting time is 3 sec Flowchart 2 Checking NAK 15H Delay 100ms Checking ACK 06H Yes Sending data Receiving ACK 06H Stop sending 551 L gt Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Precaution Flowchart 2 Checking STX 02H Going to flowchart a Sending ACK O6H The waiting time is 3 sec default i Sending ACK 06H Go to flowchart b Yes Flowchart 2 is available for slave but master STX is asking signal for communication ACK is feedback signal NAK is busy signal There are two data formats one is for MB and another is for MW For MB command Off set byte mn Ox Ox Address Low byte Bit Address High byte The operating sign to MB For example MB12 gt 1 16 2 18 is 0x12 and 0x00 Ox00 or 0x01 The data of MB address This is Bit so only h
172. ample the interval value is set as 5 and users would like to read out 1 word from LW3 and 2 words from LW6 respectively Means to read from LW6 to LW7 Since the interval of addresses between LW3 and LW6 is less than 5 these two commands can be combined to one The contents of combination therefore become 5 consecutive words from LW3 read from LW3 LW 7 Note Maximum command combination data size must be less than Max read command size Max The Max data size to be read out from device at one time Unit word read command size words Max The Max data size to be written to device at one time Unit word write command size words After all settings are completed a new device named Local PLC 1 is added to the Device list Device list Mo Location Device type Interface YF Protoc Local HMI Local HMI Local MTsl21T 00 x600 Diable Mii Local FLC 1 MITSUBISHI FAO Local MITSUBISHI FX w COM S600 8 7 1 5 1 2 How to Control a Remote PLC 57 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual z s Ethernet E Ethernet a eo zi 5 Q Z z 13 g PLC Device IPLC Device The so called remote PLC means a PLC connected to a remote HMI To control a remote PLC users need to add this type of device Click New under Device list and the Device Properties dialog appears Users need to set all the required properties correctly Here take a remote PLC SIEMEN
173. ample shown below the value of the word device will change periodically in order of 10 9 8 1 0 10 9 8 Attribute Set Style Periodic step down high to low Low limit 0 High limit 10 Dec value Time interval 0 5 second s k Set when window opens When the window containing the object is opened the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device Attribute setatvle Set when window opens met value 5 I Set when window closes When the window containing the object is closed the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device A thibute pet value 5 m Set when backlight on When the backlight is turned from off to on the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device 166 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute wet style Set when backlight On Setvalue 5 2 n Set when backlight off When the backlight is turned from on to off the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device Attribute eet style Set when backlight off met Value 5 13 5 Function Key Overview Function key object is used to change base window pop up window and close window It can also be used to design the keypad buttons Configuration Click the Function Key icon in
174. ampling object will use the sampling data which was sorted in according to dates The system use History control to select the historical records that are created by the same data sampling object The picture below shows the History control setting page History control PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting The system sorts the historical records of sampling data by date the latest file is record O In normal condition it is sampling data today the second latest file is record 1 and so on If the value of designated register in History control is n the trend display object will display data record n Here is an example to explain usage of History control In the above picture the designated register is LW200 if the sampling data available in the files are pressure _20061120 dtl pressure _ 20061123 dtl pressure _2006112 dtI and pressure _20061203 dtI and it is 2006 12 3 today Based on the value of LW200 the sampling data files selected by the trend display object is shown as follows 238 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Value of LW200 The files of the sampling data from the historical record o pressure 20061203 Distance Pixel between data pampress Distance between data samples 8 Pinel Time Pixel nee pieli Select Pixel the Distance can be used to set the distance between two sampling points See the picture below X axis time range Time
175. an object whether or not an object is allowed to be operated will be decided by the state of appointed bit address or called Enable address Enable address must be in the form of Bit address The content of the address is set in the following 126 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual dialog Interlock Use interlock function Hide when disabled C Grayed label when disabled Enable when Bit is ON Enable when Bit is OFF PLL name Lacal HMI ww Setting Fox example suppose Use interlock function is checked for an object and the Enable bit address is set to LBO The object can be operated only when the state of LBO is ON The Interlock feature also provides the following settings Use interlock function Enable disable the interlock function Hide when disabled When the state of Bit address of the object is OFF and Use interlock function is ticked hide the object Grayed label when disabled When the state of Bit address of the object is OFF and Use interlock function is ticked the label of the object will be grayed normal User This function is used to set the security class of an object Only when restriction users permitted security class meets the object s can it be operated When Object class is selected as None any user with any security class can operate this object The following settings are also provided in the function Disable protection permanently a
176. ard Hew Set Bit Object General Security Shane Label b i Sd Write address PLZ name i Local HMI wt Setting address s me Write after button is released A thibute 143 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 12 3 Steps to Use Fixed Keypad Users can also place a fixed keypad in the window instead of popup keyboard or direct window The keyboard can t be moved or canceled this way Step 1 Create a Numeric Input object and don t select Use a popup keypad 144 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Hamer Input Object Ea General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font _ Input order Enable Eeyboard Hint If the keyboard isan USB keyboard on indivectidivect window or on the same window please don t check Use a popup keypad Step 2 Design a keyboard with function keys and place them in the screen ASCIVOUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Clear Es ASCII UNICODE Step 3 When pressing numeric input object users can input value with function keys directly Baskspace 145 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 12 4 Creating UNICODE Keyboard To create UNICODE keyboard is in the same way as numeric keyboard all with function keys The settings are as below ASCILVUNICODE mode Enter O Backspace O Clear O Es ASCI UNIC
177. are set true the system will view System tag to be true and User defined tag to be false If Device type is set as User defined tag please set System tag to be false 2 The format of Color is R G B the values of R G and B should be integer from 0 to 255 3 Click Excel icon to open EventLogExample xls 92 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual B Import from Excel to Event log Click Import excel button to import Excel file to Event log Alarm Event Log Category All 0 w ja Category Condition Read address Motification address Enable back light when alarn occurs History files Save to HMI memory L Save to CF card Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 Preservation limit Days of preservation cay ts Print Sequence no 7 Event trigger time O HH MM SS HH O DD HH MM e Event trigger date O MMDD YY DDMA YY ODDMM YY OY MM Do Insert J Delete Settings Pate Exar a Caution 1 When user defined tag is set true in Excel the system will compare this device type with the user defined tag in system If no suitable tag can be found the system will set the user defined tag in event log to be false Before importing library label library and sound library please make sure library names exist in the system otherwise the system will simply use the file name of the imported excel file 93 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8
178. are three formats of time tag 1 HH MM SS 2 HH MM 3 DD HH MM The font tab sets the font size and italic attribute The font of event message is set with the event log object 292 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 23 Data Transfer Trigger based Overview Data Transfer Trigger based object can transfer values from the source registers to the destination registers The data transfer operation can be activated by pressing the object or setting a trigger bit Configuration Click Data Transfer Trigger based object icon on the toolbar Data Transfer Trigger based object dialogue box will show up set each item in the General tab press OK button a new Trigger Data Transfer object will be created See the picturea below Data Transfer Tre eer based 295 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Data Transfer Trgprer based Object General Security Shape Label Dessin O OSOS source adress PL name Lael HMI Setting Destination address PLE name Local HMI w Setting A thibute No of word Mode External trigger Trigger mode ON OFF Touch tigger Trigger address iS paertel rpesesiy PLE name Local HMI J ZERREN a vio Cancel Setting Description Source Set source address of data transfer address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of Source address Users can also set a
179. as CSV Import CSV File In Menu gt File select Import CSV File and choose a CSV file to open After editing users can save it as a recipe or EMI file so that it can be downloaded to MT8000 6000 series 494 1 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 25 EasyConverter This application program is utilized when the history record of data sampling dtl or event log evt is uploaded to PC which can be transferred to Excel csv 25 1 Introduction In Project Manager clicking the EasyConverter will pop up the application program E FasyConyverter Ele Edt View Ophons Help amp h eB There are four functions as follows 1 Export to Excel 2 Scaling function 3 Multi File Conversion 4 Command line 25 2 Setting of EasyConverter 495 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 25 2 1 How to Export to Excel When open the file it will pop up setting dialog as follow Choose Your Time Format Eg Display Millizeconds Mo millisecond information O Separated by a COMMA sign Separated by a DOT sign Parenthesized ao HH MM S5 Don t ask me again There are four options of time format can be selected No millisecond information Ex HH Mh 55 If checking Don t ask me again the pop up window will not appear next time If you need to modify the time format please go to Options Time Format to call up the setting dialog After setting cl
180. as O or 1 0x10 gt 0x03 Stop sign 6e o checksum xor from 0 byte to fifth byte For MW command Offset byte ox01 The operating sign to MW Ox Ox Address Low byte Bit Address High byte If there is a 0x10 include in address and insert a 552 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Sending byte The byte has to be even duo to operating for word If byte is 0x10 to insert a 0x10 the byte will move to next position The data of initial address for corresponding address for 1 2 byte n is byte of data if data include 0x10 and then insert a 0x10 the sending byte number without change n n 1 and so on Below is an example for observation process of communication If Master has a Ox0a in MW3 According to this protocol master will communicate with slave immediately and slave will instead the Ox0a in MW3 the procedure as following Master sending ST X 0x02h Slave receive STX 0x02h from master and sending a ACK Ox06h to master Master received ACK Ox06h from slave Master sending 0x01 0x03 0x00 0x02 0x0a 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x19 as below table offset oyte 0x01 The operating sign for MW OO 1 0x03 Address Low byte Bit Address High byte 3 0x02 Sending byte The byte has to be even duo to 4 5 Ox0a MW3 s content is O0x0a gt 0x00 Fg men 6 7 0x10 gt End sign Tes S 0x19 checksum gt 0x01 0x03 0x00 0x02 0x0a 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x 19 Slave received data from master and the
181. asyBuilder8000 User s Manual Project name C Documents and Settings Nicolas A MTP1 mtp ZOB file name C Documents and Settings Nicolas am MTFP i xob OB password used in decompiler Decompilation is prohibited Select the lanquages used on the HMI Language 1 Language 2 Language 3 lanquage 4 C Language 5 C Language 6 C Language 7 Language 8 IC EBSO00 42 40 eng fontiMTPLso ttt Arial CEBSOOO YS 40 engi font MTP L ttt Times New Roman O erroris O warningts Object size 36544 bytes Font size 314444 bytes Picture size 792988 bytes Shape size 878 bytes Sound size 36474 bytes Macro size 14 bytes Total size 1184944 bytes 1 13M Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects Compile Build font files Users are allowed to select the languages needed for the project by clicking Language 1 to 8 3 3 Off line and On line Simulation There are two types of simulations On line simulation amp Off line simulation While using Off line simulation users don t need to connect PLC with PC but still see how PLC is operated via a virtual device On the contrary On line simulation is executed by connecting PC with PLC and accurately set the communication parameters Note When doing On line simulation on PC if the target is a local PLC i e the PLC directly connected to PC there is a 10 minutes simulation limit 30
182. asyBuilder8000 User s Manual iwa Gateways o Ro Ro Ro Ethernet IPO LW 9129 The IP address format is IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 wao fememeai SSR awaa fehemet SSSR wsz fehemet SSR iwe0133 Ethemetpotno R R R tworas macadres R Ro RO tweets macadres o Ro ROO iwair macadres Ro Ro RO e ae ae meaane i R Ja 22 3 States of Data Input Remote Address Description HMI i Control Maximum value that is allowed to input LW 9002 l to the current data input object LW 9003 l l The data format is 32 bit float Minimum value that is allowed to input to LW 9004 l the current data input object LW 9005 l The data format is 32 bit float Data stream input from the keypad LW 9150 saved in the ASCII format and the length LW 9181 of data is 32 words Reserved for the use of the Caps Lock LW 9540 key on the keypad 22 4 Recipe Data Remote Address Description HMI Control LB 9010 Set ON when recipe data is in download CO Ro 476 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Set ON when recipe data is in upload LB 9011 operation Set ON when recipe data is in either LB 9012 download or upload operation If it is set ON all recipe data will be LB 9028 cleared set to 0 The MT8000 will save recipe data RW and RWA on the flash memory every 1 LB 9029 minute If it is set ON recipe data will be compulsorily saved on the flash memory 22 5 Task Button and Fast Selection Window Descr
183. ata a Local HMI LB 2 1 set the states of LBO LB29 SetData b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 set the value of LW2 SetData c Local HMI LW 2 1 set the values of LWO LW49 427 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual SetData d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 set the values of LW6 LW7 note that the type of e is int SetData e Local HMI LW 6 1 set the values of LWO LW19 10 integers are equal to 20 words since each integer value occupies 2 words setData f 0 Local HMI LW O 10 end macro command SetDataEx SetDataEx send_data start device_name device_type address_offset data_count or SetDataEx send_data device_name device_ type address_offset 1 Description Send data to the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of send_ data device_name device_type address offset and data_count are the same as SetData macro_command main int i bool a true bool b 30 short c false short d 50 inte 5 int f 10 for i 0 to 29 b i true next fori 0 to 49 dli 1 2 428 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual next i fori 0to9 f fi i 3 next i set the state of LB2 SetDataEx a Local HMI LB 2 1 setthe states of LBO LB29 SetDataEx b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 set the value of LW2 SetDataEx c Local HMI LW 2
184. ata sampling definition Settings Modify a data sampling definition 8 2 Create a New Data Sampling Click New and the Data Sampling Object setting dialog appears as below 102 Data Sampling Object Description PLO name Local HMI Sampling mode Clear address Time based C Trigger based Enable Sampling time interval p second s PLC name Address Read address Hold address PLE name Local HMI 4 Setting Enable Address Li a PLE name Lo Setting Address E Data Record Max data records 1000 Auto stop History Files Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 Folder name Preservation limit Days of preservation 7 day s Sampling mode EB8000 provides two methods of data sampling Time based and Trigger based lf Time based mode is selected EB8000 samples the data in a fixed frequency Users have to set the sampling time interval marnpling mode Tirre based I Thiererbased angling time ine lf Trigger based mode is selected users can use the status of specific address to trigger the data sampling Sampling mode D Time based O Trigger based Mode OFF 0OMN v PLL name Local HMI wt Setting Mode Conditions to trigger the data sampling OFF ON This will trigger data sampling when the status of assigned address changes from OFF to ON 103 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ON
185. bel from Label Library when text is needed 15 1 Introduction The system in operation will display the corresponding text to the language in use according to the settings EB8000 supports 8 different languages simultaneously Click Label Library Manager and the dialogue appears as below jajag Label Tag Library Save Label File Load Label File Export EXCEL File Import EXCEL File D tion Indicates the current state each Label has maximum of 256 states state no O 255 The State no is determined by Language no selected If user use 8 languages 256 8 32 370 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual gt statesO if user use 4 languages 256 4 64 states News Addanewlabeltag O OOOO O O Settings Modify me content oflabe Paste Paste the copied language tet Export EXCEL File Export the current label tag library in csv or xls file format This Reon OCT Etone neteup UGODE n r Import EXCEL File Import a label tag library csv or xls file format to the current _ _ _ project This function does not support UNICODE 15 2 Settings of Label Library s Font In Label Tag Library users can see the existing tag and the languages this tag contains Different fonts can be selected for different languages Label Taz Library ES Label Font Font A Comment Language 1 Antigve Olive Compact w English Language 2 Book Antiqua Bold y Chinese Language 3 Century Gothic Bold
186. bit FLAG 0O indicates the status of data reading When reading data is complete the FLAG O s status will be changed from OFF to ON BARCODE word BARCODE 0 Number of bytes of reading data BARCODE 1 n Designate bar code data save address The following shows the configuration of barcode reader data The data from barcode reader is 9421007480830 The BARCODE 0 and BARCODE 1 n represents number of bytes read from barcode and the data 464 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Address BARCODE 0 BYTES Address BARCODE len BARCODE At present the data of barcode device corresponding address as below Barcode corresponding address 13 bytes decimal The real data in the address is 14 bytes 7 words If the data is odd system will add a byte 0x00 to make it even BARCODE 1 3439HEX BARCODE 0 465 Lob WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 21 Ethernet Communication and Multi HMls Connection By using the Ethernet network the EB8000 provides following methods for data transmission 1 HMI to HMI communication 2 PC to HMI communication 3 Operating the PLC connected to other HMIs There are two ways of the Ethernet communication one way is to use RJ45 straight through cable with the use of a hub hubs and another is to use RJ45 crossover cable In the second way there is no need to use hub s and it is limited to the condition of point to point connection HMI to HMI
187. bject is the value of the word device subtracts Offset Attribute Stwich style JOG State no 5 Cycle Enable 179 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual b JOG When the Multi State Switch object is activated the value of the write address will be subtracted by 1 In the Value display mode if the resulting value is smaller than the value of Offset and Enable in Cyclic is selected the value of the register will change to No of states 1 Offset and shows the state No of states 1 otherwise the value of the word device will remain in Offset and shows the state 0 180 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 8 Slider Overview The slide object can be used to create a slot area that changes the word s value by dragging the pointer Configuration Click the Slide object icon on the toolbar and the dialogue box will appear fill in each items and click OK button a new slide object will be created See the pictures below 181 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Slider Object General Cutline Security Shape Write address PLE name Setting Notification O met ON met OFF Before writing After writing PLC name Local HMI v Setting Cancel Setting Description Write Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address Systme tag Index regist
188. bjects are used to display alarm messages Alarm messages are those events registered in the Event log and meet trigger conditions Alarm bar and Alarm display objects display these alarms in order of priority and triggering time Alarm bar object scroll all alarm messages in one line alarm display object displays alarm messages in multi line and each line represents one alarm message The following pictures show that the alarm message are displayed in alarm display and alarm bar objects Refer to the Event Log chapter for related information Alarm bar object 3112106 13 21 38 Event 2 when LBO ON 13112106 13 21 38 Event 3 when LBTI ON 3112106 13 21 38 Event 0 when LWO 100 3112106 T3 21 38 Event f When LW f gt 10 Alarm display object Configuration Click the Alarm bar icon on the toolbar the Alarm bar dialogue box appears similarly click the Alarm display icon on the toolbar the Alarm display dialogue box appears fill in the setting in the General tab and press the OK button a new object will be created See the pictures below 281 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Alarm Bar Object Alarm Shane Font Include categories thin io fsee dlam Event Log object Srl ped Actaowleee ele Transparent rn Backeround a Format Sort O Time axending Time descending Order amp Characters or Event tigger date
189. button and you can drag down a address list of all available PLC control functions Attribute Type of control S Change window write data to PLOtcurrent base window General PLO control Back light controltwrite back Trigger address Back light control Sound control Device type Screen hardcop a Change window This is used to change base window When the value of Trigger address is written in a valid window number the system will close the current window and open the window designated by the Trigger address The 316 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual new window number will be written to the Trigger address 1 ELC Control Description PLC name Local HMI Attribute Type of control Change window Active only when designated window opened 10 WINDOW_O10 wt Turn on back light Clear data after window changed Trigger address PLL name Setting As an example of the above configuration When writing a valid window number 11 into LWO the system will close the current window and open window 11 then write 11 into LW1 LW0 1 If you use 32 bit device as trigger address and the device type of the trigger address is in word basis then the system will write the window number into Trigger address 2 Below is the list of write address for each different type of data format 16 bit Signed Address 1 32 bit Unsigned Address 2 32 bit Signed Address 2 Note If L
190. cal MTS121T 800x600 Disable Local cal MITSUBISHI FEOwFE2 COM1 9600 E 7 1 Remote IP 192 169 1 SIEMENS S7200 COM1 9600 E 9 1 SlEMENs 87 200 5 1 3 How to Control a Remote HMI i f Desktop Ethernet MOOT LY 4 Ethernet hi OOOCS LY COO0S LW 59 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The so called remote HMI means through network this HMI is controlled by a local HMI ora PC running on line simulation To control a remote HMI users need to add this type of device Click New under Device list and the Device Properties dialog appears Users need to set all the required properties correctly Device Properties Name Remote HMI HMI OFLC Location Remot ae ws i TP 192 168 1 11 Port 8000 Interval of block pack words 5 we Setting Description HMI or PLC This is to confirm whether this device is a HMI or PLC It is HMI in this case Location Users can select Local or Remote Select Remote in this case and set the IP address and Port no of the remote HMI Click Settings of Location to set these the dialogue is shown below The Port no of remote HMI can be seen in Model in System parameters once the mtp file of remote HMI is opened The port no of remote HMI and local HMI must be the same 60 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual IF Address Settings Ethernet IP address
191. capture function PLC name Local HMI w Storage medium OD USE 1 OUSE Record time Before seconds After seconds Control address PLC name Local HMI Setting Address LW av lo Ss 16 bit Unsigned Use Definition For inputting external video image into HMI and play Control it with HMI Function Illustration Control address Use contol function PLC name Local HMI M Address 16 bit Unsigned Suppose Control Address is designated as LW100 A Users can set Control Address 0 to enable stop Video Input function LW100 0 gt Stop Playing LW100 1 gt Input video image in VIP 1 and display it in 353 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual screen LW100 2 gt Input video image in VIP 2 and display it in screen LW100 3 gt Input video image in VIP 1 but don t display it in screen In this way users can still execute Capture image LW100 4 gt Input video image in VIP 2 but don t display it in screen In this way users can still execute Capture image Users can set Control Address 1 to control the displaying of video image LW101 1 gt Pause Continue playing If users change value in Control Address QO the system will keep the new value If users change value in Control Address 1 system will execute the corresponding command first then erase the new value and set it back to 0 If not using Control Function system
192. card device LW 9072 HMI current free space K bytes LW 9074 SD current free space K bytes LW 9076 USB 1 current free space K bytes LW 9078 USB 2 current free space K bytes For checking which device is insufficient in space while this insufficiency occurs the following system address tags can be used LB 9035 HMI free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9036 SD free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9037 USB 1 free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9038 USB 2 free space insufficiency alarm when ON The text shown in window no 5 8 can be adjusted by users to fit what is needed For example text in window no 5 is PLC No Response users can change it to HMI and PLC disconnected This works for other windows as well which makes it easier to read Note 1 A screen can display 16 pop up windows simultaneously in maximum including System Message Window Direct window and Indirect window 2 A window can only be displayed once simultaneously That is to say users cannot use 2 Direct Indirect windows to open the same window in one base window at the same time 3 Windows 0 9 are for system use only while windows 10 1999 are for users to define 82 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 6 2 Create Set and Delete a Window The picture below shows the windows information window tree in EB8000 This window is always shown on left side of the editing zone There are 2 way
193. ce into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable source must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float source result CUBERT 27 result result is 3 0 source 27 0 SQRT source result result is 3 0 end macro command POW source1 source2 result Description Calculate source1 raised to the power of source2 source1 and source2 can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable source1 and source2 must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float y result y 0 5 POW 25 y result result 5 end macro_command SIN source result Description Calculate the sine of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro _ command main 401 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual float source result SIN 90 result result is 1 source 30 SIN source result result is 0 5 end macro_command Name COS source result Description Calculate the cosine of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro _ command main float source result COS 90 result result is O source 60 GetData source Local HMI LW O 1 COS source result result is 0 5 end macro_command TAN source result Description Calculate the tangent of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result mu
194. closes it on end e Unselect Use a popup keypad The system does not automatically display keyboard window Users have to complete the input process via following methods a Design a custom keypad and place it in the same window with the input object b Use an external keyboard NOTE When selecting Bit control as Mode the system will automatically unselect Use a popup keypad in Keyboard 190 Yee i W WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The picture below shows the Numeric Format tab included in both of the numeric input object and the numeric display object which is to set the data display format Hew Homeric Input Object General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shane Font Display Data format 16 bit Unsigned w Mask Number of digits Left of decimal Ft 4 Right of decimal Ft scaling option Do conversion Engineering low Engineering high 9999 Limits Direct Dynamit limits FLE name PE HMI w Setting Cancel Setting Description Data format To select the data format of the word device designated by the Read address The selection list is shown as follows Format 16 bit BCD 191 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 32 bit BCD 16 bit Hex 32 bit Hex 16 bit Binary 32 bit Binary 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Signed 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Signed 32 bit Float Mask When the data is displayed
195. color of an alarm display or event display object comes from this setting As illustration below these two events use different colors and font styles 1 14 09 07 15 02 Event 1 when LB1 1 O 14 09 07 15 02 Event 3 when LWI 20 When an event item in an event display object is touched the value is written to the assigned address Please refer to Chapter 13 Objects for information about event display object The warning alarm used when an event is triggered can be selected 99 Address of Watch EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Click Sound Library to choose warning sound and click Play to check the sound User can use the Syntax to embed PLC data in the content of an event log About the syntax usage please refer to below dialog syntax of Watch Function Use the below syntax to embed PLC data in the content of an event log Usage TOW ATCA Display sened decimal integer OWA TCHS Display floating point Sot WA TCH is Display sting Sa A TCA Display unsigned hexadecimal integer using ABCDEF oC A TAF x Display unsigned hexadecimal integer using abcdef where Watch no range 1 4 the number of diguts after the decimal point Tf is 0 can be ignored Examples 1 Fresne WA TCH d 1 2 Temperate is CW ATCHI 2 Temperate is CWA TCHS 2 3 Alarma IF Sh0YATCHIE SOA TCHS OWA TCHS CWA TCHS 4 Counter is CWA TCH Sid 5 Message WWA TCH js Index
196. contain constants variables and operations The statements are put in a specific order to create the desired output A Macro is constructed in the following fashion Global Variable Declaration Optional Sub Function Block Declarations Optional Local Variable Declarations End Sub macro_command main Required Local Variable Declarations Statements end macro_command Required Macro must have one and only one main function which is the execution start point of macro The format is macro_command Function_Name end macro_command Local variables are used within the main macro function or in a defined function block Its value remains valid only within the specific block 384 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Global variables are declared before any function blocks and are valid for all functions in the macro When local variables and global variables have the same name declaration name only the local variables are valid The example below is a simple Macro which includes a variable declaration and a function call macro_command main short pressure 10 local variable declaration setData pressure Allen Bradley DF1 N7 0 1 function calling end macro_command 18 2 Syntax 18 2 1 Constants and Variables 18 2 1 1Constants Constants are fixed values and can be entered directly into statements as Must begin with Ox Ox3b Oxffff 0x237 gt E 9 J ASCII String must be enclosed in
197. ctcssccctecdsccacesonsedctacscs lt dczotsosecetecetscetescatessdekdedcae Sawesoneecctutacnsdezoteouedeare 565 32 4 4 RW Random Write oo ec eecsccscceceecsccscsscsecsccsessceccsccsceeccescesceacsacsccaceacsasscsacassceees 566 32 4 5 RC Read et Ge ramnren ere nenEea rere wv eC 568 32 4 6 WC Write COs cccsscccsscsccsccccsccsscscsscsscsecscsscsecscescssceecscsscesesacsassceacassceaceaceasees 570 2AF ENON C O IO eE cee desc cnn E R ancients Geeekcees E E setae 571 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 1 EasyBuilder8000 Installation and Startup Guide 1 1 EasyBuilder8000 Installation Software Download EasyBuilder8000 configuration software from EasyBuilder8000 CD or visiting Weintek Labs Inc s website at http Awww weintek com to obtain all software versions available including Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese English Italian Korean Spanish and French version and latest upgraded files Hardware Requirements Recommended CPU INTEL Pentium II or higher Memory 64MB or higher Hard Disk 2 5GB or higher Disc space available at least 10MB CD ROM 4X or higher Display 256 color SVGA with 800 x 600 resolution or greater Keyboard and Mouse Ethernet for project downloading uploading RS 232 COM At least one available RS 232 serial port required for on line simulation Printer Operating System Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows XP Windows Vista 1 2 Steps to Install EasyBuilder8000 1 Insta
198. d As illustrated below a new item 200 Keyboard will be added to Keyboard in General tab in System Parameter Settings oy stem Parameter Sethn ys E Font Extended Memo Printen Backup server Device Model General pystermn petting PECUIITY Fast selection button Ate Position C Hide button when HMI starts SCIEEN WEI Back leht saver None w minute is pcreen Swer None se minute ts Options Starup window no 10 WINDOW O10 yt Common window Above base window We Object lavout Keyboard caret color RW _A enabled Event Use L W94 50 9455 as time tage of event loge BCD Ww Bsta no tevens 0 Eeyboard 55 Keypad 6 Integer Add 56 Keypad 7 HEX 57 Eeypad amp Floating 60 ASCII Middle 61 AS I small 200 keyboard After a Keypad object is created when open the Numeric Input or ASCII Input object 200 Keyboard can be found in Keyboard Data Entry tab as shown below Popup Position is used to decide the display position of the Keypad in screen 140 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual EB8000 divides the screen into 9 areas Eeyboard Use a popup keypad Window no 200 keyboard Ss Popup position 0O00 relative to HMI areen oO O O O Hint f the keyboard isan USB keyboard on mdivectidivect window or on the same window please d
199. d user can designate more than one day Set the end time and day When Enable termination action is selected the end time can be specified The day settings can only be set when Setting on individual day is enabled 336 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual E Time Set tab when Address is selected If address mode is selected the system retrieves the start end time and day from word devices Therefore users can set and change scheduled time in operation scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Constant Time setting address PLL name Lacal HMI wt Setting Conte J rotate Action mode ptart time daw staat tme hour tart time Grunts tart time fecond End time idaw End time hourt End time iminutet End time second Cancel User designates the Time setting address as the top address used to store time settings data The 11 word devices are automatically allotted Normally the format of the above word devices is 16 unsigned integer If a 32 bit word device is chosen only 0 15 bits are effective and users should zero the 16 31 bits a Control Time setting address 0 337 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The layout of the Control word is shown below Users set the time acquisition request bit ON 0 gt 1 to make the system reads the Action mode Start time and End time and uses them as the new scheduled time 15 S
200. d Save to File Users can use either way or both ways Since EasyPrinter is running on the MS Windows system it supports most of the available printers on the market Multiple MT8000 HMIs can share one physical printer via EasyPrinter Users do not have to prepare printers for each MT8000 HMI Additionally EasyPrinter can also be a backup server Users can use backup objects on MT8000 HMIs to copy history files such as Data Sampling s and Event Log s histories onto a remote PC via Ethernet Please see the following illustration a CSV Files MT8000 MT Remote dtl Backup Server evt rep 507 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 26 1 Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Server screen jf Hardcopy Ethernet MT8000 a ma MT Remote Print Out Printer Server IP 192 168 1 26 Users can make screen hardcopies with a Function Key object The hardcopies will be transferred to the MT Remote Printer Server via Ethernet and then printed out 26 1 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter In Menu gt Options select Settings and the following dialogue box will appear MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings DerVveL Hardcopy Port number of the server socket S005 paca User name Mec length 12 characters admin Password Max leneth 12 characters 111111 Hamine Convention for HMI Folder when writing files Use IP address Use HMI name fasion HMI name by LW O022 L W90
201. d delay ms Data bits Bit 4 Send ACK delay ms 0 Parity in E Parameter 1 0 E Parameter 2 Parameter 3 oystem Parameter Settings Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device darete Sette Device list Mame Location Device type Interface TF Protocol Local HMI Local MTausoTMTsuS6T Disable Mh Local Server MODBUS server Local MODBUS server LOM M600 E 8 1 Redes 2 In the setting page of each object there is a MODBUS RTU in the PLC name selection list you can then select appropriate device type and address Read address PLL name MODBUS RTU Ww Setting 460 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The internal memory of MT8000 is mapping to the MODBUS address as below reading writing Ox 1x 1 9999 to reading writing LB O 9998 reading writing 3x 4x 5x 1 9999 to reading writing LW 0 9998 reading writing 3x 4x 5x 10000 75533 to reading writing RW 0 65533 19 2 How to Change the Station Number of a MODBUS Server in Runtime Change the related reserved registers to modify the station number of a MODBUS ASCII server HMI LW 9541 The station number of a MODBUS ASCII server COM 1 LW 9542 The station number of aMODBUS ASCII server COM 2 LW 9543 The station number of aMODBUS ASCII server COM 3 LW 9544 The station number of aMODBUS ASCII server Ethernet 461 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 20
202. d from system tag such as Disable buzzer LB 9019 Hide system setting bar LB 9020 Hide mouse cursor LB 9018 Disable upload function LB 9033 and Prohibit remote HMI connecting this machine LB 9044 It means that user can also operate these functions via system tag To select a system tag users can tick system tag of the address while adding new object To check all the system tags users can visit Library in EB8000 select Tag then System Startup language after redownloading the project Set the language to use when start up HMI after redownloading the project 69 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Execute init Macro when power on Designate the macro to be executed when HMI power on Auto logout If HMI is left unused for longer than the time set here HMI will logout automatically VNC Server Set the login password for VNC server LW protection RW protection If users check Disable LW RW remote write and set the protect range in LW RW range values of this protected range can t be adjusted via remote HMI Easy Access server Through this technology users can easily access to any MT8000i X connected to the internet and operate them on PC just like holding touch screen in hand Unlike most server used in HMI Easy Access don t need to transmit updated graphic image but real time data only This makes transmission really quick and efficient For further information plea
203. dUplaad Several functions can be selected at this time and some of them need password confirmation as illustrated below Password Download Project Files Download History Files E Clear History before Download Ok Caneel After the password is confirmed directory names of the CF card etc will be displayed in Pick a Directory window as below PC card gt CF Card SD card USB disk gt USB device 49 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Select the download path for project and click OK for downloading Note Users have to create download data from Build Download Data for CF USB Disk in Project Manager Generally Project Manager divides downloaded files into two directories MT8000 Project storage History When users download the history data this directory will be created An example which shows the directory of target file is shown below Select the folder to save CF USB disk data edownload Corme The structure of saved data is as the diagram below ec download mtBO0O0 history 50 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Users have to select the top layer of the directory of the target file when downloading In other words take the structure above as an example download must be selected instead of choosing mt8000 or history Take the illustration below as another example If USB disk only stores mt8000 directory but don t include his
204. ddress 7 Video SD Play video files in SD card file store USB1 Play video files in USB1 location USB2 Play video files in USB2 306 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Folder name The name of the folder storing video files Users must put video files in a folder e g example instead of root directory 1 Folder name couldn t be empty 2 Folder name couldn t include A lt gt Auto repeat When finish playing a video file the system will automatically play next video Attribute e g video 1 gt video 2 gt gt video n gt video 1 Background Select the background color of the object Normally the format of the above registers is 16 unsigned integer If a 32 bit word device is chosen as the control address only 0 15 bits are effective Users should zero the 16 31 bits Control command a Play index file Command 1 Parameter 1 file index Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 The files are sorted with file name in ascending order the file index 0 is for to the first file and son on 2 If it is unable to scan file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat it will automatically play the next file after finish b Play previous file Command 2 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 If the file index is previously 0 it will re play the same video from the start 2 If it
205. ddress in General tab while adding a new object Destination Set the destination address of data transfer address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of Destination address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 294 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute No of words The number of words to be transferred from source to destination Set the trigger mode of data transfer Mode a Touch trigger Press the object to activate data transfer operation b External trigger Register a bit device to trigger the data transfer operation ON OFF Bit device change from ON to OFF to activate data transfer operation OFF ON Bit device change from OFF to ON to activate data transfer operation ON OFF Bit device change state to activate data transfer operation A thibute No of won Mode Extermal tigger Ww Trigger mode OH OFF ut Trigger address 295 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 24 Backup Overview The backup function can store the recipe data RW RW_A event log and sampling data to USB device or Remote backup server The LB 9039 represents the backup status when backup operation is in progress the status of LB 9039 is ON Configuration Click Backup Object icon on the toolbar the Backup Object dialogue box will show up See the pictures be
206. del Generel System Setting Security Device list Device pe Interface WF Proto MT6070iH MTSOTO Disable Nid Mame Location Local HMI Local Remote HMI Remote IP 192 166 1 MTE Local HMI 467 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Device Properties Mame HMI B HMI OPLE Location Settings IP 192 168 1 2 Port 8000 IF Address Settings IPaddress 192 168 1 2 Port no S000 Step 3 Select HMI B for PLC name on the Set Bit Object s Attributes menu and now HMI A can operate the content of the LB of HMI B Hew Set Bit Object General keeno shape Label Write address PLL name HMI E Ww Setting Write after button is released A thaibute 468 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 21 2 PC to HMI Communication Ethernet DO0oF L Desktop By using the simulator Function of the EB8000 PC can catch HMI s data through the Ethernet network and save the data as files on computer PC can master HMI by operating the system reserved register LB and LW of HMI On the contrary HMI can also directly control PC s operation for example asking PC save data from HMI or PLC The number of HMIs mastered by PC is unlimited Suppose that PC is going to communicate with two HMIs HMI A and HMI B the procedure for setting PC s MTP projects is as follows Step 1 Set the
207. dering the PC another HMI to add it as a new HMI device to the MTP projects of HMI A or HMI B and set the IP address pointing to the PC 21 3 Operate the PLC Connected with other HMls Desktop T OR Es PLC Device Through the Ethernet network PC and HMI can also operate PLC that is connected to other HMI for example suppose that there is a Mitsubishi PLC connected to HMI B s COM 1 when PC or HMI A wants to read data of the PLC the procedure for setting PC or HMI A s MTP projects is as follows Step 1 Set the IP address of HMI B suppose the IP address of HMI B is set for 192 168 1 2 Step 2 Running the EB8000 and select the Device Table tab on the System Parameter Settings menu then add a PLC device defined as Mitsubishi FXOn_FX2 in the example below and set the correct communication parameters 471 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Device Properties PLC on HMI B OHMI PLC Location Remote s Settings IF 192 168 1 2 Port 8000 PLC type MITSUBISHI FXOn Fx2 V1 0 MITSUBISHI FAON so PLC IF RS 485 ayy we PLE default station no COM Settings Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read command size words Max write command size words Step 3 In the case of using the set bit object to operate the Mitsubishi PLC connected to HMI B just need to select PLC on HMI B for PLC name on the
208. dow will be closed 204 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual NOTE Only 16 windows maximum can be displayed simultaneously at run time and do not use this function to open the window when the same window has been opened by function key or direct window 205 me WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 12 Direct Window Overview Direct window object is to define a popup window location position size a bit device and a predefined valid window number When the content of the bit device is set ON OFF the window will be popup in the predefined location The popup window will be closed when the content of the bit device is reset The system will only take action when the content of bit device is changed OFF ON ON OFF The difference between the Direct window and the Indirect window is that the direct window object sets the popup window in configuration When system is in operation users can use the state of the designated register to control popup or close the window Configuration Click the Direct Window icon on the toolbar and the New Direct Window Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new Direct Window Object will be created See the pictures below 5 Hh Direct Window Pa ee 206 w W WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Darect Window Object eneral beia o O SOS Read address PL name Poca H
209. dress i PLC name MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 Address temperature wio O 16 bit Unsigned Address RR ERIE ERNE B ILE RDO BERD BSL EDEL BE BBLS BREE DDE BELL DEE BIEL DEE BILE BIE DRED IEE ISEB SEL DEE DIL BLEDEL DEEL DIOL DEE BEE DEERE TE TI S T PLC roeirrve pE TSUBISHI Fs0ni Fra eel eter oreo ere v Device type temperature vi Address rv100 User defined tag Address Format DDD range 0 255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned 378 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual There are some items in Device type for selecting Device type Temperatire Test Tag When the settings are completed the window tree will show the name of the Address Tag used for the object as below evare mode mM Se i tt lans WL Temperature MITSUBISHI FEOn T 100 12 WINDOW O12 13 379 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 17 Transferring Recipe Data Recipe Data are stored in flash memory When system start up both the RW and RW_A memory will be restored from the recipe data in flash memory the way of reading and writing Recipe Data is the same as operating the normal Word Register The size of Recipe Data in both RW and RW_A are 64k words User can update Recipe Data by using SD Card USB cable or Ethernet It is possible to upload Recipe Data to the designated address of PC furthermore it can save the PLC s data in recipe memory The following expl
210. dress LW5 n 5 The following setting is for 32 bit float data format and dynamic limits 272 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address Separated address for E and Y data PLC name i Setting Address L w 32 bit Float X low limit reads value from reading address LW100 n 0 X high limit reads value from reading address LW102 n 2 Y low limit reads value from reading address LW104 n 4 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW106 n 6 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW108 n 8 Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW110 n 10 NOTE There are four different type of selection to designate memory location for high low limits and XY data Please refer to the following settings 273 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data 0 Liata 0 hin Min Data 1 Data 1 Wax Wax Data 2 Data 2 Data Datad Data 3 Data 3 Data 1 Data 1 Data 2 LDiata x Data od AMIN Y Dataod A Max x Data 1 Y Min Y Data 1 Y Max Data xData Y Data Y Data Dataa Data 1 Data 3 Y Data 1 Data lf dynamic limit is checked you may change the high and low limits to realize zoom in and zoom out function Please refer trend display object s dynamic limit In the following example the dynamic limit is selected where XL X low limit XH X high limit YL Y low limit YH Y high limit and XY XY1 XY2 are three XY data Now we change the high limit of X and Y resp
211. e At start time turn baamnakaa annaan anastanut the specific bit At end time turn OFF the bit Example Start time 09 00 00 End time 17 00 00 Start time End time ON l OFF Jo o 09 00 00 12 00 00 17 00 00 At start time the specific Write start value is written to the action address At end time Write end value is written to the action address Example Device address LW100 Start time 09 00 00 End time 12 00 00 Write start value 10 Write end value 0 At start time turn OFF the specific bit At end time turn ON the bit Example Start time 09 00 00 End time 17 00 00 Start time End time ON 3 3 3 OFF __ 09 00 00 12 00 00 17 00 00 330 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ee ee E E 09 00 00 12 00 00 Action address Specify the address where the scheduler performs actions on 331 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description Power ON Select the action to perform when power is turned on start end e Enable action If the MT8000 power is turned ON within the scheduler range the start action is performed If the MT8000 power is turned ON outside of the scheduled range the termination action is performed Inside the scheduled range Start time Power ON End time Start action Termination action Outside the scheduled range Power ON Start time End time Termination action Start action Termination action Disable If power is tur
212. e Reset event log Reset data log Reboot HMI after download e Automatically using current settings to download after compiling Setting Description O HMI IP Assign the IP address of HMI Firmware Check Firmware to update all of the kernel programs of HMI 32 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Note It is necessary when downloading file to HMI the first time Reset recipe Checking these the selected files will be Reset event log erased before downloading Reset data log Reboot HMI after download Checking this HMI will reboot after finishing downloading Automatically using current If this is checked system will download project settings to download after to HMI according to last settings compiling Click Download to start downloading the project Another way to download project to HMI is to set a HMI name Before using this function please input the HMI Name in the System settings window in HMI as shown below System settings Network Time Date Securit HMI name setting hg After setting the HMI Name please click Name in the Download window on PC as below 33 Lips WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Download Ethernet OUSB cable i series only Password 1 92 168 1 103 Test Search all
213. e ksieni anian 390 16 3 3 Logical Statement S esunsun i aE EEEE E EAE EE E 391 18 3 4 Reiterative Statements 0 cesessssssssssssssscsssssssessssessssssseesssssssessseesesesssssesesesesssssseees 392 Lo Fy TULF ELON EIO K ee EN R EENE E E EA A E eee 397 16 5 Builda F nCtHONM BIOCK siccae a SEa T Aaa eee 400 18 5 1 Mathematical FUNCTIONS esssssesessesesessssssesessssesessesssessssssesesscsessseesssssessessensesses 400 Me eZ Daa Tran Orna ON ea O 406 169 0 Dar MaA O eea A E AA N E E E 411 185 4 Bit TransiormatiOD ssrin EE EEE eei 414 ISe sO NMP LUPIN LO ra a EEE AEE E A EE 416 DaO MCC an OMI S an E E E S 432 18 6 How to Create and Execute a MaCrO sse sssesssesssossssessesssesssessseesssssssenssensssnseesseesserssersss 433 SEs t HOW tO Croate a MaC Oseere enre E i 433 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual GO Eo cute d MiC Oserin E A E E E E 438 18 7 Some Notes about Using the Macro wu ecesesssessssesssessssessssssesessssesesesesseseseeseseeeseeseseeeees 438 18 8 Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device wo eeessessesesesseseessssseseesssesssesesseseeteseseeseeees 439 15 9 Compiler Error WSS SAC sisses Aaea eaa Saiesan 445 0S MOR Eae Aea r E ao E E E EE T E E 451 Chapter 19 How to Set HMI as a MODBUS Serve eesescssssesssesesssesesesesessssescseseseesssescesseeeesens 456 19 1 How to Set HMI as MODBUS Device uu ccsessessssseseseeseseseetsecsesesssnesseseseeeenseeseseseeseess 456 19 1 1 Creating a MODBUS Sef
214. e name constant where define the type of array name Example int B 10 where define a variable B as a one dimensional array of size 10 18 3 2 Assignment Statement Assignment statements use the assignment operator to move data from the expression on the right side of the operator to the variable on the left side An expression is the combination of variables constants and operators to yield a value 390 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Variable Expression Example A 2 where a variable A is assigned to 2 18 3 3 Logical Statements Logical statements perform actions depending on the condition of a Boolean expression The syntax is as follows Single Line Format if lt Condition gt then Statements else Statements end if Example if a 2 then b 1 else b 2 end if Block Format If lt Condition gt then Statements else if lt Condition n gt then Statements else Statements end if 391 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Example if a 2 then b 1 else if a b 2 else b 3 end if Syntax description if Must be used to begin the statement lt Condition gt Required This is the controlling statement It is FALSE when the lt Condition gt evaluates to 0 and TRUE when it evaluates to non zero Must precede the statements to execute if the lt Condition gt evaluates to rer ure seers eos ine Sater eee It is optional in block format but necessary in si
215. e omen ere nen Oe ere EEA eer vr eS 495 ZIA ANNI OC CEN OM eR E A 495 DBZ SCCM OM easy OV SS rca caters ces cas fates ces testcase E E E E 495 De de VOW EO EX OTE UO CON nE E ie atacand eee 496 25 2 2 HOW to Use Scaling FUMCH OM 226 5cccetcecctsencucsistececdseesivsnesetestexssecohsoene teatestcucsidees 498 25 2 3 How to Use Mullti File Conversion ou ceessesssssesessssesesesssesssssssesesssesesseseseseseees 500 Pa mnie 10 ses c1 4d E a e ee ee eet eee EA nner tte E ee 502 25 3 1 For Combination and Enable Setting File eecesecseseseseseeesseseeeeeeees 504 ZS CO MVM NE NET o pects E ENA seen A E O A A eee dees 506 cnapter 2o ASP WA E ecen R 507 26 1 Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Serven ou cessssssssssssesssssssssssessesssssssessssesssessseesesessssseseeeees 508 26 1 1 Setup Procedure IN EasyPrinter eeesesssseseseesesesesesesessssesesesseseseseseseeessesseeeeeseees 508 26 1 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBullder8000 oe esessesssesesesesessesssesseseeesesseseeeseeseeee 509 26 2 Using EasyPrinter as a Backup S rVel niu eesssssessssssessssssssessessseseesssesesssssssscsessseesessseseeass 511 26 2 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter oiscxsce sniccccsccsszsecssescusonteeisecamecoeectatannserssetennceesieasenies 511 26 2 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder8000 o ee sesesesesseseessessesesesseseeesessesseeseseeee 513 26 3 EasyPrinter Operation Guide ss casccecescesessesscenceseesexstecnesisteueeisettesteseaseenedeuenerndeerentoee
216. eads value from reading address LW104 X data 3 reads value from reading address LW105 and so on Ydata Y low limit reads value from reading address LW200 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW201 Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW202 Y data 1 reads value from reading address LW203 Y data 2 reads value from reading address LW204 Y data 3 reads value from reading address LW205 and so on 2 1 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Limits The above settings are based on dynamic limits you can also have dynamic limits disable and set the fix high and low limits Limits Low Hish 32767 Y ans Low Hish 32767 he high and low limits is used as scale to calculate the percentage of X and Y axis i e X or Y X or Y reading value low limit high limit low limit Based on your settings the memory allocation for limit and XY data will be as follows The following setting is for 16 bit signed data format and dynamic limits Read address FPLC name Local HMI k Separated address for E and Y data PLC name Address w fo e 16 bit Signed X low limit reads value from reading address LWO n 0 X high limit reads value from reading address LW1 n 1 Y low limit reads value from reading address LW2 n 2 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW3 n 3 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW4 n 4 Y data 0 reads value from reading ad
217. eated See the pictures below 151 L ws WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Word Lamp Object General Security Shape Label wsp O Mode ta Read address PL name Local HMI e Setting Cancel Setting Description Mode Word lamp object offers the following three modes for selection Offset a Value Calculate result of word value to subtract Offset and display its corresponding shape 152 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Word Lamp Object General Security Shape Label Read address PLC name Local HMI v Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned Attribute In the above setting if the value of LW200 is 5 the shape of state 2 is displayed See the picture below E L W200 LW200 Offset 3 b LSB Transfer the read address value to binary the lowest 8 bits other than value 0 decides the state Please refer to the following table 153 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Read address Binary value Displayed state aa e 0000 All bits are 0 display the shape of ee eee 1 0001 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit a a stance 0010 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit Fee eerste ete 3 0011 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit Pe eregtr te stents 4 0100 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit ee a ee n 0111 The lowest bit other than O is bit P ee ee 1000 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit P
218. ect the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of the word devices that control the display of object s state and moving distance Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object The table below shows the address to control object s state and moving distance in each different data format 211 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data format Address to control Address to Address to object state control Moving control Moving Distance on the distance on the X axis Y axis 16 bit format Address 1 Address 2 32 bit format Address 2 Address 4 For example if the object s read address is LW100 and the data format is 16 bit Unsigned LW100 is to control the objects state LW101 is to control the object s moving distance on the X axis and LW102 is to control the object s moving distance on the Y axis The picture below shows that the object s read address is LW100 and initial position is 100 50 Supposed you want the object moved to the position 160 180 and be displayed in the shape of State 2 the value of LW100 must be set to 2 LW101 160 100 60 LW102 180 50 130 100 50 L W100 LWI101 L W102 ee cee e State x Offset V Offset L W100 L W 101 L W102 60 130 State x Offset V Offset 160 180 _nex position state 2 Attribute To select the object s mo
219. ectively and you may observe the effect of zoom in and zoom out 2 4 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 Change Y high limit to 25 for zoom in effect 2 Change Y high limit to 100 for zoom out effect 2 so Oo 100 Se sf fos 275 L WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Display Area tab Hew ZY Plot Object General Display Area Shape Profile color Transparent Lurve Channel Fen property Color i Line Point O E axis projection O Y axis projection Reference line Limit from PLC Highlint 100 Reference line 1 Reference line 2 Reference line 3 Reference line 4 Setting Description Profile Enable Transparent It will not display the background color color Disable Transparent It will display the background color Curve Set the attribute of XY curve color and width for each channel 2 6 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Channel Channel 0 B Fen property Color ME iai o i M There are four different type of XY plot i e Line Point X axis projection and Y axis projection check one of them For Line and Point selection set appropriate point width unit in pixels Maker Point width 5 kd Line Point O E sods projection Y axis projection Line amp Point X axis projection is shown as the following Remarks Please refer to the figure below there is a curve containing 7 points from PO 277
220. ements the lt Counter gt to increments lt Counter gt by lt StepValue gt down decrements lt Counter gt by lt StepValue gt lt EndValue gt Required The test point If the lt Counter gt is greater than this value the macro exists the loop step Optional Specifies that a lt StepValue gt other than one is to be used StepValue Optional The increment decrement step of lt Counter gt It can be omitted when the value is 1 If step lt StepValue gt are omitted the step value defaults to 1 393 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE for next loops may be nested Counter Optional This is used when nesting for next loops 18 3 4 2 while wend Statements The while wend construction is for stepping through an unknown number of iterations A variable is used to test for ending conditions When the condition is TRUE the statements are executed repetitively until the condition becomes FALSE The syntax is as follows while lt Condition gt Statements wend Example while a lt 10 a at 10 wend syntax description while Must be used to begin the statement Required This is the controlling statement When it is TRUE the loop begins execution When it is FALSE the loop terminates return value Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE wend Indicates the end of the while end statements
221. ens 514 2o LADDE INC O e ene ee ce eT ee en es ee ee ene eee ees 515 DA seo ef OTTO O e E E E E EE T E E E 515 PA oye CONVO T BaN FIG ee E E E EE 521 26 4 1 The Default Convert Batch File oc csccssssssesesscsesecsssessesessssesessssesscsssesseeesseeeees 522 DFS CIM ZC TE ay ea E EN 523 26 4 3 The Format of a Convert Batch File escssesessesesesscsessesessssesessestseeseesseseees 524 26 4 4 The Order of Examining Crit rid cccecessesesesesessesssessesssesessesesessssessessssseeeeeeseees 524 CAPE 2 E 110011 9 90 f 10 ene aR E EAE T EE OEE 526 DT Ne PO Oa FIE anena E E E 526 21 2 Modily the Content OF XOD POS dE essare EE 526 Chapter 28 Multi HMIs Intercommunication Master Slave Mode ccesesseeseseeesteeseeeeee 528 28 1 How to Create a Project of Master HMI uu ccsccsssssesessesesecsssessesessssesessestsseeessseeesees 528 28 2 How to Create a Project Of Slave HMI ccc cesscssssessssssesesscseseesssessesessssesessssesseseesseeeees 529 Chapter 29 Pass TnNrough FUNCH ON esiseinas anai ne Ea NEETA 532 PLETEME CMOU eea n E A E I A NS 532 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 29 1 1 How to Change the Virtual Serial Port sessesesesecsssssesesssessseeeeeeeeseees 534 29 1 2 How to Use Ethernet Mode 2 0 cessssssesscsssessesessssssesssessssssssesssssseseesessseseesseeseeseeee 536 Vis Wen EOM POr MOOO eee eee eer eee ar eee ne Cn elated ee EE eer eee e 538 292 L Settings OF COM POE MOQ ssis e EESE 539 22e PVEN Ork MOG
222. ensuring the USB disk in step b will be recognized as USB1 Start Stop playing video 1 Start playing video a Set Parameter 1 to 0 b Set Command to 1 the system will open the video file and start playing c After the system start operation it will reset the Command to 0 303 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual During the period between step b and c don t change the content of Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 it may cause unpredictable result 2 Stop playing video a Set Command to 5 the system will stop playing and close the video file b After the system complete step a it will reset the Command to 0 During the period between step a and b don t change the content of Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 it may cause unpredictable result 304 Yee i i W WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Media player setting guide General tab Hew Media Player Object General Preview Control address Enable PLC name Local HMI A Address System tag Address format DDDDD range 0 10500 Index register Command 0 Status 0 3 Parameter1 D 1 Fibinex D 4 Paremeter2 0 2 Stuttime 0 5 End time 0 6 _ _ Update video playing time Ext device OSD USBl CoUSB2 Folder name Attribute Auto repeat Bako M Setting Description Enable control Enable address a You can use Control addres
223. ent Cancel Setting Description Select the event source format there are Real time and History for selection a Real time Write address When an event is acknowledged the data in Write value will be exported to the designated register The write value is set in event log object as shown in the picture below Refer to the Event Log chapter 286 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual for related information Wrote value for event display Write value b History Control Definition Displays a list of events triggered in multiple days Illustration Take LWO to be the History Control Address as an example the range of data to be displayed will be formed by LWO and LW1 while value in LWO represents the first history data to start with Example As illustrated below for showing it clearer the history data is numbered according to the date they are established No 0 No 1 gt No 2 If the value in LWO is 3 the first data to be displayed will be data No 3 EIEL 20100604 No 4 iKB EYT YEL 20100605 WO G6KB EVIER EL 20100609 To 17KB EVT 43 EIEL 20100609 No 1 AEE EV ds EEL 20100610 No 0 12KB EVIR As for LW1 2 modes can be selected a Number of days History control Address yy we o O 16 bit Unsigned Enable reading multiple histories Number of days paaa The range of History Data to be displayed will start from number in LWO The
224. er Fast selection button Attribute inte SCTE Saver lo oe eT Back light saver None w minute iz DECIBEL SWE None minute fs Option mtactip window ma 10 WINDOW O10 Extra no of events E Common window Above base window w Eeyboard caretcolor M Object layout Nature Eeyboard SU Keypad 1 Integer 51 Keypad 2 Integer 52 Keypad 3 Integer 53 Keypad 4 Integer 54 Keypad 5 Integer 55 Keypad 6 ote ger 56 Keypad 7 HEX 57 Keypad 3 Floating 60 ASCI Middle 61 ASCT Small pimple hine Eeyboar 173 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 6 Toggle Switch Overview Toggle Switch object is a combination of bit lamp object and set bit object The object can be used not only to display the state of a bit device but also to define a touch area when activated the state of the bit device will be set to ON or OFF Configuration Click the Toggle Switch icon on the toolbar and the New Toggle Switch Object dialogue box will appear fill in each item and press OK button a new toggle switch object will be created See the pictures below 1 4 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Togele Switch Object General Security hape Label Description Read address PLC name Setting Address Write address FLL name Loca HMI w Setting Write when button is released Attribute Macro
225. er Bit Reserved 0 fixed E Bit 00 time acquisition request bit 0 no action 1 perform time read NOTE The system would not read start and end time data unless the time acquisition request bit is set ON b Status Time setting address 1 The layout of the Status word is shown below When the system competes the read operation it will turn the time acquisition complete bit ON 0 gt 1 Also if the read time data is incorrect the error notification bit will be turned ON 01 15 02 01 00 Reserved 0 fixed ofo Bit 00 time acquisition complete bit 0 null 1 read operation complete Bit Bit 01 error notification bit 0 no error 1 start or end time format is incorrect NOTE After system reads the time data and turns the time acquisition complete bit ON be sure to turn Control time acquisition request bit OFF Once this bit is turned OFF the system will set both the Status time acquisition complete bit and error notification bit to OFF 338 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual i 6 i A EN ON i i i Time acquisition b request bit OFF oi i bo Li PLCI trig big a gt i 4 ooa 4 i E7 HMI confirnn time HMI confirm time i acquisition request bit is acquisition request bit is Data read 3 lt lt 3 Data read gt 3 HMI read 4 v i i MI turn ON time i gt A ON acquisition completion bith 8 Time acquisition When an error occurs HMI turn ON error
226. er of the word device that system set value to Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area Notification When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device can be set before after the operation is completed There are ON and OFF selection to set the state Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated register before or after write to the word 182 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Slider Object General Outline Security ttibute Direction Resolution Low Hich limit Constant Addes Increment Slider button trpe Transparent Transparent Transparent Setting Description Direction 183 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Resolution The slider will move in every N lines step where N is the resolution For example if N 10 every 10th line will be displayed if N 5 every 5th line will be displayed if N 1 every line will be displayed Low limit amp a Constant High limit The low limit and high limit of the word d
227. es in a XY plot is 16 channels Configuration New object Click the XY plot icon lee and XY Plot Object dialog box appears 267 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew ZY Plot Object General Display Area Shape Direction No of channels Control Address No of data address Read address FL name Local HMI k separated addres for X and Y data H data PL name Setting ddress 16 bit Unsigned Setting Y data PL name Dymamic limits a igh 32767 Cenei Setting Description a Direction There are four selections right left up or down Right Left Right direction Left direction Y origin j K origin 268 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Up Down Wo direction origin l Y origin y i 9 Down direction b No of channel set the no of channels of the XY plot Each channel may conduct the draw operation alone Control PLC name address Select the PLC where the control address coming from Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of Control address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Device type select the device type where the control address coming from Control address Control address is used to control the display of XY curve for each channel 1 Plot XY curve Write 1 to control addres
228. es in each requested device are returned in Hex The checksum is calculated as the lower 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 L 2 In the event of an error the reply is 32 4 4 RW Random Write Request This command writes up to 99 independently addressed 16 bit items to LW memory area of HMI The length of the command is L N 8 8 Where N the number of requested devices The command will be at least 16 bytes long but can be up to 800 bytes long 566 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Byte Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 13 14 17 18 21 STX Statio RW Addr Data Addr Data n 1 Bytes Bytes Byte Byte L 10 L 7 L 6 L 3 L 2 L 1 L Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to read 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 6 9 This is the first address to write data to Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 13 This is the data to write to the address specified by the previous 4 bytes Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 14 L 3 The remaining addresses and data to write to the HMI Each address and data item must be 4 bytes long Byte L 2 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes L 1 L Checksum calculated as the lower 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 L 2 Reply If the command is successful the reply is In the event of an error the reply is 567 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 32 4 5 RC Read Coils Request
229. etting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address Systme tag Index register of the word device that system set value 178 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute to The write address can be the same as or different from the read address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Write when button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is not selected the operation is activated at touch down Select the object s operation mode Switch style There are JOG and JOG for selection When the read address is the same as the write address the minimum value of the word value is Offset state 0 and the maximum value is no of state 1 Offset See the picture below Numeric Display LWO Murti State LWO offset 1 a JOG When the Multi State Switch object is activated the value of the write address will be added by 1 In the Value display mode if the resulting value is equal to or larger than the value of No of States Offset and Enable in Cyclic is selected the value of the write address will return to Offset and show the state 0 otherwise the value of the write address will maintain as No of states 1 Offset and shows the state No of states no 1 NOTE Like the word lamp object the state shown by Multi State Switch o
230. evice is set as constant value i e Input low and Input high b Address The low high limit of the word device is controlled by a designated address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of designated address or users can also set address in Attribute LowHish limit Constant Address PLC name Setting Control address High Limit 16 bit format Address 0 Address 1 32 bit format Address 0 Address 2 Coarse increment If this option is selected the word value will increase decrease one increment value for every touch activation If not the word value will be set the value in accord with the touch activated point Slider button There are four slider button types for selection You also can adjust the type width of moving piece This is used to select slide object frame background and slot s color 184 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Slider button type slot Frame Background 185 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 9 Numeric Input and Numeric Display Overview Both of the Numeric Input object and the Numeric Display object can be used to display the value of the word devices The difference is the numeric input object can be used to input data from the keypad the input value is written to the designated word devices Configuration Click the Numeric Input or Numeric Display ic
231. fier 1 identifier Any variable or function should be declared before use C38 un supported PLC data address The parameter of GetData SetData should be legal PLC address C39 idenifier must be integer char or constant The format of array is Declaration array_name constant constant is the size of the array Usage array_namel integer character or constant Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C40 execution syntax should not exist before variable declaration or constant definition For example macro_command main _ int a b fora 0To2 b 4 a inth k illegal definitions must occur before any statements or expressions next a end macro_command C41 float variables cannot be contained in shift calculation 449 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual C42 function must return a value C43 function should not return a value C44 float variables cannot be contained in calculation C45 PLC address error C46 array size overflow max 4k C47 macro command entry function is not only one C48 macro command entry function must be only one The only one main entrance of macro is macro_command function_name end macro_command C49 an extended addressee s station number must be between 0 and 255 For example SetData bits O PLC 1 LB 300 123 100 _ illegal 300 123 means the station number is 300 but the maximum is 25
232. format 16 bit Binary Mask SB_0 SB_2 are Set Bit objects which are set with different classes but all selected Make invisible while protected i e SB 0 is class A SB_1 is class B and SB _ 2 is class C The settings of SB_0 object User reshacton Object class Chs A Disable protection permanently after initial activation Display warming message if access denied Make invisible while protected The Set Bit object SB_ 3 LB 9050 is for user logout and is set as below Hew Set Bit Object Write address PLC name Local HMI v Setting Address LB 9050 user logout wa 130 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 3 After completing the design and settings of the objects please save compile project and do the off line simulation The illustration below is initial screen of off line simulation Since no password is entered this time object ND 0 LW9222 shows 0000000000000000 which means current user can only use objects with none class Moreover SB_O SB_2 are objects with security levels of class A class C and at the same time Make invisible while protected is selected therefore SB O SB_ 2 objects are hidden by the system Username 1 ese 19 Password QO r bit 15 bto Current status 0000000000000000 LW9222 Logout Step 4 When user enters the password of user 1 111 the display will become Userna
233. fter initial activation Once the permitted security class of the user meets that of the object the system will stop checking the security class when operating this object permanently Which means even if the user is changed this object can still be operated freely 127 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Display warning message if access denied When the user s current security level does meet that of the object a warning dialog appears Window 7 is set as an alert message for authority security Users can design the content of the message Make invisible while protected When a user s security level does not meet that of the object the object will be hidden Each object can be set whether to use the beeper to make a specific sound or not A system register LB9019 is used as the switch of the beeper When state of LB9019 is OFF beeper is enabled If restart HMI the settings of beeper stay the same 10 3 Examples of Security The following illustrates the steps of security feature Step1 First of all create a new project Go to System parameter Security add three users and set different passwords and classes system Parameter Settings Font Extended Memorys Printen Backup Server Device Model General Svetem Setting mecurity elect operatable classes for each user User 1 Enable Password Fa Me Mc Po Me Pir U
234. g data in USB disk 2 Preservation limit After choosing the device to save the Event log users can see the Preservation limit selection This setting determines how many days the data to be preserved For example the preservation time is set two days which means HMI memory will keep the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday Data that is not saved in this period will be deleted automatically to prevent the storage space from running out Preservation limit Days of preservation dawis To enable this setting users have to finish the settings of printer in system parameter settings Print Sequence na Yen nigger Time a i Tad Event tri ti O HH MM SS HH MM O DD HH MM Event trigger date O MADO Y DOMM O DD MMA Y O YY MMOD 91 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 7 1 1 Excel Editing Alarm Event Loz Category 4 There is an Excel icon in the top right corner of the Alarm Event Log dialog for users to edit an Event log through Excel An editing procedure includes Edit in Excel Import from Excel to Event Log and Export to Excel A Edit in Excel EB8000 provides a standardized sample of Excel in C EB8000 EventLogExample xls for users to edit alarm event log The sample includes some dropdown lists for an easier usage Cai n M Caution 1 System tag and User defined tag can not be set true simultaneously If both of them
235. ge e Y axis w scaling The object is for Y axis movement with scale and the formula to calculate the moving distance on the Y axis is the same as the one in X axis w scaling f X axis w reverse scaling This function is the same as X axis w scaling but the moving direction is in reverse g Y axis w reverse scaling This function is the same as Y axis w scaling but the moving direction is in reverse The size of shape in different states can be set individually as shown in the picture below Ratio 1 Ratio 12 Ratio 14 Ratio 16 State 1 State 2M State 3 The object s moving range can be set not only by Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y but also by the designated registers Supposed that the objects moving range is set by the value of the designated register Address then the address of Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y are listed in the following table Data format Min X Max X Min Y Max Y pe hese iea lees foe 214 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 14 Animation Overview The Animation object is used to place an object on the screen at a specified location determined by a predefined path and data in the PLC The state and the absolute location of the shape on the screen depend on current reading value of two continuous PLC registers Typically the first register controls the state of the object and the second register controls the position along the p
236. gle Switch dialog select the Execute Macro option Select the macro to execute The macro will execute one time when the button is activated 18 7 Some Notes about Using the Macro 1 The maximum storage space of local variables in a macro is 4K bytes So the maximum array size of different variable types are as follows chara 4096 bool b 4096 short c 2048 int d 1024 float e 1024 438 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 Amaximum of 256 macros are allowed in an EasyBuilder 8000 project 3 A macro may cause the HMI to lock up Possible causes are A macro contains an infinite loop with no PLC communication The size of an array exceeds the storage space in a macro 4 PLC communication time may cause the macro to execute slower than expected 18 8 Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device When EasyBuilder 8000 does not provide an essential driver to communication with a device Users also can make use of OUTPORT and INPORT to control the device The data sent with OUTPORT and INPORT must follow the device s communication protocol The following example explains how to use these two functions to control a MODBUS RTU device First create a new device in the device table The device type of the new device is set to Free Protocol and named with MODBUS RTU device as follows Device list o Name Location Device type Interface Local HMI _ Loca Local MT8121T 800 x 600 Disable Local PLC 1 MOD
237. gnating root directory of PC For example c also directory name such as f is illegal and should be written as f 18 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 2 1 Steps to Download Project via USB or CF Card 1 Take downloading data to the folder named 123 K 123 in USB stick for example When USB stick project or recipe included is inserted to the HMI a pop up Download Upload dialog will appear after few seconds Please select Download and input Download Password Check Download project files and Download history files in Download Settings dialog and then press OK After that Pick a Directory dialog will appear Please select directory usbdisk device 0 123 and then press OK Project will be automatically updated Note Even if users only download historical files it is still necessary to reboot HMI manually 2 3 Transfer 2 3 1 Download Download source files to HMI through Ethernet or USB cable Press Download and the dialog displays as below 19 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Download M Project ClDocuments and SettingsiNicolasi456 xo0b Rw PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME RWLA PLEASE INPUT RECIPE 1 FILE NAME M Data log PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE NAME Browse J Install series media plaver drivers Startup screen CAlDocuments and Settings WWicolasicheer_ brmp Browse seres only 05S image must be 20090415 of lateri Co
238. gotten users can set DIP Switch 1 to ON and the rest remain OFF then reboot HMI HMI will switch to touch screen calibration mode After calibration the pop up window appears as shown below Users will be inquired if they would like to restore the system password to the default Restore to default password 37 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual When YES is chosen another pop up dialog appears as below The system will ask users to type yes to confirm to restore system password to default Then click OK The default password is 111111 However other passwords including download and upload password have to be reset Warning Project will be removed _ Comfirm by typing yes yes Note The project and data in the HMI will all be removed once it is reset Dip Switch SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 Mode ON OFF OFF OFF Touch screen calibration mode LIN J J z aee ON esene o 4 2 2 System Toolbar After rebooting HMI users can set the system with System Toolbar at the bottom of the screen Normally this bar is hidden automatically Only by touching the target at the right bottom corner of screen will the System Toolbar pops up 38 Weintek MT8000 Series Large Keyboard Use large keyboard to input text information firtual Keyboard l mam F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F F12 Backspace oj fel
239. gsugertest xls J Step3 After adding files check the Combine to a file to export those files to a single Excel file xls A E E Creation time 2 Thu Nov 27 10 51 06 2008 3 Data Time 16 bit Unsigned 10 31 06 Joala 10 51 08 Wile lald l lO 1245 11 Creation time w Fri Nov 28 170509 2006 13 Data 14 Time 16 bit Unsigned 1S T0509 16 1705 10 LY jl s 11 ls l s 12 19 05 13 uO oo e re co co C e e ce ees 501 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Note If you don t check the box the files will be exported to Excel individually File Edit View Options Help C Documents and Settings user Z2008112 dtl Success C Documents and Settings user 200811286_ dtl Success 25 3 Enable Setting File User can load an existent Setting file to apply to a data log file s Step1 Save the setting to test lgs after filling out scaling amp offset sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point Lo bat Uns aened 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Unagned Scaling amp Offset 0 0000 1 0000 new value f vale 4 E value 2 0000 502 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step2 In a new data sampling click Load Setting to load test lgs sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point 1 F 3 16 bit Unsigned No M 2 16 bit Unsigned 0 No 3 16 bit Uns
240. he input data is out of the defined range the input value will be ignored Dynamic limits Limits Direct Dynamit limits PLE name i Local HMI Ww Setting Address Lw Jeo Set the low limit and high limit of the input data to be derived from the designated register The data length of the designated register is the same as the input object itself In the above example the low limit and high limit are derived from LW100 and the following explains the usage of the low limit and high limit from designated address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register for designated register Users can also set address in Numeric Format tab Designated address Input Low Limit Input High Limit 16 bit format LW100 LW101 Address 1 32 bit format LW100 LW102 Address 2 Low limit When the value of the PLC s register is smaller than Low limit the value is displayed with pre defined color 193 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual High limit When the value of the PLC s register is larger than High limit the value is displayed with pre defined color Blink When the value of the PLC s register is smaller than Low limit or larger than High limit the object will display data with Blinking The picture below shows the Font tab available in both of the numeric input object and the numeric display object to set font font size color and aligning
241. he label of error state c The label of error state is only applied to the drop down list style The listbox style list has nothing to do with this label Set default Set default values for all states i e set O for state 0 1 for state 1 and so on Error The system will set ON OFF to the specified bit register when Notification error is detected The signal of the bit register could be used to trigger a procedure for correcting the error 348 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 30 Timer Overview Use timer variables to enable timer instructions Timer variables consist of the following six special variables Timer Variable Variables Type Input bit IN Bit type The master switch of timer Measurement bit Bit type Turn ON when the timer begin D ee ee Output bit Q Bit type Activate when the timer finish aia aa aad a Preset time PT Word type Set the timer value Elapsed time ET Word type Display current elapsed value of timer Reset bit R Bit type Reset the elapsed time ET to 0 Configuration Click the Timer icon D Timer object properties dialogue box appears as follows 349 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Timer Object Timer Description Mode Accumulated OFF delay Time base 0 1 second is ha Input bit IW PLE name Local HMI w Setting Measurement bit TT PLZ name i Local HMI wt Setting Output bit 0
242. ick OK And next setting dialog pops up as follow 496 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point 16 bit Unsignec 16 bit Mnsigne E Scaling amp Offset HAA Click OK Bile Edt Mew Optons Help oo ala se Creation time Thu Nov 27 10 51 06 2008 Data Time 16 bit Unsigned 10 51 06 0 10 51 07 0 10 51 08 1 10 51 23 0 10 51 24 0 10 51 25 1 10 51 26 10 51 27 10 51 28 3 Export to Microsoft Excel 497 Li WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 Creation time Thu Nov 27 10 51 06 2008 3 Data 4 Time 16 bit Unsigned gee lO S 1 06 D o loSi f 10 51 08 o lol 9 LO5l24 l 10 51 25 11 10 51 l2 osla Pe OSI2E 14 105129 ir Nae a ies Be AP me Eao ie Eee Se epee 25 2 2 How to Use Scaling Function The Scaling is utilized to offset data sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point new value value A xB C users can set a value on A B and C Why do we need the Scaling function For example here is a data of voltage and data format is 16 bit unsigned range 0 4096 498 yb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Users want to map those data to volt which range is form 5 to 5 new value value 0 x0 0024 5 as follow sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point 1 16 b
243. idth 57 5mm SP MDEF Recommended SP printer type for customers outside China 4 Axiohm A630 5 SPRT SP DIII DIV D5 D6 A DN T 490 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 24 Recipe Editor RecipeEditor is a Win32 application and only can run on MS Windows 2000 XP and Vista It allows users to create view and modify recipe rcp and EMI emi files Additionally it can convert recipe and EMI files to CSV format and vice versa 24 1 Introduction In Menu gt File select Open and choose a recipe or EMI file you will see the following dialogue appears set Data Format Address range unit word Select your data format For mat From D To 100 Save Format Delete Format Data format Description Add 16 bit Unsinged Data O Delete Clear All Modify Setting Description n 491 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Modify Modify the description and data type for the selected column Save Format Save the settings of the current data format template so that users can load it every time when needed without recreating it repeatedly The template data will be stored in data fmt file in the EasyBuilder8000 installation directory Delete Format Delete an existed data format template Select your Select an existed data format template for examining the recipe or data format EMI data select your data format After clicking Add Data Type dialog
244. igned 1 0 Nox Scaling amp Offset MAA Save Setting Step3 Press Export to Microsoft Excel button to examine the data Ee Eit Options Help View Creation time Thu How 27 10 51 06 2008 Data Time 16 bit Unsigned 10 51 06 0 10 51 07 0 10 51 08 1 10 51 23 090 10 51 24 0 10 51 25 1 10 51 26 1 10 51 2 7 2 10 51 28 3 503 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 25 3 1 For Combination and Enable Setting File Step1 Click Multi File T Med Bove Ac Colts Ai Multi File CHEM Ed Export to excel CHI E 1 SMB 1127 dtl 2 E datalogh 20061205 dil 3 E008 1205 dl 4 20011 Exit Step2 Select Add File Hulti File AN Combine to a file Enable etting file Cancel 504 L ws WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step3 Select the files that you would like to combine and check both of Enable Setting file and Combine to a file boxes With Combine to a file edit please indicate a file name for the new outcome Maulti Pale Convert file list C Documents and Settings suser200871 127 del C Documents and Settingss user20067 123 dhl AdaFie Dette ie Enable Setting file L EB SUUOdatalogspressure 1 gs Combine to 4 file Step4 After pressing OK the data will display on the dialog E FasyConverter File Edit View Options Help euan CA DOCUNEnt and Settingsuser y2
245. imultaneously at run time and do not use this function to open the window when the same window has been opened by function key or direct window 209 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 13 Moving Shape Overview Moving Shape object is used to define the object s state and moving distance The Moving Shape object is used to place an object in a window at a location specified by the PLC The state and the absolute location of the shape in the window depend on the current values of three continuous PLC registers Typically the first register controls the state of the object the second register controls the horizontal position X and the third register controls the vertical position Y Configuration Click the Moving Shape icon on the toolbar and New Moving Shape Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new Moving Shape Object will be created See the pictures below Z E bk 210 Vina Te WE NTEK Hew Moving Shape Object Creneral ape Desorption PLC name Read address PLO name Address Attribute Mode No of states Min X Display ratio atate Liat address PL name Address Setting Description Read address Label Local HMI EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting 16 bit Unsigned vio Max 400 Rao o ooo Setting 16 bit Unsigned Cancel Click Setting to Sel
246. in int a b a 2 b 3 fun a b setData i Local HMI LB 16 1 end macro_command 4 if statement macro_command main int k 10 J forj 0 to 10 kj j next j if k 0 O then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 0 1 end if 452 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual if k 0 O then SsetData k 1 Device 1 4x 0 1 else setData k 2 Device 1 4x 0 1 end if if k 0 O then setData k 1 Device 1 4x 1 1 else if k 2 1 then setData k 3 Device 1 4x 2 1 end If if k 0 O then setData k 1 Device 1 4x 3 1 else if k 2 2 then setData k 3 Device 1 4x 4 1 else setData k 4 Device 1 4x 5 1 end If end macro_command 5 while and wend statements macro_command main char 1 0 int a 13 b 14 c 4848 b 0 13 while b 0 ali 20 i 10 if ali 120 then c 200 break end if i i 1 453 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual wend setData c Device 1 4x 2 1 end macro_command 6 break and continue statements macro_command main char 0 int a 13 b 14 c 4848 b 0 13 while b 0 ali 20 i 10 if ali 120 then c 200 i i 1 continue end if i i 1 if c 200 then SetData c Device 1 4x 2 1 break end if wend end macro command 7 Array macro_command main int a 25 b 25 i b 0
247. ing next instruction until the end command is reached end Select Indicates the end of the select case statements 396 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 3 4 4 Other Control Commands Used in for next and while wend It skips immediately to the end of the statement Used in for next and while wend It ends the current iteration of a loop eea nea The return command inside the main block can force the macro to stop EO SEE 18 4 Function Blocks Function blocks are useful for reducing repetitive codes It must be defined before use and supports any variable and statement type A function block is called by putting its name followed by parameters in parenthesis in the Main Macro Function After the function block is executed it returns the value to the Main Function where it is used as an assignment or condition A return type is not necessary in definition of function which means that a function block is not always necessary to return a value The parameters can also be absent in definition of function while the function has no need to take any parameters from the Main Function The syntax is as follows Definition of function with return type sub type lt name gt parameters Local variable declarations Statements return value end sub Example sub int Add int x int y int result result x y return result end sub macro_command main 397 Ly WE NTEK int a 10 b 20 sum su
248. int 2 When the ET equals PT the TI and Q are turned OFF Point 3 When the IN turns ON the TI and Q are turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases Point 4 When the ET equals the PT the Tl and Q are turned OFF Point 1 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains OFF 351 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Accumulated Off delay 13 31 Video In Point 2 When the IN turns OFF and if the ET is less than the PT the Tl be turned OFF The ET is in the retentive state Point 3 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON The timer measurement starts again and the ET is added to the kept value The Q remains OFF Point 4 When the ET reaches the PT the TI be turned OFF and the Q be turned ON Point 5 When the IN turns OFF the Q be turned OFF Reset the ET to 0 by using Reset bit R Point 1 When the IN turns ON the Q be turned ON and Tl remains OFF Point 2 When the IN turns OFF the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains ON Point 3 When the IN turns ON the timer measurement pauses Point 4 When the IN turns OFF the paused timer measurement continues Point 5 When the ET equals the PT the Tl and Q are turned OFF Reset the ET to 0 by using Reset bit R 352 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Fadeo In Objects Properties Ed General Profile Encode fonnat Capture address Use
249. ion For example supposed that Zero 0 Span 100 when the value of register is 30 and Start degree 0 End degree 360 then the degree indicated by pointer is 30 Zero Span Zero End degree Start degree 30 0 100 0 360 0 108 Pointer will indicate the position of 108 degrees See the picture below 233 Ly ID WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Range limit To set the value of low and high limit the display color width of the sign of low high limit Below illustration use above setting to display the range mark 30 o 0 N user defined radius Range limit 7 Enable Lov S Mid Wat Use user defined radius a B Range limat V Enable Low E Mid mio a Use user defined radius Dynamic When Dynamic limits is not selected the low limit and high limit are fixed Limits value which directly comes from the settings See the example below the uncheck low limit is 30 and high limit is 60 C Dynamic limits Low imit 20 A r igh limit 234 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Dynamic When Dynamic limits is selected the low limit and high limit are decided Limits by the register check Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register for Dynamic limits Users can also set address in Limits tab while adding a new object Please refe
250. iption If it is set ON the Fast Selection Window LB 9013 o R W is disabled If it is set ON the Task Button is LB 9014 R W disabled LB 9015 If it is set ON both the Fast Selection Window and Task Button is disabled 22 6 Event Logging Remote Address Description HMI Write Control Clear all event logs of the day when bit is LB 9021 set ON The earliest event log message will be LB 9022 deleted when bit is set ON Clear all event logs in the MT8000 when LB 9023 bit is set ON The MT8000 will recalculate the file sizes LB 9024 of all the event log messages when bit is W set ON LB 9042 Set ON to acknowledge all 477 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual I unacknowledged events Status ON indicates there are LB 9043 unacknowledged events LW 9060 Number of existing event logs The file sizes of all event logs 32 bit LW 9061 Unsigned 22 Data Logging Remote HMI Control Description set ON to delete the earliest data B 9025 sampling log The IREO can only work for data sampling logs on the MT8000 Set ON to delete all the data sampling LB 9026 logs The function can only work for W data sampling logs on the MT8000 The MT8000 will recalculate the file sizes LB 9027 of all the data sampling logs when bit is W set ON The number of data sampling logs on the LW 9063 MT8000 The file sizes of all data sampling logs on LW 9064 the MT8000 32 bit Unsigned
251. ir own keyboard a window should be designated for creating it Press add after creating and add the window to the list For more information please see Chapter 12 Key Pad Design and Usage where also shows how to fix this keyboard in screen instead of adding it to the list User s project can be restrained and executed on specific HMI only for i series HMI Please refer to Chapter 30 Project protection for more information 5 4 System Setting Parameters in System Setting tab are for setting up some miscellaneous functions of EasyBuilder 68 oystem Parameter Settings Ed Font Extended Memory Printer Backup server Device Model General eyste Betting Security startup language after redownloading the project Language 1 we Auto logout Enable i w minute ts When a user does not operate the HMI for longer than the setting tome the system will automatically logout Hide system setting bar Hide mouse cursor Use LB 9062 to open hardware sething dialog Disable buzzer Prohibit remote HMI connecting this machine Disable upload function effective after rebootnig HMI YNG server Password 111111 L protection Disable LW remote write via COM port or ethemet LWrnge 0 RW protection Disable KW remote write via COM port or ethemet RWomee 0 BasvAccess server Login Kasyccess server IP address Some functions are duplicate
252. irements for example using smaller sized project to For T series get bigger memory space for historical data It works contrariwise only Minimum Project size is 6MB Maximum Project size is 10 MB default is 8MB Minimum Historical data size is 2MB Maximum Historical data size is 6 MB default is 4MB For adjusting storage space users should erase history data saved in HMI before downloading project file STOVE ge space management History data space Max HOB file size 40M a 5 0M Hint If change storage space please reset HMI data logs and event logs 5 3 General Parameters in General tab determine all properties related to screen display 65 eas WE INTEK oystem Parameter Sethngs Device Font Model Fast selection button Atribute Position C Hide button when HMI starts SCYERYL SABI Extended Memory Creneral Back leht saver minute is Enable back light when alam occurs rite SECIEEN Saver EasyBuilder8000 User Printer Backup Server System pettine SECUrtY Paver window no Options etactiap window no Common window Eeyboard caret color Event Extra no of events Eewboard Above base window ka es 10 WINDOW 010 a Ovpetgont tue FW A enabled Use LWO4 50 9455 as time tags of event logs BCD y oO 50 Keypad 1 Integer 51 Keypad 2 Integer 52 Keypad 3 Integer 53 Keypad 4 Integer 54 Keypad
253. isplay the register chosen as shown below Addres Device type Address L59000 System tag Address format DODDO range 0 11999 Index register The illustration below shows a part of system tags For further information please refer Chapter 16 Address Tag Library and Chapter 22 System Reserved Words and Bits 108 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Address PLE name Local HMI k Device type LE 9000 initialized as GM wt Address LB 9000 initialized as ON LE 9001 initialized as ON E LE amp 9002 initialized as OM LE 9003 initialized as ON Pm mmm tet bre ee MRI Index register Deciding to use Index register or not please refer to Chapter 11 Index Register for more information Selecting Data Type EB 8000 supports data types that are listed below Selecting correct data type is necessary especially while using address tag 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD 16 bit Hex 32 bit Hex 16 bit Binary 32 bit Binary 32 bit Float 9 2 Using Shape Library and Picture Library Shape Library and Picture Library are used for enhancing the visual effect of an object For setting these please go to Shape tab in the dialog for adding new object to set up Shape Library and Picture Library 109 Nes nek EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Bit Lamp Object General Shape Label Shape Shape Library Use shape e Inner E e Frame E
254. it Urs emer 7 bit Una E A Scaling amp Offset ooo new value value A w E j value s 0 0024 5 0000 Above sampling data of setting can be saved and loaded next time 499 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual After the scaling Original file After utilizing scaling function file E K 41 20081203 dtl EasyConverter E K41120081203 dtl EasyConverter File Edit View Options Help File Edt View Ophons Help SUAS SAUSAS Creation time Creation time Wed Dec 03 08 47 15 2008 Wed Dec 03 08 47 15 2008 Data Data Time 16 bit Unsigned Time 16 bit Unsigned O8 4 7 08 47 O8 47 08 47 O8 47 08 47 O8 4 7 O84 O84 O84 O8 4 7 O84 O8 47 O84 O8 47 O84 O O8 47 O84 Q 0 47F 08 47 1 O8 47 O8 4 2 O8 47 O84 7 4 O8 47 O8 4 ae 08 47 08 47 4 O8 47 O84 7 4 O8 4 7 O8 4 7 4 O8 4 7 O8 4 7 3 O8 4 7 O8 4 7 2 O8 4 7 O8 4 7 2 O8 4 7 O8 4 7 1 0 04 47 Fhe Mh A E 4r 25 2 3 How to Use Multi File Conversion Step1 Click the File Multi File will pop up the setting dialog Step2 Click Add File to add files into List 500 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Maulti File Convert file list CSEBSOOUD eng 34 datalogs1 2342008112 dtl CSEBSOUD eng 34 datalog trend 20051 1 26 dtl Enable Setting file Combine to a file C Documents and Sethin
255. it address 1 word 16 bits in other words 1 value change of index register means the change of 16 bits See the example below When INDEX 5 is set as 0 the state of Bit Lamp LB0 and LB6 are the same as those of Toggle Switch LB0 Index 5 and LB6 Index 5 and are displayed ON 136 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Object A LB O Index 5 LB 6 Index 5 Index 5 lf users change value of index 5 to 1 the state of Bit Lamp LB16 and LB22 are the same as those of Toggle Switch LBO Index 5 and LB6 Index 5 and are displayed ON Object A LB 0 Index 5 LB 6 Index 5 Object B Index 5 In conclusion From illustration above we realize that Index register is used to change addresses Through changing the data in index register we can read and write different data from different addresses to the same object without changing its address of the device Therefore we can transmit or exchange data among different addresses 137 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 12 Keypad Design and Usage Both Numeric Input and ASCII Input objects need to use keypad as input tool Except for calling up a popup keyboard users can design a keyboard without title bar or a fixed keypad in the window Both numeric keyboard and ASCII keyboard are created with Function Key object The process and usage are illustrated below 12 1 Steps to Design a Pop up Keypad S
256. ject to HMI 3 1 Create a New Project First of all click New icon on the toolbar to create a new project EasyBuilder 000 Te EB Fie Edit View Option Select HMI Model check Use template and click OK EasyBuilder Copyright c 2006 Weintek Lab Inc Welcome to KasyBuiddersU00 Please select your model Model i Display mode Under Device Tab click New button to correctly set up the Device Properties for communicating with the PLC 26 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual System Parameter Settings l Printer Eackup Server General evstem pettine PECIILEY Device Properties MITSUBISHI FxOn Fxe CO HMI PLC Location Local Settings PLL type ke 1 10 MITSUBISHI _FAON s0 PLE I F ps 485 AV Ww PLE default station no oF COMI 9600 E 7 1 Settings Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words 5 a Max read command size words Max write command size words Extended Memory FPrmten Backup Server Mame Location Device type fF Proto Local HMI Local HMI Local MTS104iH 00x Disable Nia Local PLC 1 MITSUBISHI FEOn Interface MITSUBISHI FEOn COMI 9600 E 7 1 Rs4e5 44 2 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Now if users would like to add a new object such as Toggle Switch click the icon on the tool bar Aen E A New Toggle Switch
257. l Bo e e EE o E A E A E A E rer ee 220 Lo AO Metr DIS Pia sergep E N 228 Toa ena DIEI a e O E E ES E E AEE E E 236 ie 1o History Data DiSplay een een near eee ent eee E E EAEE nerve eee 247 LASPAG BO KDI PIO keene ee oh eee enon T eee enone EEA NE 254 DO FO PIO ae cce sce ec se E E E E E 267 B2 Anm Bar and Alarma DI NA oeps N E ENE NEE 281 e EnD I a AE E EE E E E eee A E 285 13 23 Data Transfer Trigger based ccececescssssesssessessssssesessesesscsesssesesscsessesesessesesecseeesseseesseeees 293 PAB aE KUD ea a E E E E A 296 Di DNA CMA PVO Eer E R E A E E EE E AAR 300 13 26 Data Transfer Time based ooo eeccecececcecccceccscsccscsccscsscsccsceccscecescsassceecscsacsccaceececearseeass 312 PEC CONTO oa n AE E E EA EE EAE ENEAN 315 DSi Os N OUE es E E A EE A E EE 322 ss 20 2 6 0 9 a 8 eee E E E E AEA AE E 343 fs 8 0 TINE ene ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee eee 349 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual DES ek WACO IU e E E A EA EEN E EET 352 Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library wc esecesessssesssessesesesesesscesscsesesssseceeeeseseessessesseeees 356 14 1 Creating Shape LIDA V eee een cence ene ee na ENA aE iT A Ei 356 A2 Cl SAG PVC re LID Y oee E A 362 Chapter 15 Label Library and Using Multi Language uu eessesesesssseesssssesesessesesessescsseesseseesseess 370 is EM gd goo 0 O e E ee nee oe en een ee eee ee E eee 370 15 2 Settings Of Label Library s FONt hu csessesessessssssesessesesscsessssesesscsecsssesesseeeseessees
258. lick the Option List conia Option List object properties dialogue box appears as follows 343 1 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Option Last Object Option list Mapping security shape Label Dewi Athibute Mode itbox Barkera selechon r Control address PLC name Local HMI se Setting Write when button is released povrce dates of historical data Data Sampling objet i Cancel Option list tab Setting Description Attribute Mode Select the object style one of Listbox and Drop down list No of state Set the number of states for the object Each state represents an item displayed in the list and a value to be written to the Control address Background Select background color for the object 344 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Selection Select background color for the selected highlighted item Control address Select the PLC name Device type Address of the word register device that controls the display of the object and the system writes the value of the state to the word register Write when button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is not selected the operation is activated at touch down Note This option is only available in listbox style Source dates of History Index Mode historical data Option List object
259. list A dialogue Device Properties will be shown as below From this we know that the attribute of Local HMI is a HMI and the location is Local Device Properties PLC Location ocal wv Interval of block pack words 5 Steps to add a new device 53 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 1 1 How to Control a Local PLC lt a See The so called local PLC means a PLC which is connected to the local HMI directly To control a local PLC users need to add this type of device first Click New under the Device list and the Device Properties dialog appears Please correctly fill in all of the properties required Take a local PLC MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 as an example Device Properties MITSUBISHI FEOnFE2 OHMI PLC Location PLC type MITSUBISHI FLOnFE2 v Y 1 00 MITSUBISHI FXON 2 PLC LF PLC default station no 0 000000000 COM COM1 600 E 7 1 Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read command sze words Max write command sze words Setting Description S Name o The name of the device set by user HMI or PLC To confirm whether this connected device is a HMI or PLC Its PLC in this example Local or Remote Showing whether this device is connected to 54 i WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual a Local HMI or being remote controlled Select Local in this case PLC type PLC I F t
260. lling EasyBuilder8000 Put the EasyBuilder Installation CD into the CD drive The computer will run the program automatically and bring up a screen showing an area to click to begin the Easybuilder installation If the auto run sequence does not start browse the CD and find the root directory of Autorun exe manually The installation screen is shown below Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ieee LM L we EasyBuilder8000 fustall Document a Library Drivers www weintekcom 2 Click Install users will see the window below click Next following the installation instructions Setup EasyBuilder8000_4 10 Sela Welcome to the EasyBuilder8000_4 10 Setup Wizard This will install EBBO00V410 on vour computer It is recommended that vou close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup Cancel Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 Users will be asked if they would like to remove the old versions of EB8000 Please tick those should be removed and click Next to continue Setup EasyBuildert000 4 10 T E x EBSO00 Remove Information Find other version of EBBOO0 that has been installed EasyBuilder 8000 43 4 5 English EBS000y345 4 Designate a new folder for EB8000 installation or choose the folder recommended and then click Next setup EasyBouilders000_4 10 4 2 x Select Destination Location Where should
261. llowing example the content of Offset value storage address is m therefore the data block is started from the address control word address m No offset settings Has offset settings Designated Designated m address address Control 1 No of Data n 1 No of Data n 7 Data n to be displayed on the graph e Data n to be gt displayed on the qraph n 1 Data n m n 1 Data n NOTE Ifthe control register is 32 bits device only bit 0 15 will be used as control purpose bit 16 31 will be ignored as illustration below 3 bit device 31 16 15 0 er f o If you do not use offset to start address the system will continuously read Control and No of Data At the time Control is changed to non zero the system will then read the data block If you use offset to start address the system will continuously read Control No of Data and Offset It is recommended to use offset to start address for data block display 263 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual with multiple channels and the same device type You can register Control No of Data and Offset in continuous address for each channel The system will read the control words of all the channels in one read command and it shall speed up the response time Please refer to the following picture The control words of channel 1 is located from address 0 the control words of channel 2
262. low 296 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Backup Object General Security ahape Label bwi O POVICE OEW OEW A Historical event log Historical data log Backup postion TSB 1 OUSE Note Use L W9032 9039 to change the backup folder name Note Use Remote printer backup server to store data to a remote PC Enable the server in System Parameter Printer Backup Server settings nave format Format MTaOO0 Event Log evt Range Stat Today O Yesterday Within All Athibute Mode Trigeer mode OFF ON we Trigger address setting PLE name Local HMI Cancel Setting Description RW RW_A Historical event log Historical data log Select one from the above for the source There may be several data sampling objects registered in the project If you select Historical data log use Data Sampling object index to select the right one as shown below 297 We WEINTEK Backup Position Save format Range EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Backup Object General Security Shape Label bsi O O SOVICE OEW OEW A Historical event log Historical data log Data Sanvpling object index 1 Backup position Select the destination where the source files will be copied to a USB1 or USB2 The USB disk connected to HMI b Remote printer backup server To select this users have to enable MT remote printer backup
263. lso move the text of other States Duplicate this label to other states This function is used to duplicate the current text content to the other states 9 4 Adjusting Profile Size When an object is created double click it and go to the Profile tab to adjust the position and size of the object Bit Lamp Objects Properties General Shape Label Profile Postion Chime O x 7 mize With Heint 50 a Position Set if the position and size of the object is Pinned When it is checked the position and size of the object cannot be changed X and Y mean the X and Y coordinate of the left top corner of the object 120 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual b Size Adjust the width and height of the object 9 5 Variables of station number EB8000 version 4 1 0 allows users to set variables of station number in PLC address As shown below var2 is one of 16 station number variables Address PLE pame MITSUBISHI FeonjFee We Address var2 123 F The syntax of variable of station number varN address The range of N is integer from 0 15 address means PLC address 16 variables are availble varO var15 These variables of station number read values from address LW 10000 LW 10015 The list below shows variables and its corresponding system reserved address LW varO LW 10000 var1 LW 10001 var2 LW 10002 var3 LW 10003 var4 LW 10004 vars LW 10005 var6 LW 10006 var LW 10007 var8 LW 10008
264. lustrations in Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library for details Click OK and preview the design of the picture after the setting is completed Preview e 4 sse i F A N k Backgownd E A 9 3 Setting Text Content Go to Label tab while adding new object to set the text content as shown below 115 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Hit Lamp Object General Security Shane Label Use label Use label library Use bitmap font eae wo VHEOw Font Axial Color hin let Italic Underline Duplicate these attributes to Every state A thribute Movement Dineton Leh Poni peed Content tat a Duplicate this label to every state Use label Check Use label and click Label Library button to add and edit the text EB8000 supports Windows true font Use label library Check Use label library to choose a label tag that exists in Label Library as shown below 116 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Use label Library Label tag NONAME Label Library Label Library Note About all the settings in Label Library please refer to the illustrations in Chapter 15 Label Library and use Multi Language for details Font Select font style from font list EB8000 supports Windows true font as shown below Color Alien Arial Narrow Arial Narrow Bold Bookman Old
265. m Add a b end macro_command or sub int Add int result x 10 y 20 result x y return result end sub macro_command main int sum sum Add end macro_command Definition of function without return type sub lt name gt parameters Local variable declarations Statements EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end sub Example sub Add int x int y int result result x y end sub 398 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual macro_command main int a 10 b 20 Add a b end macro_command or sub Add int result x 10 y 20 result x y end sub macro_command main Add end macro_command syntax description sub Mustbe used to begin the function block type Optional This is the data type of value that the function returns A O EE Ona Ea parameters Optional The parameters hold values that are passed to the function by the Main Macro The passed parameters must have their type declared in the parameter field and assigned a variable name For example sub int MyFunction int x int y x and y would be integers passed to the function by the Main Macro This function is called by a statement that looks similar to this ret MyFunction 456 pressure where pressure must be integer according to the definition of function Notice that the calling statement can pass hard coded values or variables to the function After this function is executed an integer val
266. m integer saved into result result must be a variable macro_command main short result RAND result result is not a fixed value when executes macro every time end macro_command 18 5 2 Data Transformation BIN2BCD source result Description Transforms a binary type value source into a BCD type value result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result BIN2BCD 1234 result result is Ox1234 source 5678 BIN2BCD source result result is Ox5678 end macro command 406 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual BIN2BCD source result Description Transforms a BCD type value source into a binary type value result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result BCD2BIN 0x1234 result result is 1234 source 0x5678 BCD2BIN source result result is 5678 end macro command Name DEC2ASCII DEC2ASCIll source result start len Description Transforms a decimal value source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s type i e if results type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on The first character is pu
267. m of the Hex codes for bytes 2 12 561 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 30 41 52 44 30 31 30 30 30 33 03 22E The lowest 8 bits of the result returns 2E Reply The reply length is L N 4 8 Where N the number of requested devices If the command is successful the reply length will be at least 12 bytes but could be as long as 404 bytes It consists of the STX followed by four bytes for each requested device then the ETX and Checksum 7 Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Pay 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 13 14 17 L 7 Station Data1 Data2 Data3 Data 4 ae Data N 1 Byte Byte L 2 L 1 L The above example returns the following assuming the HMI contains the following data Address Data The following is the packet sent from the HMI 02H 30H 41H 52H 44H 30H 30H 34H 42H 31H 46H 36H 46H 33H 46H 43H 31H 562 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 03H 43H 32H The values in each requested device are returned in Hex The checksum is calculated on bytes 2 L 2 In the event of an error the reply is 32 4 2 WD Batch Write Request This command writes up to 99 consecutive 16 bit items to the LW memory area of HMI The length of the command is L N 4 14 Where N the number of requested devices The command will be at least 18 bytes long but can be up to 410 bytes long Byte Bytes Byte Byte Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Byt Byte 1 2 3 S S
268. me 1 LW9219 Password 111 449220 bit 15 bto Current status 0000000000000001 wez Logout LB9050 Class A Button 131 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Since user 1 is permitted to use objects with class A object SB_0 appears and allows user to operate Now bit O in LW 9222 becomes 1 Step 5 Next when user enters user 3 s password 333 the display will become User name 3 Fassword 333 Lw9220 bit 15 Current status 0000000000000111 Class A Button Class B Button Class C Button Since user 3 is permitted to use objects with class A B and C Now bit O bit 3 in LW 9222 becomes 111 and allows current user to use objects with class A B and C Step 6 At this time if SB_3 LB 9050 is pressed to force current user to logout the system will return to initial state In other words current user can only use objects with none class User name 3 Password 333 bit 15 Current status 0000000000000000 132 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 11 Index Register 11 1 Introduction EB8000 provides 32 index registers for users to use addresses flexibly Via index register users can update objec s read write address without changing its content while HMI is running the project The addresses of the 32 index registers are as follows INDEXO LW 9200 16 bit INDEX 15 LW
269. mode Numeric Input Object s Properties General Numeric Format Security Shape Font Profile Setting Description Attribute Color When the data is within high and low limit it will be displayed with this color Align There are three aligning modes Left Leading zero and Right The picture below shows the style of each mode Right 12 194 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Size Set font size 195 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 10 ASCII Input and ASCII Display Overview Both of the ASCII Input object and the ASCII Display object can display the value of the designated word devices in ASCII format The ASCII input object can also accept the data input from the keypad and change the value of the word devices Configuration Click the ASCII Input or ASCII Display icon on the toolbar and the New ASCII Input Object or New ASCII Display Object dialogue box will appear fill in each item press OK button a new ASCII Input Object or ASCII Display Object will be created See the pictures below re ee LI ep liE ASCII LEE PASLAR The difference between the New ASCII Display Object and New ASCII Input Object dialogue boxes is that the latter has the settings for Notification and keypad input while the former doesn t have The picture below shows the General tab of the
270. mple for communicating between two HMI via MemoryMap First of all create a new project in EasyBuilder Edit System Parameter Setting PLC Device Properties 3 Mamor Map i CHMI PLC Local ka r Memory Map 1 00 MEMORY_MAP so R6 232 wv PLC default station no To COMI 115200 E 8 1 CL COM Port Sethngs COM Er Timeout sac Baud rate 115200 Tum around delay ms Data b s 8 Bits Send ACK deby ms Parity Even Parameter 1 Stop bits 1 Bit Parameter 2 Parameter 3 are 555 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Device Properties HMI OPLE r Local w a Memory Hap V 1 00 MEMORY_MAP so RS 232 v PLC default station no 0 COMI 115200 E 8 1 COM Port Settings COM COM 1 a Timeout fsec Baud rate 115200 Tur around delay ms Data bits 8 Bits Send ACK delay ms hal F Panty Even M Parameter 1 i Stop bits 1 Bit Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Precaution 1 Between two HMI Time out has to set 0 5 sec and another has to set 0 8 sec 2 Data bit has to be 8 bits 3 The other setting has to be identical between two HMI Adding two objects on window10 a toggle switch as illustration below 556 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Toggle Switch Object Ed General Security Sha
271. n Enable Notification When the function is selected MT8000 will set the state of the designated bit device to ON or OFF after the action is completed Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address 170 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Systme tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area Non ASCIll character input Below we illustrate the method to input non ascii character such as Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Japanese Greece and so on Step1 Setting non ascii fonts Go to System parameter Font and add non ascii fonts in the Fonts for non ascii strings list For example use AR MinchoL JIS for Japanese AR MingtiM GB for Simplified Chinese AR MingtiM KSC for Korean Arial for Greek please refer illustration below System Parameter Settings Device Model General security Font Extended Memory Printer Server Fonts for no ascu strings AR MinchoL Je Minetild GE Add pimHei HE RRA BHE Step2 Design non ascii input keypad Create window11 for non ascii input keypad keypad design is shown below 5 10 WINDOW 010 11 SimpleChinese_Keyboard 171 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Those objects on the window are function keys with input code in acc
272. n every 3 seconds 1 Specifying a small interval or a big number of data to transfer may cause an overall performance decrease due to the time consuming in transferring data Therefore users should always try to choose a longer interval and a smaller amount of data to transfer 2 When a short interval is inevitable be aware of the interval must be longer than the data transfer operation For example if the data transfer operation take 2 seconds you must set the interval longer than 2 seconds Source Set source address address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of source address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Destination Set destination address address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of destination address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object After completing all settings and pressing the OK button a new Data Transfer Time based Object is created The summary displays all the registered data transfer objects with brief information as shown below Data Transfer Time based Object ee o ooa a a l a n E m zaz 1 Loca HMI L B20 gt Local HMI LB210 Mode Bit Time interval 2 0 second s tran
273. n sending ACK 0x06h Master receive ACK 0x06h from slave 553 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual When finishing communication master sending revised data of MW to slave and slave change the MW which the same as master At this time master and slave keep the same data in the same address Another example below the address and data include 0x10 please notice the change from data format Now if we have 0x10 in MW16 in slave according to this protocol slave will communicate with master immediately and master will instead the 0x10 in data of MW16 the procedure as following Slave sending STX 0x02h Master receive STX 0x02h from slave and sending ACK Ox06h to master Slave receive ACK Ox06h from master Slave sending data 0x01 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x02 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x10 as below table es Address Low byte Insert 0x10 Bit Address High byte 0x10 is low byte in MW10 Insert 0x10 0x00 in high byte 0x10 gt End sign 0x03 10 0x10 checksum gt 0x01 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x02 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x 10 0x03 0x10 Master receive data from slave and sending ACK 0x06h to slave 1 2 3 5 6 Slave receive ACK 0x06h from master When finishing communication slave sending the address and content of MW to master at this time master change data of MW for the same as slave master and slave keep the same data in the same address 554 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Below is a exa
274. n the storage size for windows of HMI For example the storage size of MT 8000 i series for windows is 16MB then the size of windows or screens constructed cannot exceed 16MB Under this limit users can make most use of it to create as many windows as possible 6 1 Window Types There are 4 types of windows in EB8000 each with different functions and usages a Base Window b Common Window c Fast Selection Window d System Message Window 6 1 1 Base Window Base window is the most frequently used type of window Apart from being used as main screen it is also used as a Foundation base used as the background for other windows b Keyboard window c Pop up window for function key object d Pop up window for direct window and indirect window object e Screen saver 78 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Base window should be in the same size as the HMI screen That is to say the resolution of base window and that of HMI should be identical The start up screen is a base window and is shown below CUN iri PUR i 4 Tt tke 0I nT OTT Tourch IE Communication Becomes Easy Easy View 6 1 2 Common Window Window no 4 is the default of common window Objects in this window will be displayed in other base windows Therefore objects in different windows whether shared or same will be placed in common window for example the logo of the product or a common button When system is in operation Clicking
275. n will this base window pop 85 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual up The origin of the coordinates is the left top corner of the screen Monopoly If the option is checked when a base window used as a pop up window appears users are not allowed to operate other windows before this base window Is closed If a base window is used as a keyboard window Monopoly is automatically enabled Another way to create a window is to select Window from menu in EB8000 and then select Open Window to open the dialogue Please refer to the illustration below Window Help Open Window Cascade Tile 110 WINDOW_o1o Open Window Fast Selection Em Common Window FLC Response HMI Connection Password Restriction Window 00S WINDOW 010 Window O11 Window O13 Keypad 1 Integer Keypad 2 Interer Keypad 3 Integer Eeypad 4 Integer Eewpad 5 Integer Eeypad 6 Integer Eeypad 7 HEX Eeypad o Floating ASCI Middle ASCI Small ASCIT Upper M ASCIT Lower M ASCIT Uppers ASCIT Lowers 640 460 200 100 200 100 410 100 640 460 640 460 640 460 640 460 209 280 195 230 200 170 304 213 160 220 241 331 306 223 209 254 570 240 420 200 570 240 570 240 420 200 480 200 Window No Window Name and Size are listed in the Open Window dialogue Click New and choose window type from Select Window Style dialog Complete all the settings and click OK a new window is created 86 EasyBuilder8000
276. name amp Password Set the user name and password to restrict that only the authorized HMIs can send requests to EasyPrinter e Naming Convention for HMI Folder EasyPrinter creates different folders to store files e g hardcopy bitmap files backup files from different HMls There are two ways to name the folders a Use IP address EasyPrinter names the folder after the IP address of the HMI sending the request i e Prefix IP address Please see the following illustration 518 Lid WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 SS 192 168 1 26 Ethemet m7 192 168 1 27 192 168 1 28 b Use HMI name EasyPrinter names the folder after the name of the HMI sending the request i e Prefix HMI name e Properties gt Minimize to system tray Select this option to minimize EasyPrinter to system tray instead of task bar Users can double click the icon in system tray to restore the EasyPrinter window e Properties gt Detailed message Select this option to display more detailed messages about events in the message window MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Output f Print out to hp LaserJet 3350 PCL 5 Backup DAR TS000 ey Output EasyPrinter provides two modes to output hardcopy results Print Out and Save to File a Print Out Select this option to inform EasyPrinter to print out the hardcopy result on specified printers b Save to File
277. nd all the above files in EasyBuilder8000 installation directory which means users have to install EasyBuilder8000 software package on a PC and copy the files to the target PC 27 2 Modify the Content of xob_pos def Step1 Open xob_pos def using a text editing tool e g Notepad E xob_pos Notepad File Edit Format View Help g fifo eration mode a OG off Tine 1 on line ci EasysSimulator ee define the directory oF com exe and qui ex CIVEasysimulatorsMTsooo_Demo_ amp 00 e00 xob define the directory ar xob file 526 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 1 0 Perform Offline simulation 1 Perform Online simulation Specify the full path where the files e g com exe gui exe EasySimulator exe etc locate Specify the full path of the project file xob Step2 Double click EasySimulator exe to start the simulation Easy Simulator exe so Easy Simulator MFC Application MTSO56 bmp MTS070 brmp oz x 390 bee x 456 Bitmap Image Bitmap Image MT3100 6mp 968 x foe Bitmap Image MT8104 bmp lax 614 Bitmap Image MT8121 bmp SG FF Bitmap Image MTe150 bmp g See iZ67 x 963 Export Definition File Bitmap Image PRE rere Trend Graphs haass l il e nts Inimati Multiple Animation 19 aas Cecurit Touch It Features Communication Becomes Easv POS ooo onun Me 527 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual
278. ndependently addressed 16 bit items from the LW memory area of HMI The length of the command is L N 4 8 Where N the number of requested devices The command will be at least 12 bytes long but can be up to 402 bytes long a Bytes Bytes Bytes _ Pare Byt Byte 2 3 4 5 6 9 L 7 6 e L 1 L 10 1 L 2 STX Statio Addr Addr Addr 3 Addr N ETX Check s bill al headed Ee Ral lima Byte 1 Always STX 0x02 Bytes 2 3 The Station Number of the HMI to read 2 Hex digits Bytes 4 5 The command to execute Bytes 6 9 This is the first address from which to retrieve data Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 10 13 This is the second address from which to retrieve data Must be 4 bytes long Bytes 14 L 7 The remaining addresses from which to retrieve data Each address must be 4 bytes long Byte L 2 Always ETX 0x03 Bytes L 1 L Checksum calculated as the lower 8 bits of the sum of bytes 2 L 2 Reply If successful the reply length is L N 4 8 565 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Where N the number of requested devices If successful the reply length will be at least 12 bytes but can be up to 406 bytes It consists of the STX followed by four bytes for each requested device then the ETX and Checksum Byte Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 13 14 17 15 L 7 STX Station Cmd Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data Data N 1 N 7 The valu
279. ne Label Dessgion Read address PLO name Memory Map Setting saes e o Invert signal Write address PLO name Memory Map we Setting Adesso Write when button is released A thibute Macro Execute macro A multistate switch object setting as following Hew Multi State Switch Object General Security Shape Label beita SS Read address PLC name Memory Map ww Setting Write address PLO name Memory Map w Setting nites wy Se _ Write when button is released A thibute Svithsbie 10G v Noorse Cyclical User defined mapping 557 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Save Compile Download Change parameter in System Parameter Setting PLC and download to another HMI The HMI display as following c UM iri PWR Easy irn Trying to touch the screen the other HMI will follow the action as current HMI The communicating way is the same as above mentioned The point is to keep the same data in the same register 558 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 32 MT8000 ASCII Protocol 32 1 Command List The following commands are used for communication between the ASCII host and the MT8000 Command Description Name RD Batch Read Reads specified data in a continuous block Batch Write Writes specified data in a continuous block Random Reads data f
280. ned ON but the time is later than the Start Time the action is not automatically performed However the termination action is automatically performed Also if the termination action is not set the schedule range is unable to recognize and the action is not performed Word write These settings are active only when Action Mode is set to Word value Settings Write 332 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual When performing start action the system will write this value into action address Write start value e For Constant Designates the value to be written at start time For Address Designates the address used to store the start time value Write end value When performing end action the system will write this value into action address e For Constant Designates the value to be written at end time For Address Designates the address used to store the end time value e You can use this option if the Enable termination action in Time Set tab is selected E Time Set tab when Constant is selected 333 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit O Addres Setting on individual day start v Sun Mon Tue Wen Thu Fri Sat End Enable termination action Cancel Setting escripton SOSSC s S S Constant Addres_ Select the method to set the start time and end time S e Constant
281. new picture to the Picture Library Import Pictore Export Export the selected picture to the appointed place As shown below users can get the original picture Save fis Save ihi 4 My Recent Documents My Documents File name My Network Save as type Bitmap file bmp wt Cancel The example below shows how to create a new Picture Library and add a Picture with two States into it Step 1 Click New Lib and input the name of the new Picture Library 365 W WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Library Library name TEST j A new Picture Library TEST will be added to the Picture Library dialogue At this moment there is no Picture in the library Library TEST ste Je i Total states 0 0 0 Graph name Image size 0 0 0 0 Step 2 Prepare the pictures to be added suppose the two graphs below are used to represent state 0 and state 1 respectively Click Import Picture and a dialogue appears as below Set Picture no and Picture name for it and then click Next 366 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Import Picmre Picture Picture no oo M Picture name Step 3 When the dialogue below is shown select the source of picture for state 0 and select the correct transparent color In the example below the blue color RGB 0 0 255 is a transparent color After the settings of the state O are completed click Next
282. ng to select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the bit device that system set value to Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 157 Ly WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Addres FPLC name Local HMI w Device type LB al Address 0 System tag 4ddress Format DODDO range 0 11999 Index register Write after button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated after button is touched and released otherwise if not selected operation will be activated once the button is touched If the Momentary switch is selected as the operation mode the Write after button is released function will be ignored Attribute Please refer to the following description for different types of operation Set Style mode Set ON When the operation is activated the bit device PRN amemon nn Set OFF When the operation is activated the bit device See itbesetworr nea Toggle When the operation is activated the bit device Te beton OFF orem OFF on Momentary When touch and hold the area the bit device will be set to ON and the bit device will be set to OFF once the finger removes from area Periodical toggle The state of the bit device will be switched between ON and OFF periodically Operation s time interval can be selected in the combo box showed in the picture below Time interval 1 0 sec
283. ng Object index D I Tend pe Reakte Note af no of channels is changed you must reset HMI data logs Distance between data samples Pixel O Time Distans piel Hold control Enable PLC name Local HMI wi Setting Watch Hine PLE name Local HMI v Setting o Cancel Setting Description Data To select data sampling object as the source of data Refer to the data Sampling sampling section for related information Object index Trend mode To select the mode of data source There are Real time and History for selection a Real time In this mode it can display the sampling data from the beginning of the MT8000 operation to the present time If previous data are required you must select the History mode to read the data from historical record You can use the Hold control object to pause the update of trend 237 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual display but it is only pause the update of the trend display and it will not stop the operation of data sampling object The picture below shows the Hold control setting page Set the state of the designated register to ON it will pause the updating of the trend display Hold control Enable PLL name Lacal HMI w Setting b History In this mode the data come from the historical record of the designated data sampling object in Data sampling object index Data s
284. ngle line format without a else The statement will be executed when the lt Condition gt is TRUE Optional The else if statement will be executed when the relative lt Condition n gt is TRUE Optional see lt Condition gt Optional The else statement will be executed when lt Condition gt and lt Condition n gt are both FALSE endif Must be used to end an if then statement 18 3 4 Reiterative Statements Reiterative statements control loops and repetitive tasks depending on coditiosn There are tw types of reiterative statements 392 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 3 4 1 for next Statements The for next construction is for stepping through a fixed number of iterations A variable is used as a counter to track progress and test for ending conditions Use this for fixed execution counts The syntax is as follows for Counter lt StartValue gt to lt EndValue gt step lt StepValue gt Statements next Counter for Counter lt StartValue gt down lt EndValue gt step lt StepValue gt Statements next Counter Example for a 0 to 10 step 2 b a next a Syntax description for Must be used to begin the statement Counter Required This is the controlling statement The result of evaluating the variable is used as a test of comparison lt StartValue gt Required The initial value of Counter to down Required This determines if the lt step gt increments or decr
285. nly the first 10 bytes is read 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 0x30 0x38 Use a start code With this function the MT8000 will identify the start code in reading the input data from bar code reader All the data include and before start code will be ignored All the data after start code will be saved in designated address For example if the start code is 255 Oxff and original data are Oxff 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 the data saved in designated device address are 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 Terminator Terminator means the end of data when terminator is detected it s mean the end of data stream CR LF Ox0a or OxOd means end of data 463 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual STX ETX 0x02 or 0x03 means end of data Other User can set the terminator manually None MT8000 will save all data to designated address of barcode device After completing all settings described above a new barcode device will be listed in the device tab System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Frinten Backup Server Device o Model General System Setting Security Device list IF Protocol St Wis Name Location Device type Interface Local HMI Local MT6070iHMT80 Disable Barcode OM Local Barcode OM COM S600 N 8 14 Local HMI The Barcode device has two device types Flag and Barcode Device Address Description FLAG
286. nnection Ethernet O USB cable fl series only IP 192 168 1 212 w a n Reboot HMI after download Reset recipe Reset event log Ll Reset data log Setting Description Check this to update all of the kernel programs of HMI It is necessary when the latest EB8000 version is downloaded the first time To assign the desired specific path for Data log Install X series media player It is necessary when EB8000 is drivers downloaded to X series the first time Startup Screen If this box is ticked the assigned BMP picture will be downloaded to HMI After downloading HMI will reboot this picture will be shown after rebooting and then load in the project Users are allowed to use their logos as the start up screen through this method 20 Firmware EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Reboot HMI after download Automatically reboot HMI after downloading Reset recipe Check the box to erase the selected Reset event log specific files in HMI before downloading Reset data log process 2 3 2 Upload Upload files from HMI to PC by Ethernet or USB cable and the dialog shows as below Users have to assign the desired path for file storage before uploading Upload ew ainws Extend Memory EM PLEASE INPUT EM FOLDER NAME EM file location C CFiSD card USB 1 USB 2 Connection Ethernet O USB cable fi series anly Al IF Harr Hil name Detault HMI w 192 168 1 102 Default HMI Sea
287. not selected In this case when the object moves to the last position position 3 next position will be back to the initial position 0 and repeat the action over again The moving path is shown as follows position 0 position 1 position 2 position 3 position 0 position 1 position 2 If Backward cycle is selected when the object moves to the last position position 3 it will move backwards to the initial position 0 and repeat the moving mode over again The moving path is shown as follows position 0 position 1 position 2 position 3 position 2 position 1 position 0 Image state change State change mode There are Position dependant and Time based options When Position dependant is selected it means that following the change of position the state will change too When Time based is selected it means that the position will change based on Position speed and shape state will change based on Image update time Time interval attributes Position speed 4 O01 condis The following dialog shows size setup of animation object Call up the animation object dialogue box by double clicking 218 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Animation Object s Properties General Shape Label Profile Position Pinned mize Width Tape rectangle size Trajectory Setting Description
288. nterval set until the result value reaches the value in the Bottom limit For example the value in the word device will change periodically from 0 10 then from 10 0 Athabute Low limit 0 High limit 10 Inc value 1 o Time interval 0 5 second i Periodical step up Stepping up function A Set word object will add the value set in Inc value to the value of the word device with the regulated interval set in Time interval until the result value reaches the value in the High limit and the value of the word device will return to the value of the Low limit and then repeat the action to keep the value in an active state In the example shown below the value of the word device will change periodically in order of O 1 2 9 10 0 1 2 Attribute Set Style Periodic step up dow to high pe ee Low limit 0 High limit 10 Inc value 1 Time interval 0 5 second s w 165 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual j Periodical step down Stepping down function A Set word object will subtract the value set in Dec value from the value of the word device with the regulated interval set in Time interval until the result value reaches the value of the Low limit and the value of the word device will return to the value of the High limit and then repeat the action to keep the value in an active state In the ex
289. nual operation mode and the automatic operation mode The manual operation mode defines a touch area and users can activate the area to set the value of the word device When users select the automatic operation mode the operation will be automatically activated in pre configured conditions the touch area has no action in any circumstance Configuration Click the Set Word icon in the toolbar and the New Set Word Object dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new Set Word object will be created iE ihe Fl al ciel See the pictures below 160 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Set Word Object General Security Shape Label Dewi O Write address PLL name i Local HME 0 HMI Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned Write after button iz released Notification Enable Set ON O Set OFF Before writing _ After writing PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting 4 thibute Set Style Set valus Cancel Setting Description Write Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address Systme tag Index register of the word device that system set value to Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 161 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Address PLC name Local HMI Device type Livy Address System tag 4ddress Format DODDD range 0 105
290. o of data address No of data address is default as Control word address 1 No of data is to store the number of word device in each data block i e the number of data to plot in trend curve The maximum value is 1024 Data storage start address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of Data storage start address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 256 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Offset value storage address If offset to start address is enabled the Offset value storage address is default as Control word address 2 Format If you select 16 bit data format the address of each data will be start address start address 1 start address 2 and so on If you select 32 bit data format the address of each data will be start address start address 2 start address 4 and so on Limit Set the minimum and maximum limit of trend curve the trend curve is limited by the minimum and maximum limit 257 1 f WS WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Data Block Display Object s Properties General Display Area Shape Profile Data maples so pamples to scroll Enable scroll swatch Profile color Transparent Frame Backeround Color Hori 5 divisioni Verti 5 divisionis Channel Channel 0 v Fen property
291. o be set to 5 and Parameter 1 30 If the interface is Ethernet click Settings and then IP Address Type of PLC Select MITSUBISHI FX0On FX2 in this case Five PLC interfaces are available RS 232 RS 485 2W RS 485 4W Ethernet and USB lf the interface is RS 232 RS 485 2W or RS 485 4W click Settings and then Com Port Settings dialog appears Users need to correctly set the COM port communication parameters LOM Port Sethors Tumeont gec Tom around delay ie Send ACK delay ma Faraometer Fangmeier 2 Timeout If the communication between PLC and HMI is disconnected over the set time limit in Timeout parameter a pop out window No 5 will be shown in HMI as an alert saying PLC No Response Turn around delay While sending the next command to PLC HMI will delay it obeying the set time interval in Turn around delay parameter This may influence the efficiency of the communication between HMI and PLC If no specific request to be made 0 is to be set If the PLC used is in SIEMENS S7 200 Series this parameter needs 55 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual PLC default station no Use broadcast command Settings dialogue appears Users need to correctly set IP address and Port no of the PLC If Address Schinps IF address 1 92 Port ne 500 Tomecut sec 1 Tum around delay ima 0 send ACE delay ms 0 Parameter
292. of Password and Classes Go to Edit System Parameter Settings Security to set user password and operable classes of objects There are seven security levels classified from A to F and includes none Password should be digits from 0 to 9 and up to 12 sets of user password are available system Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printen Backup SEIVEY Device Model General Syetem Setting security select operatable classes for each user User Enable Paswork 111 Ha Oe Mc Or ME OF User 2 7 Enable wod o Aa Me Oc Op Oe OF User 3 Enable Password 0 Ma MB ME Op OF OF User 4 Enable User 5 F Enable User 6 Once password is entered the objects that the user can adjust are set here For example when the security class of User 1 is set as above only objects with class A C E and none can the user adjust 125 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The correct process of inputting password 1 Input the passwords to the system reserved register LW 9220 password 2 Words 32 bits 2 Use LW 9219 User no 1 12 1 Word 16bit to designate current user Note value in LW 9219 must be 1 12 which represents User 1 User 12 respectively If the input password is wrong state of LB 9060 password error will be set ON If the input password is correct state of LB 9060 returns to OFF automatically The passwords of user 1 to
293. on Device type Interface Local MT U56TAMTSU56T Disable MODBUS Server Ethemet TP Local Poxt s000 Hit g1 WEE ll D al 19 1 2 How to Read from Write to MODBUS Server 458 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual MT8000 the client can read from write to another MT8000 the server via MODBUS protocol Add a new device in the client If client s PLC I F is set as Ethernet please select MODBUS TCP IP as PLC type and fill in the correct IP and Port no Device Properties Name MODBUS TCPAP HMI Location Local PLC kai PLC type MODBUS TCPAP T140 MODBUS_TCPIF PLC UF Ethernet we PLC default station no 1 IP 192 168 1111 Port 8000 IP Address Settings IP addes Port no 8000 Timeout sec m y Send ACK delay ms 0 Parameter 2 0 i68 Tum around delay ma O Parameter 1 l j Parameter 3 __ Cancel If the client use RS232 485 interface the PLC type must be set as MODBUS RTU Please make sure the communication parameter setting is correct 459 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual AE Name MODBUS RTU OHMI FLC Location Local y setings PLC type MODBUSRTU O O OOOO O MI V140 MODBUS_RTU so PLC IF RS 485 2 v PLC defimslt station no 1 COM COMI 0600 Egi LOM Port settings COM COM 1 l Timeout see Band rate 9600 j Tum aroun
294. on number BYTE 0 command function code BYTE 1 command 2 high byte of starting address BYTE 2 command 3 low byte of starting address BYTE 3 command 4 high byte of quantity of registers BYTE 4 440 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual command 5 low byte of quantity of registers BYTE 5 command 6 low byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 6 command 7 high byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 7 So a read request is designed as follows char command 32 short address checksum FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 command 0 0x1 station number command 1 Ox3 read holding registers function code is 0x3 address 0 starting address 4x_1 is 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read_no 2 the total words of reading is 2 words HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 calculate 16 bit CRC LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 Finally use OUPORT to send out this read request to PLC OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request After sending out the request use INPORT to get the response from PLC Depending on the protocol the content of the response is as follows the total byte is 9 command 0 station number BYTE 0 command function code BYTE 1 command 2 byte count BYTE 2 command 3 high byte of 4x_1 BYTE 3 44 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000
295. on on the toolbar and the New Numeric Input Object or New Numeric Display Object dialogue box will appear fill in each item click OK button and a new Numeric Input Object or Numeric Display Object will be created See the pictures below The difference between the New Numeric Display Object and New Numeric Input Object dialogue boxes is that the latter has the settings for Notification and keypad input while the former doesn t have The picture below shows the General tab in New Numeric Input Object 186 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Homeric Input Object General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font bsi O Read address PL name fee HMI ry Setting Notification O Set ON Set OFF Before writing _ After writing PLC name i Local HMI v Setting Address m Cancel Setting Description Read Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address address Systme tag Index register of the word device that system display its value and write new data to it Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Notification When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after before the value of the register is changed successfully Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address 187 LW WE INTEK
296. on t check Use a popup keypad Select 200 Keyboard When users press Numeric Input or ASCII Input object WINDOW 200 will pop up in HMI screen Users can press keys in keyboard to input data 12 2 Steps to Use Keypad without Title Bar Step 1 Create a Direct window and set a read address to activate it ex LBO In General Attribute select No title bar and Window no 141 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Direct Window Object Ed General Read address PLL name Local HMI Ww Setting A thabute Spie No te bar Step 2 Set the Profile of direct window object to same size as WINDOW 200 Direct Window Objects Properties General Profile Foxton Crime x 7 mize width Height Step 3 Create a Numeric Input object and don t select Use a popup keypad 142 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Hamer Input Object Ea General Data Enty Numeric Format Security Shape Font Input order Enable Eeyboard Hint If the keyboard isan USB keyboard on indivectidivect window or on the same window please don t check Use a popup keypad Step 4 Add a Set Bit object set LB 0 as ON and overlay it on the Numeric Input object Add Set Bit objects on the Enter and ESC function keys respectively Set LB0 as OFF In this way when user presses either Enter of ESC will close the keybo
297. ond fs set ON when window When the window containing the Set Bit object opens is opened the bit device will be automatically set to ON 158 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual set OFF when window When the window containing the Set Bit object is opened the bit device will be automatically set to OFF set ON when window When the window containing the Set Bit object is closed the bit device will be automatically set to ON set OFF when window When the window containing the Set Bit object closes is closed the bit device will be automatically set to OFF Set ON when When the backlight is turned on the bit device backlight on is automatically set ON Set OFF when When the backlight is turned on the bit device backlight on is automatically set OFF Set ON when When the backlight is turned off the bit device Set OFF when When the backlight is turned off the bit device Users can use set bit object to activate macro commands Macro commands have to be built before configure this function Please refer to related chapter on how to edit Macros Set style Attribute Macro v Execute macro Macro IDI aD 1 w When Set style is selected as Toggle there are three different modes to trigger macro command i e OFF gt ON ON gt OFF or ON lt gt OFF 159 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 4 Set Word Overview The Set Word object provides two operation modes the ma
298. ons New Opens a blank WorkSpace editor for creating a new macro Delete Deletes the selected macro Edit Opens the WorkSpace editor and loads the selected macro Copy Copies the selected macro into the clipboard Paste Pastes the macro in the clipboard into the list and creates a new name for the macro 434 Lyd WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 2 Press the New button to open a blank WorkSpace editor Every macro has a unique number defined in Macro ID edit box and macro name must exist otherwise an error will appear while compiling WorkSpace Macro name macro_test macro_command maing end macro_command GET SET FN a Step 3 Design your macro If it is necessary to use build in functions like SetData or Getdata press Get Set FN button to open API dialog and select the function and set essential parameters 435 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Function name 5etData data 0 Local HMI LW 0 4 Variable 1 Variable type short 16 bit Variable data Array index O Read address PLC name Device Type Address Address format ddddd range 0 10255 Data count 4 Description Read data from a device Usage GetData desti PLC name device type address data count Example char byData 10 Step 4 After the completion of a new macro press Compile button to compile
299. or PC to HMI The following descriptions will show how to set up and perform the Ethernet connection in each way g 4 Control center E Ethernet Swich Hub DOOOS LIN Ethernet z z Ta Ethernet 5 3 w crossover cable Ez OOOCE LIN crossover Cable 466 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 21 1 HMI to HMI Communication Ethernet OOOO8L IN crossover cable Different HMIs can monitor and control each other s data through the Ethernet network By using the system reserved register LB and LW one HMI can master performance of other HMI s One HMI can handle requests from a maximum of 32 other HMls simultaneously Here is an example of communicating two HMIs HMI A and HMI B When HMI A wants to use the set bit object to control the LB123 node of HMI B the procedure for setting the Project files MTP on HMI A is as follows Step 1 Set the IP address of the two HMls Refer to the related chapter for the details Suppose that the IP address of HMI A and HMI B are set for 192 168 1 1 and 192 168 1 2 respectively Step 2 Running the EB8000 and select the Device Table tab on the System Parameter Settings menu then add the IP address and Port number of HMI B The picture below shows the content of HMI A s MTP projects System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup server Device Mo
300. or the HMI Sota aping z Network Time Date Security History neous yare ii Local Password Password for entering the system Upload Password Password for uploading the project Download Password Password for downloading the project Upload History Password Password for uploading the historical data 43 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Password confirmation d History For clearing the history data in HMI Recipe Eventlog and Datalog e Miscellaneous Use the rolling bottom on the screen to adjust the brightness of the LCD 44 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual f Upgrade firmware For users to upgrade firmware or to adjust portrait mode Supported only by series 45 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual g CF card Status When new CF card device is detected this function will be enabled h VNC server Allows users to monitor and control the remote HMI through Ethernet star vW 46 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Step 1 Enable VNC server and set the password in HMI Step 2 Install Java IE or VNC viewer in PC After installing Java IE enter HMI IP The following takes htip 192 168 1 28 as an example a a TES EJT HETE WRT HORS IST mE ae O ld Ps yke OO GAA fet iD E hitp 192 168 1 28 ea Eez a A 7 REAL Encrption Not supported FHC Tiewer
301. ord with the label For example to input ja function key create a function key object General ASCII UNICODE mode type in jaj in the column as below illustration SP Function Key Object s Properties VDJ P Cy Sle gee O EA iim A General Security Shape Label Profile k A a Description fr Activate after button is released m Change folscreen window O Change common window Display popup window Eetum to previous window O Clos window ASCIVUNICODE mode O Enter O Backspace Clear Ea ASCI UNICODE Go to Function key Label and then select Use label type in the content and in the Attribute Font select AR MingtiM GB it must be the same as setp1 s setting as illustrated below The label of non ascii function key must use the same Font For example in Simplified Chinese keypad the fonts all use AR MingtiM GB 172 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Function Key Objects Properties General Security Shape Label Profile soe 0 IL O A thribiute Font AR Mingtihf OB Italic Underline Duplicate these attributes to every state After complete the keypad configuration add window11 into System Parameters General keyboard as illustration below System Parameter Settings fx Device Model General Security Font Extended Memory Printer Serv
302. ory Printen Backup Server Use MT Remote Frinten Backup server Note Use EagyPinter to configure PC for printing screen hardcopy and storme backup data Dutput sethings Chientation Horizontal Vertical Printer size Original size CO Fit to printer margins mm mm o mm nun Comumnucation sethings IF addes 1923 108 1 3 Fort 3005 Marsin User name Fasword 111111 7 In Output settings assign appropriate values for left top right bottom margins Note The margins are all assigned to 15mm in the example 8 In Communication settings fill in the IP address of the printer server and same as step 1 assign the port number to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 In Menu gt Objects gt Buttons select Function Key and assign Screen hardcopy to MT Remote Printer Server Screen hard copy Printer MT Remote Printer Server MT E enuo ote TET Beery eT USB dik 2 O 2O22 Hard copy screen to USB disk or printer Notification 9 Place the Function Key object in the common window window no 4 and you will be able to make screen hardcopies anytime when needed 510 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 10 Compile and download your project to the MT8000 HMI Press the Function Key object set in step 9 to make a screen hardcopy You can also use a PLC Control object to make screen hardcopies You cannot print
303. ow must be on the top of the base window window There is a Close this popup window when parent window is closed option with this function see the picture below when the function is selected the pop up window will be closed when executing change base window Otherwise users have to set a Close button on the pop up window to close the window Display popup window Close this popup window when change foll screen window This is used to select the window no when performing change base window change common window and pop up the window Return to This is used to return to the previous base window Fox example when previous changing window 10 to window 20 users can use this function to return to window window 10 This function is only available for base window change Close window Close the pop up windows on the top of the base window Items in ASCII UNICODE mode is used as elements to configure a keypad the ASCII UNICODE keypad is used where numbers or texts are needed to be input to the mode numeric input object or ASCII input object Refer to the Designing and Using Keypad chapter for detailed information ASCIVUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Clear Es fisen NICODE Enter Same as the keyboard s enter function Backspace Same as the keyboard s backspace function Clear To clear the temperate input alphanumeric strings stored
304. parameter of PLC is 9600 E 8 1 Before starting pass through users must set the parameters in MTP project and download the project to HMI 541 L ws WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Device Properties SIEMENS 87200 CHMI PLC PLC type SIEMENS 7200 CLF RS 495 20 w TOM COM 600 36 1 Interval of block pack words Max read comunand size words Max write conunend size words After the project is downloaded to HMI open the same project and change the PLC I F and COM port to COM 1 RS232 PC uses COM 1 to connect HMI as follows Device Properties F RS 232 4 COMI 600 E 8 1 Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read comumand size words Max write comumand size words After that press Pass through to assign HMI IP address for example 192 168 1 37 Finally press Get HMI Communication Parameters as follows 542 W WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Ethemet COM port HMIIP 192 168 1 37 Get HM Corrmunication Parameters HMI work mode Mormal Source COM Port PC gt HM COM 1 hel Baud rate 9600 v Data bits Pariy Even ka Stop bits Destination COM Port HMI gt PLC COR 3 w RS485 or Baud rate 9600 ww Data bits 8 Bits Parity Even v Stop bits 1 Bit Start Pass throug h Stop Pass through Press Start Pass through and HMI s
305. permanently Select All To select all tasks from Job List The backup task is not editable Edit is available only when a task is selected Delete is available when at least one task is selected 516 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual In Download Progress Window users can select the mode to show download progress by clicking the header of the progress column Please see the following illustration W Percentage Display Data Length Display EasyPrinter can reserve up to 10 000 messages in Message Window If a new message comes in the oldest message will be deleted Venu Options To show or hide toolbars Status Bar To show or hide the status bar Settings Configuration for EasyPrinter Please refer to the following illustrations General 517 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual MTSxxx Remote Printer Server Settings General HEIVEI Hardcopy Fort number of the server socket a005 User name Max eneth 14 characters admin Password Max length 14 characters 111111 Backup Naming Convention for HMI Folder when writing files Use IP address O Us HMI name tasien HMI name by L W9032 L W9039 Prefix TPS Ex TP 192 168 1255 Properties Wi Minimize to system tray Detailed message e Server gt Port number of the server socket Set the Ethernet socket number for HMIs to connect to The range goes from 1 to 65535 and 8005 is the default value e Server gt User
306. play will not change accordingly Ch 2 4 3577 21 52 16 09 07 O 0 3576 21 52 16 09 07 0 0 3575 21 52 1716 09 07 O 0 3574 21 52 1716 09 07 O 0 3573 21 52 1716 09 07 0 0 3572 21 52 16 09 07 0 0 3571 21 52 16 09 07 0 0 3570 21 52 16 09 07 0 0 300 2133er 0 0 Configuration Click the History Data Display icon on the toolbar the History Data Display dialogue box show up on the screen Fill in each items and click OK button a new object will be created See the pictures below History Data Display la B T 247 1 f W WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Shape BL Boinae ide Grid Enable Color ME Colon interval 0 OO Profile color Transparent Frame a Time Time HH MM kai Date Date DDMMY Y k Pe WAC NO O Time ascending Time descending History control PLE name Local HMI w Setting Cancel Setting Description Select the corresponding Data sampling object where the history data comes Sampling from Set grid enable or disable 248 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3982 220260907 0 0 eet 2202 re0o0r 0 To 2r foz fenoor o 0 3978 22 02 16 09 07 0 0 3977 22 02116 09107 0 0 3976 22 02 16 09 07 0 0 a eee a N N nen g apena w Color Set color of grid Column interval
307. predefined in configuration 202 Lid WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual WINDOW 33 b With title bar The popup window contains title bar and its position can be dragged at online operation WINDOW 35 Example to use indirect window Here is a simple example to illustrate indirect window object The pictures show how to configure an indirect window and use the word device LW100 to change the popup window Read address PLC name Local HMI Setting Set constant 35 to LAU I00 Set constant 36 to LW I100 Set constant to LU 100 i 34 E 35 WINDOW 035 a 36 WINDOW 036 a7 203 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Use the set word object SV_0O to set the value of LW100 as 35 and the location of indirect window will display window 35 WINDOW 35 Set constant 35 to LMAI00 Set constant 36 to LW IOO Set constant O to LM I00 Use the set word object SW_1 to set the value of LW100 as 36 and the location of indirect window will display window 36 Set constant 35 to LIO Set constant 36 to LM I00 Set constant O to LW I00 No matter window 35 or 36 is displayed on the indirect window location press SW_2 to set the value of LW100 to O will close the popup window The other way to close the popup window from indirect window object is to configure a function key with close window Once you press the function key the popup win
308. put Order to enable this feature Furthermore users can also select Group to set Input Order Group a The range of Input Order 1 511 b The range of Input Order Group 1 15 c The Input Order Group of an input object with Group unselected is 0 Criterion of searching the next input object a The system only searches it among the input objects with the same Input Order Group The system picks the input object with smaller Input Order to enter input state before another one with bigger Input Order If two input objects have the same Input Order Group and Input Order the system picks the one at bottom layer to enter input state first e When selecting Touch as Mode Refer to the following illustration when users complete inputting data on AE_ 2 the system transfers input state to AE_0 The reason why not transferring to NE_0 is because the Input Order Group of NE_0 is different from that of AE2 189 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual e When selecting Bit control as Mode a Users have to specify an Input Order for the object b No need to set Input Order Group because all the input objects with Bit control as Mode have the same Input Order Group that is different from any input object with Touch as Mode Keyboard e Select Use a popup keypad Specify the pop up position for the keyboard window The system displays the keyboard window on inputting data and
309. quence na Event mesage k E A A If Display chars 1s it means that the system will display all of characters Date MMDD Y Time HH MM 88 cancel Setting Description WL W WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Include Select category of events that belongs to the event display object categories category of an event is set in event log Please refer to Category statement in Event Log chapter 290 For example if the category of an event log display is set to 2 4 it will display all the active event messages with category equal to 2 3 or 4 WS WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Alarm Event Log Event Display Object s Properties ee p Event Display Category Mel eee splay Shane Font p Include categories 0 thin E Color Frame a Acknowledge es select box ee Format Acknowledge You may select Click or Double click to acknowledge a new event style When a new event comes up the operator can Click or Double click to acknowledge the new event the system will change the text color of that event and export the write value registered with the event to the designated register Take use of this feature the user can register a popup window and put the warning message in the window then configure an indirect window object when the event is acknowledged the write
310. r Settings General Output Backup files in Hardcopy i DAM T000 When target file has existed O Overwrite it The content will be destroyed Convert Batch File Enable DAM Ta0u0converticsy def 4 In Output click the button to browse and select a path for storage of the incoming history files 5 Click OK to apply the settings 512 WS WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 6 In Menu gt File select Enable Output to allow EasyPrinter to store any incoming backup request in the location specified in step 4 26 2 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder8000 In Menu gt Edit gt System Parameters click Printer Server tab and select Use MT Remote Printer Server the following dialogue box will appear oystem Parameter Settings Eg Device Model Creneral a yeten Setti g mecurity Font Extended Memory Printen Backup Server Use MT Remote Frinten Backup server Note Use EagyPinter to configure PC for printinge screen hardcopy and storme backup data Dutput sethings Orientation Horizontal Vertical Printer sze Ge Original size Fit to printer marine Maren Comunuication sethines IF addres 1924 168 1 2 Port 8005 Password 1111111 In Communication settings fill the IP address of the printer server and same as step 1 assign port number to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 In Menu
311. r of title This dialogue window defines the title 5272 22 43 09 16 09 07 22 43 08 16 09 07 You can use label tag library for title with multi language Go to setting and select one from label library Title Setting Title Label tag no label we Note lf you have run the off line simulation and the sampling data is saved in the record then you want to change the format of sampling data be sure to delete previous data record in C EB8000 HMI_memory datalog to avoid the system misinterpret the old data record 253 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 19 Data Block Display Overview Data Block is a combination of several word devices with continuous address for example LW12 LW13 LW14 LW15 and so on Use Data Block Display object to display multiple data blocks in trend curve for example it can display two data blocks LW12 LW15 and RW12 RW15 in trend curve simultaneously It is very useful to observe and compare the difference of trend curves Display Control LWi2 LW13 LW14 LW15 LW10 LW11 LW LW13 LW14 LW15 Snapshot of Data Block Display 254 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Configuration New object Click the Data Block Display icon Data Block Display s properties dialogue box appears as follows Hew Data Block Display Object General Display Area Shape No of channel Cursor line Enable Color i FLZ name
312. r to the following dialog e Deamamic liats PLO name Local HMI Ww Setting There following table shows the read address of low limit and high limit The Address means the register s address If the register is LW100 the Address is 100 Data format High limits read address Low limit s read address 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 Scale label To select the attribute of scale label on meter display acale label F Use scale label Font Arial Color es No of decimal O 235 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 17 Trend Display Overview Trend display object can use the curve to represent the data recorded by data sampling object The sampling operation is conducted by data sampling objects The trend display object display the result of sampling The following picture shows an example of trend display object 17 32 41 12 03 06 AAAA DARAAN pV AMACA AAD Configuration Click the Trend Display icon on the toolbar and the Trend Display Objects Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items press the OK button and a new Trend Display Object will be created See the picture below The following picture shows the General tab in the Trend Display Objects Properties dialogue box 236 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Trend Display Object General Trend Channel Shape Description Data Sampli
313. rch tS el Search all OS 20091002 or later supports 21 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Settings Description O To assign the desired specific path for RW file downloading 2 4 Simulation 2 4 1 On line Simulation Off line Simulation There are two types of simulations On line simulation amp Off line simulation By virtual device PC simulates the operations of HMI without connecting with PLC and HMI This shortens the time needed greatly even without the HMI in your hand While using Off line simulation users are allowed not to download the written project file to HMI but still see how it is shown and operated on PC Users don t need to connect PLC with PC under this mode On the contrary On line simulation is executed by connecting PC with PLC and accurately set the communication parameters When simulating on PC if the control target is a local PLC i e the PLC directly connected to PC there is 10 minutes simulation limit Before executing On line Off line Simulation features please select the source of XOB file 22 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Open Look wc CO propect Sj a050 Fimtaizl demo xb S s08Dtest xob SMTP L xb Ej 20061016 xob Ti RemoteHML xob CS Buttoni sol Sel templated zi xob Gd Direct vendow cob Ti Test xob all Indirect Window xob Ti Test_AB_DF1 sob bal MT BOS cob T Test labe xob SS MTS12_demo20061005 x0b M TestAddressIndex wob T
314. redefined path As the PLC position register changes value the shape or picture jumps to the next position along the path Configuration Click the Animation icon on the toolbar move the mouse to each moving position and click the left button to define all moving positions one by one When settings of all moving positions are completed click the right button of the mouse a new animation object will be created See the pictures below E Fj al Animation onal AHN Pasian D position 0 ESEN pasties i postion f PESNI A positian 2 S To change the object s attributes you can double click the left button of the mouse on the object and the Animation Object s Properties dialogue box as shown in the picture below will appear 215 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Animation Objects Properties General Shape Label Profile Dewi Athibute no of states 8 v Position 8 Controlled by resister O Based upon time interval Read address PLC name Local HMI Setting m Cancel Setting Description Attribute Total no of states To set the number of the states for this object a Controlled When select Controlled by register the designated register controls the by register object s state and position Read address If select Controlled by register option it is necessary to set the read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device t
315. ription amp HMI Write Control LW 9541 device station no COM 1 if configured 484 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 7 as Modbus ASCIl server device station no COM 2 if configured as Modbus ASCII server LW 9542 LW 9543 device station no COM 3 if configured as Modbus ASCII server device station no Ethernet if LW 9544 configured as Modbus ASCII server 22 15 COM Communication Description Set LB 9030 from OFF to ON force the LB 9030 system to use LW9550 LW9554 as new communication parameter of COM1 COM 1 mode Lw 9550 0 R882 R W R W 1 RS485 2W 2 RS485 4W COM 1 baud rate 4800 9600 LW 9551 19200 R W R W 38400 57600 115200 COM 1 data bits LW 9552 7 7 bits R W R W 8 8 bits COM 1 parity 0 none LW 9553 R W R W 1 even 2 odd COM 1 stop bits LW 9554 1 1 bit R W R W 2 2 bits Set LB9031 from OFF to ON force the LB 9031 R W R W R W system to use LW9556 LW9559 as new 485 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual communication parameter of COM2 COM 2 baud rate 4800 9600 LW 9556 19200 38400 9 600 115200 COM 2 data bits LW 9557 7 T bits 8 8 bits COM 2 parity Lw 9558 2 nore 1 even 2 odd COM 2 stop bits LW 9559 1 1 bit 2 2bits Set LB 9032 from OFF to ON force the LB 9032 system to use LW9560 LW9564 as new communication parameter of COM3 COM 3 mode LW 9560 0 RS232 ven 1 RS485 2W COM 3 baud rate
316. rohibit OC i Address 4 Unselect Setting on individual day In Start adjust time as 8 00 00 and select Monday to Friday Setting on individual day start Sun Mon Tue Wen Thu Fri Sat 5 In End select Enable termination action and adjust time as 17 00 00 End Enable termination action 17 6 Click OK a new schedule object is created and display on the schedule list Scheduler Example 2 325 V WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Set temperature at 90F at 8 00 and set it back to 30F standby mode at 17 00 Monday to Friday When the designated start time is reached When the designated stop time is reached LW100 90 C The running mode temperature setting is wirtten LW100 30 C The standy mode temperature setting is written Click New to add a new schedule object Follow the steps to set up the schedule object The LW100 is used to store set value of temperature 326 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Description Scheduler 1 Power OM startend action Acton mode O Bit ON Bit OFF Word write Acton address Address 16 bit Unsigned Word write value settings Constant O Addes Smatyohe 0 General tab 1 Power ON start end action Power ON startend action 2 Check Word write in Action mode Acton mode Bit ON Bit
317. rol Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 250 L ws WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Tite Shape Channel O 16 bit Unsigned Left of decimal Pt Right of decimal Pt Disney CTeating zer Channel 1 lOo bit BCD Display Channel 2 22 bit Unsigned _ Display Channel 3 32 bit Float Right of decimal Pt Center v Leading zero es Cancel Each history data display object can display up to 20 channels You can select the channels which you want to watch on the screen In the example below there are four channels in the data sampling object Ch 0 and Ch 3 are selected for display only The data format of each channel is decided by the related data sampling objects 251 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Ch 3 22 33 42 16 09 07 22 33 41 16 09 07 5264 EF 6 65 22 33 3 7 16 09 07 22 33 36 16 09 07 0 A219 AR ava T 7 24 Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Use title Title background Transparent Title Label library Label tag No None 252 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Setting Description To enable or disable title Mo Time Date Cho 9212 224509TTEUS0 4 22 43 08 160907 Title Transparent background To enable or disable transparent Background color Set the background colo
318. rom 3 1999 Width and Height of the window Generally the resolution of base window and that of HMI is identical For example if the HMI used is MT6100i the resolution is 800 480 Then the newly built window width will be 800 and height 480 The Width of the frame of the window Range from 0 16 the default is 0 84 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The Color of the frame of the window Users can select a color they like from the list or simply click Custom to adjust a self defined color If the Width of the frame is set 0 then this setting will be ignored Default HEHEHEHEHE EEEE CEE E ane E O i E J Custom Background Color The color of the background of the window Pattern The pattern of the background of the window If needed users can choose a pattern they like from pattern style that pops up after clicking button of the pattern Fatterm Style Pattern color The color of the pattern Filled Tick to determine if a window is filled with the color and pattern set for the background Underlay Bottom Middle Top window Up to three base windows can be specified as underlay windows for each base window from Bottom to Top The objects but not the backgrounds in underlay windows are displayed in this order in base window X Y Base window can also be used as pop up window Use X and Y to set the coordinates indicate where in the scree
319. rom multiple non consecutive Read devices Writes data to multiple non consecutive devices Write Read Coil Reads the specified coils in a continuous block Write Coil Writes the specified coils in a continuous block 32 2 Optional Parameters Parameters settings are used as follows ASCII Server Settings Baud rate Turn around delay rns Data bits Protocol Parity Rob t Simple Stop bits Response to write commands on O OFF 559 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Protocol Robust The protocol uses the non printable characters STX 02H and ETX 03H ACK O6H and NAK 15H and includes a 2 byte checksum Simple Some Host devices such as Motion Controllers are not capable of generating the non printable characters or calculating the checksum In this mode the data packets are formed as defined below but do not include the STX ACK ETX NAK or checksum The OxOD is at the end of the packet the packet sent by MT8000 also has a OxOD at the end Response to write commands sets whether or not MT8000 responds to write commands Responses On Responses Off Note If set to 1 the Turn Around Delay setting Parameter 2 has no affect 32 3 Network Support 32 3 1 Wiring The MT8000 ASCII protocol shall support network wiring using RS485 2 wire or 4 wire based on the setting of Parameter 1 32 3 2 Addressing The protocol shall support each MT80
320. rray size is 100 where minimum of array index is 0 and maximum of array index is 99 100 1 Variable and Array Initialization There are two ways variables can be initialized 1 By statement using the assignment operator Example inta float b 3 a 10 b O 1 2 During declaration char a 5 b 9 The declaration of arrays is a special case An entire array can be initialized during declaration by enclosing comma separated values inside curly brackets Example float data 4 11 22 33 44 now data 0 is 11 data 1 is 22 387 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 18 2 2 Operators Operations are used to designate how data is to be manipulated In each statement the operator on the left is set to the conditions on the right Operator Descripton Exame Gi Modulo division return A B 5 remainder Comparison Description emu Condition AND if A lt 10 and B gt 5 then C 10 Condition OR if A gt 10 or B gt 5 then C 10 Condition Exclusive if A xor 256 then B 5 OR Condition NOT if not A then B 5 388 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Shift and bitwise operators are used to manipulate bits within char short and int variable types with both signed and unsigned The priority of these operators is from left to right within the statement Shift left specified number of A B lt lt 8 bits bits Bitwise Operators Description Exampe a AN
321. rs can click Use picture to enable selecting a picture from the library How to set Shape Library Click Shape Library button the following dialog appears The currently selected shape is marked by a red frame Shape Library Library button jarrow 1 A i arrow l I arrow n New Lib buttond 3 Syster Frame E System Button z Unattach Lib System Lam a i D Untitled 1 Untitled 2 Untitled a Untitled States 2 States 2 States 2 Frame Frame Delete Shape state O State 11 ae a Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled E E States 3 States 3 States 3 States 3 H ag Frame Frame Frame Frame Display Inner Frame EEE 0 Untitled States 2 Frame 112 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual The illustration above provides information of one of the Shapes in the Shape Library as follows 0 Untitled The name and number of the shape in the library State no 2 The number of the states of the shape In this case it shows the Shape possesses two states Frame Indicate that the Shape is set with frame only The illustration below shows that the Shape is set with inner and frame q1 State no 2 Inner Frame Note About all the settings in Shape Library please refer to the illustrations in Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library for details Click OK and preview the design of the shape after the set
322. rview The Media Player function is not only used to play video files but also to provide uses of additional controls such as seeking Zooming volume adjusting and so on With the Media Player users can provide operation and maintenance instructions or standard procedures on video which can help to create an environment that enables any on site operators to perform tasks efficiently from clear comprehensible instructions Note The Media Player function is only available on the MT8000X Series models Configuration Click Media Player object icon on the toolbar Media Player object dialogue box show up set each item in the General tab press OK button a new Media Player object will be created See the pictures below Note The instruction of this section is an example to play a video file located in the example directory Media Player 300 L WE NTEK Hew Media Player Object General Preview Control address Conunand Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Ext device Athibute General tab Description PLO name Address Auto repeat EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Update video playing time OsD U OUEZ C 0 1 i jee sane T 2 File index etart time End time Folder name Cancel Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of Control address Users can also set addres
323. s to control the operation of media player Register a device address for Control Control address address Disable There is no manual control of video play operation The system will start to play the first 305 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual video at designated folder when the window is popup Command Users set this address to control the operation of media player gt Command control address 0 Parameter 1 Parameter 1 for control operation ania gt Parameter 1 control address 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 2 for control operation Lineal gt Parameter 2 control address 2 The system will turn bits ON when state changes or malfunctions gt Status control address 3 The system will write file index when starting to play a video gt File index control address 4 Start time The system will write video start time when starting to play a video unit sec Always 0 gt Start time control address 5 The system will write video end time when starting to play a video unit sec gt End time control address 6 Update Enable video The system will write video elapsed time into playing playing time register in every update period time seconds playing Update Update period of playing time range between 1 to time period 60 sec Playing Update the video elapsed time periodically unit Video time sec gt Playing time control a
324. s 7 result 3 is 8 end macro_command FLOAT2ASCII FLOAT2ASCII source result start len Description Transforms a floating value Source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s type i e if results type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a 408 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual cf variable start must be a constant macro_command main float source char result 4 source 56 8 FLOAT2ASCII source result O 4 result O is 5 result 1 is 6 result 2 is result 3 is 8 end macro_command ASCII2DEC source start result len Description Transforms a string source into a decimal value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 short result source O 5 source 1 6 source 2 7 source 3 8 ASCII2DEC source 0 result 4 result is 5678 end macro_command ASCIIZHEX ASCII2ZHEX source start result len Description Transforms a
325. s Each ASCII character take one byte each word contains two ASCII characters In the example shown below the object will display 3 2 6 characters abbdef When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after before the value of the register is changed successfully Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated bit device before or after update the word device About the Data Entry tab please refer to Numeric Input and Numeric Display section 198 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew ASCII Input Object General Security shape Alin Content Setting Description The picture shows the Font tab of the ASCII Input object and the ASCII display object Users can set the font font size font color and aligning mode Athibute Font Comic Sans MS ye Color _ _9 Sie 12 w Align 199 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Align There are two aligning modes Left and Right The picture below shows how each mode performs Left alignment ab bde Right alignment ab bde Size Set font size 200 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual
326. s command 3 read _no 2 the total words of reading is 2 words HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 calculate 16 bit CRC LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return_value read response if return_ value gt 0 and response 1 0x3 then read_data O response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 4x_1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 4x 2 setData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if end macro_command The following example explains how to design a request to set the status of 0x_1 The request uses Write Single Coil 0x5 command 443 N WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Request Functioncode 1Byte KOS Response Function code 1Byte 0x05 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error 0x85 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 The complete macro is as follows Write Single Coil ON macro_command main char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short i return_ value FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 0x1 station number command 1 Ox5 function code write single coil address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 command 4 Oxff force Ox_1 on command 5 0 CRC command 0 checksum
327. s the system will plot the XY curve the previous XY curve if exists would not be clear The system will reset the control address after operation complete 2 Clear XY trend curve Write 2 to control address the system will clear all the previous XY curves and reset the control address after operation complete 3 Refresh XY trend curve Write 3 to control address the system will clear the previous XY curve and plot the new XY curve and reset the control address after operation complete 269 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual No of data address This address store the number of XY data Each channel can have up to 1023 XY data Setting the channels detail for graph display Read Address PLC name select the PLC where the control address coming from Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Systme tag Index register of Read address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object PLC address Read address PLC name Local HMI _ Separated address for X and Y data Address woo o M 100 16 bit Unsigned Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Index register for read address The usage of each address as follows Dynamic limits is not enabled For example The Read address is LW100 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW100 X data 1 reads value from reading addres
328. s LW101 X data 2 reads value from reading address LW102 X data 3 reads value from reading address LW103 X data 4 reads value from reading address LW104 X data 5 reads value from reading address LW105 and so on The usage of each address as follows Dynamic limits is enabled For example The Read address is LW100 X low limit reads value from reading address LW100 X high limit reads value from reading address LW101 Y low limit reads value from reading address LW102 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW103 2 0 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual X data 0 reads value from reading address LW104 Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW105 X data 1 reads value from reading address LW106 Y data 1 reads value from reading address LW10 7 If you check Separated address for X and Y data it allows you to set different address for X and Y axis respectively Read address PLC name Local HMI peparated address for Hand Y data A data PLE name Setting Address L Ww 16 bit Unsigned Y data PLE name Setting adress ow 3 The usage of each address as follows Dynamic limits is not enabled For example The Read address is LW100 and LW200 X data X low limit reads value from reading address LW100 X high limit reads value from reading address LW101 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW102 X data 1 reads value from reading address LW103 X data 2 r
329. s in General tab while adding a new object a In Control address select Enable and register a word device to control the operation of media player object example LWO 301 Nees TK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Control address PL name Local HMI 0 M HMI w Setting Command sons J A r S S Pamete E O i End ine E b In Control address unselect the Update video playing time Update video playing time c In Ext device select USB1 and input example as Folder name Ext device O U OUB Folder name d In Attribute unselect Auto repeat and choose black as the background color Athibute Auto repeat Backeround Preview tab Users can examine whether the MT8000 supports the video format via preview function 302 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual foo a Click Load and select the file to be examined Users should put the file in the example directory of an USB disk b If the media player starts playing the video it means the MT8000 supports this video format Use lt lt and gt gt to navigate video by 1 minute each time c To play another video click Stop to close the video file and repeat from step a Prepare the video file a Remove all external devices SD USB disk connected to the MT8000 b Plug the USB disk which has the video file in it into the MT8000 Note The first step is there for
330. s to check all types of windows in EB 8000 If users change Object List to Window Preview every window will be shown in pictures The following section introduces how to create and set these windows Windows T x Object list J Window preview 0003 Fan x eai Eiss 3 Fast belection 4 Common Window 5 PLC Response Fast Selection 6 HMI Connection ood T Password Restaction 0 storage Space Insufficient g Le Common Windor ggs 10 WINDOW 010 11 i7 e 7 PLC Response 7 m 000g 6 2 1 Create a Window There are two ways to create a window One is to select a window number in window tree and right click then select New Complete all the settings in the pop up dialogue and click OK as shown below W 10 Main Menu 11 Show Toolbar 13 el New l4 F 13 3 Close 16 0 Liss 16 19 20 Text Object 83 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Window Settings Mame Window O11 Window mo Size Width 480 Height Frame Width 4 Color Background Color Ei Pattern ee Filled Pattern color Underlay window Bottom Mone Middle None Top None Popup window Start pos x ye lo Monopoly Settings Description The name shown after window is numbered The principle is to make it easy to read and be remembered For example Operate Manually etc w LO0 WINDOW O10 11 Operate Manually 19 Number of window Numbered f
331. se refer to EasyAccess 5 5 Security Parameters in Security tab determine the classes accessible for each user to adjust the objects and users password The security classes of objects are classified from A F and none for not ticking any class Up to twelve passwords can be set Only numeral setting is acceptable for password and the range is 0 999999999 70 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual oystem Parameter Sethings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup server Device Model General System Setting security elect operatable classes for each user User 1 Enable Password O Ma Fie Fic Mr PIE FIF User 2 v Enable Password User 3 7 Enable Fesword 333 MA M Mic OD OE OF User 4 Enable User 5 F Enable User 6 Enable User 7 wla WE Oc UE LE CIF According to the security setting EB8000 will control the classes accessible for each user to adjust the objects once they input their passwords In EB8000 while constructing a project the security classes of objects are classified from A F and None and can be set as shown below If None is set every user can access to adjust this object User restriction Object class Sound For example when the security class of User1 is set as below only objects with class A C E and none can the user adjust For more information please see Chapter 10 Security of Objects User 1 En
332. ser 2 Enable Password Ma Me Oc Op OF OF User 3 7 Enable Password 333 Ma Me Me Op Oe CF 128 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual User 1 can operate objects with class A user 2 can operate objects with class A and B and user 3 can operate objects with class A B and C Step2 Set objects in Window_ 10 as below bit TS btg 1411111111111111 n22 LE90S0 SB_0 Class A Button SB 4 Class B Button SB_2 Class C Button NE _O and NE_1 are numeric input objects with addresses LW 9219 and LW 9220 that are for inputting user ID and password LW 9219 is for entering user ID 1 12 with the length of 1 word in a data format of 16 bit Unsigned as below Humeriec Display Objects Propecties General Numeric Format Security Shape Font Profile Display Data format Mask Number of disits Left of decimal Pt Right of decimal Pt LW 9220 is for entering user password with a length of 2 words in a data format of 32 bit Unsigned as below 129 Lis WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Numerit Input Objects Propertes Display Data format 32 bit Unsigned v Mask Number of digits Left of decimal Ft 4 sh Right of decimal Ft 0 a4 ND_O is numeric display object with address LW 9222 to indicate user s state The data is in the format of 16 bit Binary Display Data
333. seseeseeeees 371 15 3 How to Create a Label LIOR ANY sxzscscascscesnccscccssosescadedecesastccncusacciatscseacdeacaieecatuessautaseavaenteleacacsion 372 ee SINC eS NMC e E A A E E E E A T cnet 373 15o Settings of M lti Language serris i ene E e E eE 374 Chapter 16 Address Tag Library cacti cctcsceescestvccctassocssepsesceespecuctin apossesaesaceselousansdbectechdisiaeeeensteestaecsies aioe 376 16 1 Creating Address Tag Library ss sseessoesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssressrossresseenseensesssesnss 376 102 SUING Adare se Tag LID IY eane E E EEEREN OS 378 Chapter 17 Transferring Recipe Data cccessssssssesessssssecsssesssssssssesssesesscsssscsesessssesscseseeseseseeseensseeeees 380 17 1 Updating Recipe Data by Using Ethernet or USB Cable eects 380 17 2 Updating Recipe Data by Using SD Card or USB Stick cesesseseseseeseeeeeeenen 381 EF LAWNS r Smt NC RE De Da eea E E EE EE E 382 17 4 Saving Recipe Data Automatically oe ccscessssssssesssesscsessssssssesssesesessseessesseseeeeeseseenses 382 Chapter 183 Macro RMSE SIC Css sz vavescscecascsacsaussucsiaaneareoaresenaesi E N E EAE EES 384 DE A ACY C On TUCO oea E E E A E E 384 EEEE E EE E E E S E E TE E E E E 385 18 2 1 C nstants and VariaDleS sssini iaeiei 385 WSS ZZ OP ACO e A E E AE EE E E E NE EET 388 STE EE a E a E E A E E E E AN E E E A 390 Tod DS TIO Enne E e sere eee EE EA E cece 390 18 3 2 Assignment CSI bac cece ece teceecea ese ecteteeet ey aectnne dc ptece ee
334. sfer length 10 bit lt tT ut ial Be acs SB lode oE inne interval Cosecono srnster lenoth el eg em em Sl a raaa ai ne he peel SSD Ti el elf wl ella af pi pea leks Bl a ei ae E E te Oa gh el Local HMELB30 Local HMLELB60 Mode Bit Time interval 3 0 second s transfer langth 15 bitis 314 Lb WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 27 PLC Control Overview The PLC control object activates a specific operation when the corresponding control device is triggered Configuration Click the PLC Control icon and the PLC Control Object summary appears as shown below ELC Control Object Change window Write data to PLC current base window General PLC control Back light controlfwrite back Press the New button and the PLC Control dialogue box appears Set all the attributes of PLC control and press OK button a new PLC control object will be created 315 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ELC Control PLC name Local HMI b Attribute Type of control Maeue tem ay ine mn E Change windo Active anly Wiwwrite data to PLCicurrent base window General PLC control _ Turn on back Back light control write back Back light contral Sound contral Trigger address a Screen hardcop PLC name Address Liy we jo o o 16 bit Unsigned Lo x c Setting Description Attribute amp Type of control Trigger To set the type of control Click the select
335. shows system reserved registers Address Taz Library O Customized System No Address tag name PLC name Address type Addres 2 LB S000 LE 9001 LE 9002 LE 9003 LE 9004 LE 9005 LE 9006 LB 9007 LE 9008 LE 9009 LE 9010 LE 9011 LE 9012 LE 9015 LE 9014 LE 9015 A GN1F initialized as ON initialized as OM initialized as OW initialized as OM initialized as OM initialized as CN initialized as OM initialized as OM initialized as OW initialized as OM data download indicator data upload indicator data download upload indicator FS window contral hide ON show OFF 4 FS button controlfhide fon y show OFF 4 FS window button contral hidelrOn show OFF cet on when a client connects this HeT Users can import MTSO0 tag to represent the address Dalat a et Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI aral HMT Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Rit LB 9000 LB 9001 LB 9002 LB 9003 LB 900 4 LB 9005 LB 9006 LB 9007 LB 9008 LB 9009 LB 9010 LB 9011 LB 9012 LB 9013 LB 9014 LB 9015 A Sn1F Read Write A Read Write Reads Write Read yyrite Reads Write Reads Write Read vyrite Reads Write Reads Write Read yrite Reads Write Read only Read only
336. single a data name quotes Example statement using a constant macro_command main short A B A and B are variables A 1234 B 0x12 1234 and 0x12 are constants 385 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end macro command 18 2 1 2 Variables Variables are names that represent information The information can be changed as the variable is modified by statements Naming Rules for Variables 1 A variable name must start with an alphabet 2 Variable names longer than 32 characters are not allowed 3 Reserved words cannot be used as Variable names There are 8 different Variable types 5 for signed data types and 3 for unsigned data types booi bit discrete 1 Declaring Variables Variables must be declared before being used To declare a variable specify the type before the variable name Example int a short b switch float pressure unsigned short c Declaring Arrays 386 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Macros support one dimensional arrays zero based index To declare an array of variables specify the type the variable name then the number of variables in the array enclosed in brackets Arrays are 1 to 4096 variables in length Macros only support up to 4096 variables per macro Example int a 10 short b 20 switch 30 float pressure 15 Minimum of array index is 0 and maximum of array index is array size 1 Example char data 100 a
337. st be a variable macro_command main float source result TAN 45 result result is 1 source 60 TAN source result result is 1 732 402 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual end macro_command Name COT COT source result Description Calculate the cotangent of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result COT 45 result result is 1 source 60 COT source result result is 0 5774 end macro_command SEC source result Description Calculate the secant of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result SEC 45 result result is 1 414 source 60 SEC source result if source is 60 result is 2 end macro command CSC source result Description Calculate the cosecant of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Example macro_command main 403 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual float source result CSC 45 result result is 1 414 source 30 CSC source result result is 2 end macro_command Name ASIN ASIN source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic sine of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result ASIN 0 86
338. syBuilder8000 User s Manual EB8000 project management nI Tool for setting format of Recipe data Users can PecipeEditor open Recipe data or data in External Memory here Notes for EB8000 version and latest information fp Uninstall EasyBuildex8000 To uninstall EB8000 Note The USB driver of i series HMI will be installed automatically Tool for executing simulation without installing ge EasySinulator EB8000 al 14 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 2 Project Manager Operations After installing EB8000 software users will see a Project Manager shortcut double click it users will see a window as shown below The Project Manager is a software shell for launching several utilities Some functions are duplicated in the EasyBuilder8000 screen editing program Project Manager can operate as a stand alone program In this chapter each function will be introduced respectively amp Project Manazer Sle HMI IP Password Type MT6000 8000 i Series Settings Reboot HMI Connection Ethernet O USB cable i series only HMI IF 192 166 1 55 DatafEvent Log File Information EasyBuildersoo0 Easy Converter EasyPrinter Recipe Extended Memory Editor EasyAddress Viewer Build Download Data for CF USB Disk Transfer Download Upload Simulation On line Simulation Off line Simulation Pass through Pass through l 15 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2
339. t address in General tab while adding a new object Address PLC name Local HMI ag Device type i Address aT Syvstern tag Address Format DODDO range 0 11999 Index register Invert signal Display shape with inverse state for example the present state is OFF but it displays the shape of ON state Blinking Set blinking attribute of bit lamp Blinking mode a None No blinking b Alternating image on state 0 Alternatively display the shape of state 0 and state 1 when the bit value is OFF state 0 c Alternating image on state 1 Alternatively display the shape of state 0 and state 1 when the bit value is ON state 1 d Blinking on state 0 Display the shape of state 0 in blinking when the bit value is OFF state 0 e Blinking on state 1 Display the shape of state 1 in blinking when the bit value is ON state 1 150 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 2 Word Lamp Overview A Word Lamp object displays the corresponding shape according to the value in the designated word address up to maximum of 256 states Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO mm Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO Configuration Click the Word Lamp icon in the toolbar and the Word Lamp Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new word lamp object will be cr
340. t been restricted to be the same as COM 1 but the data bits must set to 8 In general COM 2 is set to use a higher baud rate for more efficient communication 28 2 How to Create a Project of Slave HMI System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup server Device Model eneral bysten petting pecurity Device list Mame Location Device type Interface Local HMI Local MTs070iHsMTSOTO Disable F TEE FE Sernes COM 1 master slave FA TEE FB Series COMI 15200 E Local HMI Above picture shows HMI 2 s content of Device list HMI 2 wants to control PLC via HMI 1 thus HMI 2 recognizes this PLC as a remote PLC So it is necessary that add a Remote PLC 1 into the device list This example shows the remote PLC is FATEK FB Series How to create Remote PLC 1 is described below Step 1 Create a new device and select FATEK FB Series for PLC type PLC default station no must be set correctly PLC type FATEK FB Sei Y 1 10 FATEE FB so PLC IF PLC default station Step 2 Correctly set the parameters HMI 2 s COM 1 connects HMI 1 s COM 2 so they both must have the same communication parameters and interfaces ignoring the PLC parameters As below HMI 1s COM 2 and HMI 2 s COM 1 use RS232 and the parameters are 115200 E 8 1 529 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual PLC type FATEK FE Series 1 10 FATEE FB a com COMI COM COM yt
341. t into result start the second character is put into result start 1 and the last character is put into result start len 1 source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant macro_command main short source char result1 4 short result2 4 source 5678 DEC2ASCIll source result1 0 4 result1 O is 5 result1 1 is 6 result1 2 is 7 result1 3 is 8 the length of the string result1 is 4 bytes 1 4 407 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual DEC2ASCIll source result2 0 4 result2 O is 5 result2 1 is 6 result2 2 is 7 result2 3 is 8 the length of the string result2 is 8 bytes 2 4 end macro_command HEX2ASCII HEX2ASCIl source result start len Description Transforms a hexadecimal value source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s type i e if results type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant macro_command main short source char result 4 source 0x56 78 DEC2ASCIll source result 0 4 result O is 5 result 1 is 6 result 2 i
342. ted to the data format of object In the example below Data Format Low limit High limit 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address Address 2 An extended function is zoom in and zoom out function Example of zoom in out function For zoom in out the trend graph user has to check the Limit Dynamic limits as picture below lt PLE name Local HMI ww Setting For example the LWO and LW1 are to control low limit and high limit you may change the value of LW1 to zoom in out This following picture is in original size The range of trend is between 0 30 The arrow on the right side are set word LW1 increment JOG and LW1 decrement JOG for control the zoom in and zoom out function 245 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Decrease LW1 s value to exhibit zoom in function as shown below The value of LW1 decreased to 11 Increase LW1 s value to exhibit Zoom out function as shown below The value of LW1 increased to 41 246 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 18 History Data Display Overview History Data Display object displays data stored by data sampling object It displays history data in numeric format Please note that the history data display will not refresh automatically it only retrieve the data from the designated record and display at the time window popup If the content of the designated record is updated the history data dis
343. tep 1 Create and open a window for a keypad to be added For example set WINDOW 200 as the window for a keypad ba lye eee 199 H BOO Keyboard 201 on 202 Step 2 Adjust the height and width of WINDOW 200 and create a variety of Function Key objects in it Input signals will be triggered by pressing Function Keys The Function Key objects in WINDOW 200 are arranged as above These objects should be set in ASCII UNICODE mode Here FK_11 is used as the Escape Esc key and its settings 138 W WE INTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual ASCILUNICODE mode Enter Backspace O Clear Esc ASCII UNICODE FK_14 is used as the ENTER key and its settings ASCIMINICODE mode O Bakya Ofka Ole ESCI UNICODE Function Key s other than FK_11 and FK_14 are mostly used to input number or text For example FK_0 is used for inputting number 1 and its settings ASCIVUNTICODE mode Enter Backspace Clear Es ASCII UNICODE Select a suitable Picture for each Function Key object GP_0O is a picture object which is placed in the bottom layer as the background waya JJG JJB Step 3 Go to General tab in System Parameter Settings and click Add in Keyboard Add a keyboard dialog appears Select WINDOW 200 and press OK 139 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Add a keyboard window Window no 200 Keyboar
344. ter 1 target location sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 Decrease playing time by Parameter 1 seconds If the system is previously playing video it continues to play after the operation If previously paused it keeps paused 2 If the playing time is less than start time the system play video from the beginning i Adjust volume Command 9 Parameter 1 volume 0 128 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Default volume is 128 j Set video display size Command 10 Parameter 1 display size 0 16 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 0 Fit video image to object size 2 1 16 Magnification from 25 400 Set 1 for 25 2 for 50 3 for 75 and so on k Status control address 3 309 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 15 09 08 02 01 00 Reserved all0 ojo sia bit Bit 00 open file bit 0 file closed 1 file opened Bit 01 play file bit 0 not playing video 1 playing video Bit 08 command error bit 0 command accepted 1 incorrect command or parameters Bit 09 file error bit 0 file format accepted 1 unknown file format or reading fi When playing a video the system will turn ON open file bit and play file bit If the file is unable to be scanned or the command is incorrect the command error bit will be set ON 01 1 If file format is unsupported or disk I O error happens during playing e g user unplugs the USB disk the file error bit
345. the toolbar and the Function Key Object s Properties dialogue box will appear fill in each items and press the OK button a new function key object will be created See the pictures below EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Founcton Eey Object General Security hape Label Desorption Activate after button is released Change full screen window Change common window Display popup window Window no 50 Keypad 1 Integer Reto to previous window O Close window ASCILUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Clear O Es O ESCI UNICODE Execute macro Window title bar Hard copy sereen to USB disk or printer Screen hard copy Notification O net ON met OFF PLZ name ocal HMI l B Setting Function Key object provides the following operation modes Setting Description Active after If this function is selected the operation is activated when touched and button is released If the function is not selected the operation is activated once being released touched Change Change base window full screen NOTE Do not use this function to pop up the window which has been opened window by direct indirect window object 168 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Change Change common window refer to the windows chapter for related common information window Display popup Pop up window The pop up wind
346. ting LW 9560 PLC I F O RS232 1 RS485 2W LW 9561 baud rate O 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 5 600 5 115200 LW 9562 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW 9563 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd LW 9564 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits Click Get HMI Communication Parameters to update HMI current states and communication parameters 540 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 29 2 2 HMI Work Mode There are three work modes in the pass through function Mode Description Before getting the settings of HMI the work mode is displayed Unknown Normal The work mode Normal means that PC can t control PLC via HMI Pass through HMI is working on pass through state at this time the PC application can control PLC via source com port Source COM Port Destination COM Port The communication parameters of source and destination COM port are displayed on these two areas The settings will be used when pass through is enabled The Baud rate Data bits Parity and Stop bits of Source COM Port and Destination COM Port have to be the same Source COM Port connects PC so select RS232 mode Destination COM Port connects PLC so settings of the COM port depend on the PLC s requirement For example the illustration below shows the setting when HMI connects SIEMENS 7 200 The HMI COM 1 RS232 connects PC COM 3 RS485 2W connects PLC The communication
347. ting is completed Preview VOOO Backgrom E How to set Picture Library Click Picture Library button and Picture library dialog appears The currently selected picture is marked by a red frame 113 Ly WE NTEK Picture Library Library iconii O PB Red States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 4 Lamp Red States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 80054 bytes BMP 100x100 5 Lamp Green States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 2 PB Yellow States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 Lamp Yellow States 2 30354 bytes BMP 100 1013 SPB Blue States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 FiLamp Blue States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 Delete All States Delete Cur State Insert Before Insert After Import Picture Modify Picture O PB Red States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 The illustration above provides information of one of the Pictures in the Picture Library as follows O PB Red The number and name of the Picture 2 The number of the states of the picture 30054 The size of the Picture bytes BMP The format and resolution of the Picture BMP means 100x100 bitmap Picture and its format can also be JPG PNG DPD 114 Picture Total states Image size Image format L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Note About all the settings in Picture Library please refer to the il
348. tion button system register also provides the following addresses for users to Enable Disable certain functions in order to control fast selection window button The related registers are listed below Please refer to Chapter 22 system reserved words and bits for more details LB 9013 FS window control Enable open Disable close LB 9014 FS button control Enable open Disable close LB 9015 FS window button control Enable open Disable close 6 1 4 System Message Window Window no 5 8 are the defaults of system message windows Window Description Window no 5 is the PLC When the communication between PLC and HMI is Response message disconnected this message window will pop up window automatically right on the window opened previously Window 6 is the HMI When failing to connect with remote HMI this message connection message window will pop up automatically window Window 7 is the Password If user wants to control an object without authorization Restriction message this window may pop up as an alert or not depending on window how this object is set originally 8l Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Window 8 is the Storage When HMI built in memory USB disk or SD card run out Space Insufficient of storage space this message window will pop up message window automatically Users can use system address tag to view the free memory space in HMI USB disk or SD
349. tory data In this case users must choose device 0 the top layer of target file that contains file of mt8000 to correctly download the file gt i y Directory pecard Fj O Pocard PO Usbdisk Eo mtoi ceca 51 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 5 System Parameter Settings Enter EB8000 select menu Edit System Parameters and the System Parameter Settings dialog appears oystem Parameter Sethngs Ed Font Extended Memory Printer Backup server Device Model Creneral avatem petting Security Device list Local HMI Local HMI Local M To0FO0H M Te 07O Di able Ni i he i Ce Ce Project description m System Parameter Settings are divided into eight parts Device Model General System Setting Security Font Extended Memory and Printer Backup Server These will be introduced respectively in this chapter 52 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 5 1 Device Parameters in Device tab determine all of the attributes of each device controlled by the HMI they are connected with The device can be a PLC a remote HMI or a PC After opening a new mtp file in EB8000 a default device Local HMI is shown in the Device List This Local HMI is used to identify current HMI which means every mtp file must at least contains one Local HMI in Device List Select Settings under the device
350. tribute of trend display 241 1 word 2 words 2 words 1 word EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Trend Display Objects Properties General Trend Channel Shape Profile Frane D a Backeround show acroll controls Enable Color division s Verti interval Enable HEMM HH MM Color M Date MMDDYY ODDMMYY DDMMYY O YYMM DD Cancel Setting Description Frame The color of frame Background The color of background Show scroll To enable disable scroll control on the bottom of trend display object controls Set the distance and the color of grid Horiz Set the number of horizontal line Verti interval a Pixel Point distances Pixel Time When select pixel to set the display interval see note on the above 242 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual graph and General tab the Verti interval is used to select how many sampling point will be included between two vertical grid line See the picture below Verti interval point s b Time When select Time to set the time range of display data the Verti interval is used to select the time range between two vertical grid lines See the picture below Verti interval condi According to these settings the system will calculate the number of vertical grid line automatically Time Scale To enable the time scale on the bottom of trend display Format To select
351. ue appears as below 356 L WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual gz E 24g Cal up shape Library Shape Library Library state a 2 6 Frame jarrow 1 jarrow arowa hin phere System Frame D Untitled 1 Untitled 3 a B eer System Button States 3 States 3 _ States 3 States 5 System Lamp Frame Frame Frame Frame 4 Untitled 5 Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled States 13 States 3 States 3 States 3 H ME Frame Frame Frame Frame Display Inner Y Frame State O State 11 Select Lib Mew LIB Unattach Lib Delete All States Delete Cur State Rename Place Setting Description Library Shape Libraries which have been added into the current project Select the library source of a Shape from the list Select the state to be displayed by current Shape If the selected Shape isn t displayed it means that the Shape does not exist or the state of the Shape isn t defined Select Lib Click Select Lib and the following dialog appears for users to select the file path of the Shape Library to be added By previewing the content of the library right side of the window users can select suitable library 357 Lob WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Upit Ee arraia Ee arrow ply mitoni pb Ben sik Te bettors ph Ta button p Gidri pb es Ei Frarne pib EE MTa000_ Demo sath Op SM Ti00_femo_66ha0_O pb THT Dero 0000 0p
352. ue will appear as follow Data Type Description BEER 16 bit BCD C 32 bit BCD C 16 bit HEX C 32 bit HEX 16 bit Unsigned C 16 bit Signed C 32 bit Unsigned C 32 bit Signed l Float String WORD s cnet First you can assign a readable name as Description for the column And select the correct data type for the column If String is selected as data type you must specify the length of the string in addition 492 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 24 2 Setting of Recipe Editor How to Add a Recipe EMI File 1 In Menu gt File select New and the following dialogue will appear set Data Format Address range unit word gt Select your data format From o To 100 Save Format Delete Format Data format Description 16 bit HEX C 32 bit HEX fe 16bit Unsigned C 16 bit Signed C 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Signed Float Sting WORD G Oo Cael 493 Le WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 3 After all the settings is finished a new document appears as follow il RecipefExtended Memory Editor New document File Edit View Window Help Dah t Be S a Hew docoment 4 Users can view and modify the data in the sheet 5 In Menu gt File gt Save As select the correct format and file name to create a recipe or EMI file Export to CSV File After opening a recipe or EMI file select Menu gt File gt Save As and choose file format
353. ues is return to ret Local variable Variables that are used in the function block must be declared first 399 Lv WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual declaration This is in addition to passed parameters In the above example x and y are variables that the function can used Global variables are also available for use in function block Statements Statements to execute return value Optional Used to return a value to the calling statement The value can be a constant or a variable Return also ends function block execution A function block is not always necessary to return a value but when the return type is defined in the beginning of the definition of function the return command is needed endsub Must be used to end a function block 18 5 Build In Function Block EasyBuilder8000 has some build in functions for retrieving and transferring data to the PLC data management and mathematical functions 18 5 1 Mathematical Functions Name SORT SQRT source result Description Calculate the square root of source into result source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable source must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float source result SQRT 15 result source 9 0 SQRT source result result is 3 0 end macro command 400 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual CUBERT source result Description Calculate the cube root of sour
354. uilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 30 Project Protection It is an intelligent association to design program EB8000 supports the protection function of project file to ensure users design achievement 30 1 XOB password Users can set password to protect the XOB file in Compile window It must input the password if the user wants to decompile the XOB file to MTP XOB password range 0 4294901 760 Project name Ci Documents and Settings Nicolas Am MTP1 mtp OB file name C Documents and Settings Nicolas am MTF i xob ZOB password fused in decompiler Decompilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI Password x Password Hui range 0 4294901760 Cancel CA Documents and Settings Nicolas C Documents and SettingsiMicoalas 0 error s O warningis Object size 56204 bytes Font size 314444 bytes Picture size 792968 bytes Shape size 842 bytes Sound size 36474 bytes Macro size 14 bytes Total size 1200966 bytes 1 15 succeeded Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects euid font ies 545 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 30 2 Decompilation is prohibited When select this function the system will automatically disable the XOB password Furthermore the XOB file can t be decompiled to the MTP Compiling Eg Project name C Documents and Settings Nicolas zt MTP 1 mtp XO fle name C Documents
355. undefined After clicking OK the graph will be added to Shape Library Illustration below shows that Shape No 0 in library Test has only one state state0 and is defined as a frame 0 Untitled States Frame Step 3 Likewise create another Shape state by the same process as in Step 2 but this new graph has to be defined as state 1 save to Shape Library Shape library TEST Desnription Untitled Shape no 0 Frame C Inner Width TT Height 73 Frame undefined Inner undefined A complete Shape with two states is created See the following picture 361 Lid WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual oii Library State O Stee 11 Se 7 14 2 Creating Picture Library Click the Call up Picture Library button in toolbar and the Picture Library dialogue appears jae sae Call up Fictore Library 362 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Picture Library Library icon Button Demo grapho Graph map Computer Buttoni eT TER Deena Parris background O PB Red I PB Green ZPE Yellow SPB Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 30054 bytes 80054 bytes 30054 bytes 80054 bytes State O State 11 30054 bytes 30054 bytes 30354 bytes 30054 bytes EMP BMP BMP BMP 4 Lamp Red S Lamp Green Lamp Yellow FiLamp Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 Import Picture
356. user 12 can be obtained from system reserved registers LW 9500 user 1 s password to LW 9522 user 12 s password 24 words in total Users can change passwords even when the HMI is in operation When state of system reserved register LB 9061 update password set ON switches from OFF to ON EB8000 will use the data saved in LW 9500 to LW 9522 to update the password and use the new password in future Note The user operable classes of objects won t be changed due to the change of password When the state of LB 9050 user logout switches from OFF to ON current user will be forced to logout the system At this time only the object defined as None can be operated LW 9222 classes can be operated for current user records the operable classes for current user bit0 1 means the operable object for current user is class A bit1 1 means the operable object for current user is class B and so on 124 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 10 2 Security of Objects Hew Fonction Eey Object General necucity Shane Label matety control Min press tome sec 0 e E S Max waiting time ec 10 Interlock Use interlock function Hide when disabled C Graved label when disabled Enable when Bit is ON Enable when Bit is OFF PL name Local HMI Setting User restriction Object class Class 4 w C Disable protection permanently after initial acti
357. value is written into the read address of the indirect window and call up the popup window Max event The maximum number of events to be displayed in the event display no object When the number of events is larger than the maximum the oldest event will be removed from the event display object Color Set the color of events in different states a Acknowledge b Return to normal c Select box The system draw a highlight box around the latest acknowledged event Acknowledge 13 12 19 i Event f When LW f gt 10 a AE a ERA Me Vert REAA eN Ee i 1312 15 Event 2 when LBO 0N 7 ETET Event 1 When LW 1 gt 10 f 131214 i Event 0 when LWO 100 Sequence no Return to normal Select box 291 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual trigger date trigger time notification time return to normal time O f2 44i06 fF 26 21 F526 37 15 26 36 Event 0 when Li Event 2 when LE a Sort Set the order to display alarm message Time ascending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the bottom Time descending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the top b Order amp Characters Users can decide the display item and how the item display order c Date Event trigger date Display the date tag with alarm message There are four formats of date tag 1 MM DD YY 2 DD MM YY 3 DD MM YY 4 YY MM DD d Time Event trigger time Display the time tag with alarm message There
358. vation C Display warming message if access denied C Make invisible while protected Soun Enable Sound Library Sound Index Default Plas sc e Safety control Safety control is mainly used to prevent operator from miss operating an object accidentally There are two methods for protection Min press time sec Only when pressing the object continuously longer than the time set here can an object to be activated successfully Display confirmation request After pressing the object a confirm dialog appears Users need to click Yes to confirm executing If response to this dialog comes later than the set Max waiting time sec the dialog will disappear 125 Lih WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual automatically and the operation will be canceled AN Please confina the operation Message text The one above is Please confirm the operation in the dialogue is defined in System Message object and can be changed by user Click System Message icon in tool bar and the dialog appears Content in Message0 is for operation confirmation W 46 HET E fe WP Passe E g 10 WIN Syttem Mecsare Confirmation required Message 0 Please confirm the operation Font Aria System message bax 1 Message 1 Please input the password Font Arial System message box 2 Message 2 A system emor When this feature is applied to
359. vement mode and range a X axis only The object is only allowed to move along the X axis The moving range is defined by Min X and Max X 212 We WEINTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Attribute Mode No of states b Y axis only The object is only allowed to move along the Y axis The moving range is defined by Min Y and Max Y A thibute Wo of states c X amp Y axis The object is allowed to move along the X axis and Y axis The moving range in XY direction is defined by Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y respectively Attribute Mode X amp Y ais o O No of states 8 O w Mayo O ero d X axis w scaling The object is for X axis movement with scale Supposed that the value of the designated register is DATA the system uses the following formula to calculate the moving distance on the X axis X axis move distance DATA Input low Scaling high Scaling low Input high input low 215 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Display ratio Limit address Attribute Mode X axis wi scaling v No of states g yf Inpotlow 0 Input scale low 300 scaling high 1000 For example the object is only allowed to move within 0 600 but the range of the register s value is 300 1000 set Input low to 300 and Input high to 1000 and set Scaling low to O and Scaling high to 600 and the object will move within the ran
360. w several results of different settings Start degree 290 End degree 70 2 Start degree 120 End degree 240 Start degree 40 End degree 140 gt Start degree 225 End degree 315 Background Set the object s background color and profile color Full circle N e recnamneneenmenen 231 WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual otherwise the object will display the defined degree range See the picture below Full circle non full circle Transparent When the Transparent is selected the object will not display the background and profile color See the picture below To set the tick mark s number and color a To set Pointer s style length width and color Pin point To set pin point s style radius and color The following pictures show the Limit tab and the sign of low and high limit set in the Limit tab 232 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Hew Meter Display Object General Cutline Limite Shane Value Zemo Svan 100 Range limits v Enable Low E Mid High a mnp a Use v r defined radius Damamic limits PL name PS HMI wt Setting cale label Font Ayi o s Right of decimal point Cancel Setting Description To set object s display range Meter display object will use the value of Zero and Span and the value of register to calculate the pointer s indication posit
361. when Capture address changes from OFF to ON system will be triggered to capture one image each second from 5 seconds before the triggering time to 5 seconds after the triggering time Note 1 Video In Object can only be used in MT8000X which supports VIP function 2 Only video image in one channel can be input at any moment while running system 3 Capture function won t be influenced by pause playing The video image that should be played while not paused will still be captured 4 Recommended Format and Resolution at 50 NTSC 720x480 360 x 240 720x576 360 x 288 This function only supports NTSC and PAL format 355 Lub WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library EB8000 provides Shape Library and Picture Library features to add visual effects on objects Each Shape and Picture includes up to 256 states This chapter expatiates on how to create Shape Library and Picture Library For usage of shape and picture library please refer to Chapter 9 Object General Properties 14 1 Creating Shape Library A shape is a graph composed of lines rectangles and circles A complete Shape can possess more than one state and each state can include two parts frame and inner See State O State i the illustration below The frame and inner of a shape can be used separately or together by an object Click Call up Shape Library and the Shape Library dialog
362. will be set ON 01 2 Refer to the following figure the value of status at each state would be Stop status Pause status 1 open file bit Playing status 3 open file bit play file bit Playing play command 1 2 3 ae command switch pause command Finish Stop e Pause stop command 5 Users should only set values to Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 and regard the other registers as read only Restrictions 310 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual m The system can only play one video file each time m If Auto repeat is unselected the system will stop playing video and close the file after complete a video play operation m If control address is unselected the system will find the first file in the designated directory and start playing it 311 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 13 26 Data Transfer Time based Overview Data transfer Time based object is the same as Data transfer Trigger based object it also transfers the data from source to destination register The difference is the way to activate data transfer operation The Data transfer time based object conducts data transfer operation based on time schedule it can also transfer data in the unit of bits Configuration Click Data Transfer Time based Object icon on the toolbar the summary of data transfer objects is shown as follows Sea Eee Data Transfer i
363. word address all the trend curves will be cleared b The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve is cleared 261 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Word Address Last displayed graph Ta Clear 2 Control No of Data 40 40 S40 Data 6 Clears the previous graph display Even if palais there is data the graph does not display How to clear the previous trend curve and display new one a Write the number of data to No of data address i e control word address 1 b Have the content of data block ready for display Note data block start from control word address 2 c Write 3 to Control word address the previous trend curves will be cleared and the new content in data block will be plot on the screen d The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve displayed Word Address Redraw screen No of Data Last displayed graph 40 Data 1 i Data 2 20 Data 3 Data 1 10 Data 4 Data 6 Clears the previous graph display then uses SS ait the current data to _ display the graph again 262 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual How to use offset mode If offset to start address is selected the Data storage start address will be calculated from control word address Offset value storage address Offset value storage address is control word address 2 In the fo
364. work mode is switched into Pass through Users can execute on line simulation Now PC application can control PLC via HMI and HMI is acting as a converter at this moment Note The communication between HMI and PLC will be paused when pass through is active If users want to resume communication between HMI and PLC please press Stop Pass through to disable this function 29 2 3 Using System Reserved Addresses to Enable Pass Through Function Other way to enable pass through is to use LW 9901 LW 9902 to set source COM port and destination COM port directly When the values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 match conditions as below HMI will start pass through automatically 543 y WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual a The values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 has to be 1 or 2 or 3 1 COM1 2 COM2 3 COM 3 b The values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 should be not the same Note If users want to stop pass through just change the values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 to O lf users need to change the communication parameters just change the relative reserved addresses Please refer to the section above or the relevant chapters to understand how to use these addresses and set ON to LB 9030 LB 9031 and LB 9032 the HMI will be forced to accept new settings LB 9030 Update COM1 communication parameters set ON LB 9031 Update COM2 communication parameters set ON LB 9032 Update COM3 communication parameters set ON 544 Lob WE INTEK EasyB
365. xecuted nonmnally se LY 9046 9047 to change HMI key LB9046 indicates check result hey error when status i on Users can use LW9046 LW9047 32 bit to set the HMI key The value is unable to be read or written into this two word registers even by remote HMI While using this function the user can set the password project key s password range 0 4294901750 and the XOB file can only be executed on specific HMI whose HMI Key must be the same as Project key If the Project Key is different from the HMI key the system will turn ON LB9046 HMI needs to be rebooted while setting HMI key every time 547 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual Project Protection i series supports only This function supports a project can be executed only on a specific HML Project a HMI Le Project Key HMI Key HMI Key must be the same as Project Key for normal conmmuncation Set Project Key in System Parameters General page of EB8000 Use LW 9046 32 Bit to set HMI Key LW 9046 is write only The status of LB 9046 will becomes ON if HMI Key is different from Project Key HMI Key fof range 0 4294901750 Ly Easy View 30 5 Project password MTP file Users can set password to protect the MTP file in System parameter Security tab It must input the password if the user wants to edit the MTP file MTP password range 1 4294967295 _ Enable User 10 User 11 _ Enable Password
366. y some defined labels in Label Library users can find those Labels in Label tag by selecting Use label library in the object s Label tab General Security Shape Label Use label Use label library Label tag Ete Use bitmap font When Use label library is selected Content dialog shows the content of selected label tag and the settings of Font type are also included in the Label Library Attribute Font l Size 16 s Alien Left v Blink None Ww Italic Underline Duplicate these attributes to 373 EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual 15 5 Settings of Multi Language When users would like to have the objects text to show multi language except for using Label Library it needs to use the system reserved register LW 9134 language mode The value of LW 9134 can be set from 0 to 7 Different data of LW 9134 corresponds to different Languages The example below demonstrates how to use multi language feature First of all create a Text Object and set the content of it as below Hew Bit Lamp Object General Security Shape Label Use label Zoe nel bay Libelng Use bitmap font Label Library Next create a Numeric Input Object Set its Read address as below you will see the Read address in use is the system reserved register LW 9134 Read address PLC name Local HMI etting Address Lw 9134 16bib language mode w
367. ype Address Systme tag Index register for the read address 216 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual b Based upon time interval Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object In the table below it describes the address that control shape s state and position in different data format Data Format Address to control Address to control Preto easan eat ponton For example if the designated register is LW100 and the data format is 16 bit Unsigned then LW100 represents object s state LW101 represents position In the picture below LW100 2 LW101 3 so the object s state is 2 and position is 3 POSITION F sositian Q pashan d position 4 posite 2 postion J ua State 2 L b100 2 LWIOI 3 lf Based upon time interval is chosen the object automatically changes status and display location Time interval attributes is to set the time interval for states and positions Time interval attributes Position speed O1 condis Image state change Backward cycle Imase update time 01 condis Position speed Position changes speed the unit is 0 1 second Supposed that Speed is set to 10 the object will change its position every 1 second Backward cycle 217 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual If the object has four positions position 0 position 1 position 2 and position 3 and Backward cycle is

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Approach® G6  Multi Mode Low Temperature Plasma Sterilizer  Manuale Officina LGA 226 in Italiano      Hamilton Beach 76475 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file